Footscray City Films

					Footscray City Films
                                                                      Footscray City Film School is an independent tertiary institution
                                                                      providing courses which vary from one to three years and are based             Courses available through VTAC
                                                                      on National Industry Training Packages in Certificate IV, Diploma and
                                                                      Advanced Diploma of Screen and Media.
                                                                                                                                                     n Film and Television Production
                                                                      Students are provided with hands on tuition in short film production
                                                                      on up to 20 films per year, on Canon 5D Mkll DSLR PRODUCTION On
                                                                      Rigs, Sony EX3, iphone 4,Super 16mm, and High Definition Digital                  FCC, Footscray
                                                                      equipment and Mac OSX for Editing on Final Cut Pro—taking them                    97602 (DFP)
                                                                      from the concept to the marketing of their films. First semester                  » Certificate IV in Screen and Media: FT1
                                                                      involves one week location film camp at Somers where every student                » Diploma of Screen and Media: FT2
                                                                      shoots their own film. This represents the world’s best practice. In
                                                                      Semester 2, all students shoot a major film for one week, anywhere
                                                                                                                                                        » Advanced Diploma of Screen and Media: FT3
                                                                      throughout Victoria using state of the art equipment. There are                   About the course: Courses reflect the different roles of film
                                                                      industry links and attachments.                                                   making practitioners who possess a practical knowledge base
                                                                                                                                                        and use a range of specialized technical skills to produce, direct
                                                                      Each qualification comprises core competencies and a selection of                 and distribute films. The qualification applies to a range of
                                                                      electives. The pathway to the Advanced Diploma will incorporate Units             formats, including shorts, corporates, documentaries, web and
                                                                      3 and 4 in Media, Studio Arts, Photography and Multimedia, Certificate            features. Each year level delivers more complex production skills,
                                                                      IV and Diploma of Screen and Media. It is also a pathway for students             culminating in a fully professional understanding of Film Making,
                                                                      who are studying a degree at University in Media and Communication.               including Producing, Writing, Directing, Shooting, Sound Recording
                                                                      Footscray City Films is recommended as a tertiary preparation course              and Editing. Students are provided with hands on tuition, with
                                                                      provider by the Victorian College of the Arts Film and Television School. It      Industry professionals. The year culminates in Graduate Screenings.
  Campus location and contacts                                        is also highly regarded for giving students direct access to employment           Students use Canon 5d Mkll DSLR Production rigs,Sony EX3,HDV,
                                                                      in the film and television industry.                                              Super 16MM, iphone4, Red camera and Mac OSX for Editing on
Footscray City College campus
Kinnear Street Footscray VIC 3011                                                                                                                       Final Cut Pro. Students shoot up to 20 films per year. First semester
                                                                      Minimum tertiary entrance requirements                                            involves one week location film camp, where every student directs
                                                                      See page 7.                                                                       their own film. University Pathways exist in Bachelor of Media and
Cleo Constantinou: Admissions Officer
Telephone: (03) 8387 1511 / 0409 538 158                                                                                                                Communications.
                                                                      Student services                                                                  Major studies: Cinema studies, Digital television production,
Fax: (03) 8387 1599
                                                                      There is a resource library at the College with photocopying facilities.          Digital video, Directing (Television), Editing, Entertainment,
http://footscrayfilms.com.au
                                                                      Students can also access the library facilities at Victoria University.           Film, Film and media studies, Film and television, Film and
Email: constantinou.cleopatra.c@edumail.vic.gov.au                    There is Internet access, career advice, support and mentoring                    television (production), Film and video, Film studies, Location
                                                                      available to all students.                                                        video production and post-production, Media arts, Media studies,
  Open days:                                                          Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL) is also supported with staff available        Post-production and production management, Screenplay,
                                                                      to assess students’ previously acquired skills for RPL credits. Students          Screenwriting, Scriptwriting, Storyboard illustration, Television/
Sunday 21 August 1pm – 4 pm                                           transferring from another Institute will receive credit transfers where           studio production, Video, Video technical direction.
                                                                      the subjects are the same.                                                        Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  Semester dates:                                                                                                                                       Selection mode: Interview, folio. See Extra requirements for
                                                                                                                                                        specifics.
Registration Day: Thursday 2 February 2012 Certificate 1V in Screen
and Media; Friday 3 February 2012 Diploma and Advanced Diploma of                                                                                       Extra requirements:
Screen and Media                                                                                                                                        Form: Applicants must telephone (03) 8387 1511/ 0409 538
Semester 1: Monday 6 February - 29 June                                                                                                                 158 to request a Supplementary Application Form from August.
Semester 2: Monday 16 July - Thursday 21 December                                                                                                       Applicants must complete and submit the form by 30 September
                                                                                                                                                        (COP and late applicants by October and November).
                                                                                                                                                        Interview and folio presentation (short-listed applicants only):
  Fees:                                                                                                                                                 Details will be provided by telephone or mail by early September
                                                                                                                                                        to applicants required to attend. These applicants must attend
For further information about fees for these courses go to:
                                                                                                                                                        in September, October and November (Late applicants in early
http://footscrayfilms.com.au                                                                                                                            December). Applicants must bring a folio of film(s) they have
                                                                                                                                                        directed and produced plus script(s) they have written.




176 | VTAC Guide 2012
                Footscray City Films




Institutional and Course Information | 177
GippsTAFE
                                                                          Creating success for people is what GippsTAFE has been doing for            The GippsTAFE website opens the door to these opportunities, providing
                                                                          more than 80 years. Since 1928, the Institute has provided high-quality     information about the Institute and the broad range of programs it
                                                                          education and practical training programs aimed at delivering positive      provides. Visit www.gippstafe.edu.au and discover how GippsTAFE can
                                                                          employment outcomes for students.                                           help you to develop your potential and succeed in your goals.
                                                                          GippsTAFE operates four modern campuses in Gippsland, a fifth
                                                                          metropolitan campus in Chadstone, and a sixth campus opening in             Minimum tertiary entrance requirements
                                                                          Traralgon in 2011, attracting some 25 000 individual enrolments annually.   See page 7.
                                                                          At GippsTAFE, the focus is on developing courses that provide for the
                                                                          unique needs of our students. Many courses are delivered through
                                                                                                                                                      Part-time Courses
                                                                          flexible study modes, both on and off campus, to make access to further     Applicants are not able to apply for part-time courses through VTAC.
                                                                          education easier.                                                           To find out more about these courses and the application process go to
                                                                                                                                                      www.gippstafe.edu.au
                                                                          One strength of the organisation is the very strong relationship
                                                                          GippsTAFE has with industry and employers. Courses are tailored to          Student Services
                                                                          meet the needs of the workplace and, as a result, maximise career
                                                                          opportunities for the students.                                             GippsTAFE provides a range of facilities and services for students
                                                                                                                                                      including referral to counselling services and special support through
                                                                          The Gippsland region, with its rich industry base and wealth of natural     the Student Support Officer and Disability Liaison Officer.
                                                                          resources, provides a vibrant training environment for students. The
                                                                          region is an easy drive from Melbourne and offers a vast range of           Further information
                                                                          cultural, sporting and leisure activities.
                                                                                                                                                      For further information regarding courses listed in this guide and other
                                                                                                                                                      courses offered at the Institute, please contact Student Services on
  Campus location and contacts                                                                                                                        (03) 5127 0102.
Yallourn Campus
Monash Road
Newborough VIC 3825
Telephone: (03) 5127 0277
                                                                           Courses available through VTAC
Morwell Campus
Cnr Princes Drive/Monash Way                                              n Accounting                                                                n Hospitality
Morwell VIC 3840
Telephone: (03) 5120 4500
                                                                               GippsTAFE, Yallourn                                                         GippsTAFE, Morwell
Leongatha Campus
Nerrena Road
                                                                                55201 (VGF), 55204 (Fee type determined by provider)                        55571 (VGF), 55574 (Fee type determined by provider)
Leongatha VIC 3953                                                             » Certificate IV in Financial Services (Accounting): FT1                    » Certificate IV in Hospitality: FT1
Telephone: (03) 5662 6800                                                      » Diploma of Accounting: FT1.5                                              » Diploma of Hospitality: FT1 to FT2
Warragul Campus                                                                » Advanced Diploma of Accounting: FT2                                       About the course: This course prepares students for employment
 Queen Street                                                                  About the course: Certificate IV provides students with the skills          in the operational, supervisory and management aspects of
Warragul VIC 3820                                                              to work as bookkeepers/account clerks.                                      the hospitality industry. This course focuses on the hands on
Telephone: (03) 5622 8500                                                                                                                                  practical skills required for supervisory/management areas of the
                                                                               The Diploma provides students with training in accounting skills
Chadstone Campus                                                               to become qualified as assistant accountants. The pathway to the            hospitality industry, concentrating on food and beverage service
41 Drummond Street                                                             Diploma of Accounting includes competencies from the Certificate            and hospitality leadership.
Chadstone VIC 3148                                                             III in Financial Services (Accounts Clerical).                              Major studies: Accommodation management, Administration,
Telephone: (03) 9251 3000                                                                                                                                  Bar management, Business (accounting), Communications,
                                                                               The Advanced Diploma provides vocational training in advanced
Gippsland Education Precinct                                                   accounting skills to become qualified in the accounting field.              Cookery, Customer Service, Food and beverage management,
Churchill Campus                                                                                                                                           Food and beverage production, Food and beverage service, Food
                                                                               Our facilities include up-to-date technology, software including            handling, Food safety and regulation, Hospitality management,
Northways Road
                                                                               latest versions of MYOB, QuickBooks and Taxation packages, and an           Hospitality sales and marketing, Housekeeping, Leadership,
Churchill VIC 3842                                                             extensive library of resources.                                             Marketing, Restaurant operations.
Telephone: (03) 5132 3812                                                      Major studies: Accounting, Auditing, Bookkeeping, Company,
www.gippstafe.vic.edu.au                                                                                                                                   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                               Computer, Financial, Law, Management, Small Business, Taxation
                                                                               and auditing.                                                               Selection mode: Form and interview. See Extra Requirementsfor
                                                                                                                                                           specifics.
                                                                               Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  Open day                                                                     Selection mode: Interview. See Extra Requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                           Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                           Form: A pre-selection form will be sent to applicants by 11
No set open days. Information sessions and enrolment day as advertised,        Extra requirements:                                                         November. Applicants must complete and submit the form by 28
for further information refer to www.gippstafe.edu.au/courses/                 Interview: Applicants must ring (03) 5127 0281 to book interview            November.
explore_study_areas                                                            time and date                                                               Interview: Details will be sent to applicants by 5 December.
                                                                                                                                                           Applicants must attend in December.
  Semester dates:
Semester 1: Feb 1 to June 29
Semester 2: July 30 to Dec 21

  Fees:
For further information about fees for these courses go to:
http://www.gippstafe.vic.edu.au/fees_and_refunds2/
vet_fee-help

178 | VTAC Guide 2012
n Interior Design and Decoration                                           n Sport

   GippsTAFE, Newborough                                                     GippsTAFE, Churchill
   55041 (VGF), 55044 (Fee type determined by provider)                       55051 (VGF), 55054 (Fee type determined by provider)
   » Certificate IV in Interior Decoration: FT1                              » Diploma of Sport and Recreation: FT1 to 2
   » Diploma of Interior Design and Decoration: FT2                           55991 (VGF), 55994 (Fee type determined by provider)
   About the course: These courses provide a sequential course of            - CANCELLED
   study that develops skills and aptitudes for the creation of interior
   spaces to industry standards. These courses deal with issues of           » Certificate IV in Sport (Development): FT1
   style and the application of finishes, furnishings and decorative         » Diploma of Sport (Development): FT1 to 2
   treatments for domestic and commercial interiors.                         About the course: This course prepares students for employment
   These courses focus on good communication, verbal presentation,           in the sport and recreation industry, in sports administration,
   and teamwork to achieve the desired outcomes. The use of shapes,          coaching, marketing, management, officiating, and events
   patterns and measurements in relation to the transferring and             management. This course focus on sports management, event
   manipulation of data is demonstrated through the real life project        management and coaching, and include a mixture of classroom
   experiences during study at GippsTAFE. The Diploma of Arts Interior       theory and hands-on practical experience. Course is suitable for
   Decoration and Design provides the learner with work placement            school leavers and mature age students.
   in their chosen field. The Interior Decoration and Design course also     Major studies: Administration, Sport, Sport (development).
   provides an online component to complement the individual units.          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Major studies: Business, Colour studies, Computer Aided Design            Selection mode: Form and Interview. See Extra requirements
   CAD, Construction, Design, Drawing, Furnishings, Interior design,         for specifics.
   Lighting, Materials, Planning and Drafting.                               Extra requirements:
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                         Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 5120 4515 for details
   Selection mode: Folio presentation, interview, work experience.           by 26 September. Applicants must attend in November/December
   See Extra requirements for specifics.                                     (Late applicants by 12 December).Late applicants after 12
   Extra requirements:                                                       December must telephone (03) 5120 4515 by 17 January 2012.
   Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must telephone
   (03) 51270278 for details by 18 November (Late applicants by 9          n Tourism
   December). Applicants must attend an interview in December.
                                                                             GippsTAFE, Morwell
n Music Performance                                                           55001 (VGF), 55004 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                             » Certificate IV in Tourism: FT1
   GippsTAFE, Morwell                                                        » Diploma of Tourism: FT2
   55061 (VGF), 55064 (Fee type determined by provider)                      About the course: This course is designed for applicants seeking
   » Certificate IV in Music: FT1                                            supervisory and management roles in the tourism industry.
   » Diploma of Music: FT1                                                   Career pathways include conference organisation, visitor centre
   » Advanced Diploma of Music: FT2                                          management, tour operations, tour guiding, and retail travel.
   About the course: These courses are contemporary popular                  This course focuses on the hands-on practical skills required for
   music and jazz performance courses. They also cover specific music        supervisory/management areas of the tourism industry, covering
   industry knowledge and theoretical units with a strong practical          the operational areas of the industry. Students are required to
   base. These courses include live performances within the industry.        partake in work placement to gain hands-on practical experience.
   Through the strong emphasis on performance, these programs aim            Major studies: Adventure, Attractions and theme parks,
   to prepare the student for the music industry, and encourage the          Customer service, E-commerce, Ecotourism, Environmental
   student to develop skills in composition, arranging and technical         management, Event managment, Human resource management,
   competence.                                                               International travel sales, Meetings and conventions management,
   Major studies: Music composition and arrangement, Music                   Natural & cultural heritage, Natural resource management,
   industry, Music performance, Musicianship.                                Outdoor leadership and guiding, Tour wholesaling, Tourism, Travel
                                                                             and tourism management, Visitor information services.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Selection mode: Audition, interview, application form. See Extra
   Requirements for specifics                                                Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
                                                                             specifics.
   Extra requirements:
                                                                             Extra requirements:
   Audition, interview and form: Applicants must telephone
   (03) 5120 4563 by November 11 to arrange an audition and                  Form: A pre-selection form will be sent to applicants by 14
   supplementary application form.                                           November. Applicants must complete and submit the form by 28
                                                                             November.
   Additional information: This course is delivered 3-4 days per
   week over a 34 week period per year.                                      Interview: Details will be sent to applicants by 5 December.
                                                                             Applicants must attend in December.




                                                                                                                                                 GippsTAFE | 179
Gordon (The)
                                                                       The Gordon, Victoria’s largest regional stand-alone TAFE, has been          Student services
                                                                       providing progressive and innovative training in Geelong, around
                                                                                                                                                   The Gordon offers a wide range of student services including:
                                                                       Australia and overseas for more than 120 years.
                                                                                                                                                   •	   Customer service
                                                                       Students at The Gordon receive the very best training in the State. As
                                                                       the Victorian Large Training Provider of the Year 2010, The Gordon offers   •	   Student activities
                                                                       an increasing range of options in vocational education and training.        •	   Student portal
                                                                       Delivering more than 400 full-time and part-time accredited courses         •	   Bookshops
                                                                       and short courses, The Gordon has over 19,000 students studying on
                                                                       campus, off campus and in industry each year.                               •	   Cafeteria
                                                                       At The Gordon, we pride ourselves on delivering a wide-range of             •	   Printing and media services
                                                                       learning options – apprenticeships, school-based apprenticeships, VET       •	   Internet and email
                                                                       in schools, traineeships, certificates, diplomas, advanced diplomas, and    •	   Libraries
                                                                       pathways to university.
                                                                                                                                                   •	   Counselling and careers guidance
                                                                       All have one thing in common: to offer students the very best in job-
                                                                                                                                                   •	   Financial advice
                                                                       ready skills for their chosen career path. How do we do it? We’ve built
                                                                       solid partnerships with local business and industry, which underpin and     •	   Careers Resource Centres
                                                                       inform the design of all our courses, many of which are nationally and      •	   Learning support services
                                                                       even internationally recognised. We continually consult our partners in     •	   Disability support services
                                                                       the real world to research latest trends and needs in an ever-evolving
                                                                       landscape of emerging new fields and technological advances. The            •	   Youth Access and Support
                                                                       result is an exciting range of accredited and specialist courses designed   •	   Aboriginal Education Support Unit
  Campus location and contacts                                         to inspire you and take you to where you want to go.                        •	   Accommodation
City campus                                                            The Gordon’s two main campuses are in Geelong City and East Geelong,        •	   English as a Second Language (ESL) department
2 Fenwick Street                                                       as well as a small trades-based campus in Colac. Our training facilities
                                                                                                                                                   Additional facilities also open to the public include: hairdressing and
Geelong VIC 3220                                                       are state-of-the-art and are continually being upgraded to reflect
                                                                                                                                                   beauty therapy training salons, a fully-licensed training restaurant and
                                                                       industry standards, with over $18 million spent in the last two years
                                                                                                                                                   bistro-style café. For more information contact Customer Service (03)
East Geelong campus                                                    on redevelopments, infrastructure and equipment upgrades across a
                                                                                                                                                   5225 0800 or www.thegordon.edu.au
Boundary Road                                                          number of areas.
East Geelong VIC 3219                                                  The Gordon is located in Geelong, the gateway to the Bellarine              Part-time courses
                                                                       Peninsula, Surf Coast and Otways regions, which also offers an attractive   Applicants are not able to apply for part-time courses through VTAC.
Colac campus                                                           lifestyle choice whilst still close to Melbourne City and Ballarat – only   To find out more about these courses and the application process,
42 Hearn Street                                                        one hour’s drive away.                                                      go to www.thegordon.edu.au or contact Customer Service on
Colac VIC 3250                                                         Check out everything The Gordon has to offer at www.thegordon.edu.au        (03) 5225 0800.

For all course enquiries and extra requirements information contact:
                                                                       Minimum tertiary entrance requirements                                      Midyear entry
                                                                       See page 7.                                                                 A range of Gordon courses are available by direct application for midyear
Customer Service
Telephone: (03) 5225 0500                                                                                                                          entry. To find out if your course of interest has a midyear intake, please
                                                                       Principles of Selection                                                     visit The Gordon website or phone Customer Service on (03) 5225 0800
email: courinfo@gordontafe.edu.au
                                                                       The Gordon will admit students on the basis of satisfaction of their        to find out what courses are available.
www.thegordon.edu.au
                                                                       capacity to successfully undertake their chosen program. In addition
                                                                       to the general entrance requirements, applicants must also satisfy the      Further information
Postal Address:
                                                                       relevant prerequisite studies and any additional entry requirements for     International students
Private Bag 1,
                                                                       their courses of interest.
Geelong Mail Centre, VIC 3221                                                                                                                      Apply direct to The Gordon. Gordon International provide personalised
                                                                       •	   Where ATAR is listed as a selection mode; VCAL and Mature Age          support and services for international students, working closely with
                                                                            students without ATAR will be selected via alternative methods.        our educational enterprises and support services to assist international
Supplementary Application forms and Building Application forms are          Please see specific courses for this information.                      students in achieving their academic potential.
available from www.thegordon.edu.au
                                                                       •	   In most cases, non Year 12 students applying for a Diploma or          International students can choose from a wide range of accredited
                                                                            Advanced Diploma course are required to be over 18 and out             courses in addition to our English Language Programs. For more
  Open days:                                                                of full-time study for 12 months. Please see specific course           information, visit our international website www.thegordon.edu.au/
                                                                            information to see if this applies to your course of interest.         international or contact (03) 5225 0920.
Sunday 21 August 2011, 10.00am – 3.00pm.
See www.thegordon.edu.au for full details and locations.                                                                                           Course information
                                                                                                                                                   Course guides and handbooks are available from The Gordon’s Customer
  Semester dates:                                                                                                                                  Service Centres each campus. To request a copy phone (03) 5225 0800 or
                                                                                                                                                   download the pdf at www.thegordon.edu.au
Semester 1: 6 February – 29 June
Semester 2: 16 July – 21 December

  Fees:
For further information about fees for these courses go to:
www.thegordon.edu.au




180 | VTAC Guide 2012
Courses available through VTAC
                                                                            Selection mode: Form, information session. See Extra                   n Building Design
n Accounting                                                                requirements for specifics.
                                                                            Extra requirements:                                                       Gordon, East Geelong
  Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                    Form: Applicants must complete a Supplementary Application
   59201 (VGF), 59204 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                               59031 (VGF), 59034 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                            Form and submit it at the nominated information session.
  » Certificate IV in Accounting: FT1                                       Download the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/                           » Advanced Diploma of Building Design (Architectural): FT2.5
                                                                            vtacsuppappform) or telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have                      About the course: The Advanced Diploma of Building Design
  » Diploma of Accounting: FT1.5
                                                                            the form posted.                                                          (Architectural) provides the academic requirements and training
  » Advanced Diploma of Accounting: FT2                                                                                                               for a career as a building designer.
  About the course: This course develops the skills and                     Information Session: Applicants must attend only one of two
                                                                            compulsory information sessions. Applicants must attend                   This course equips students with skills and knowledge in residential
  knowledge for an entry level career in Accounting or as a
                                                                            room G2.26, Fenwick Street campus, 6-7pm, 26 October OR                   and commercial design, construction methods and techniques, site
  pathway to higher education.
                                                                            23 November. Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500                surveying, scheduling and documentation management.
  In the first year students may be required to complete Certificate
                                                                            before applying.                                                          The course is structured for students to simulate workplace
  III Accounts Administration (depending on previous qualifications)
                                                                                                                                                      environments and industry expectations, covering a range of
  before commencing the Certificate IV in Accounting. This course
                                                                         n Building and Construction                                                  techniques to fully equip them to operate in residential and
  is structured with exit points at the various levels throughout the
                                                                                                                                                      commercial construction sector.
  two year program. If students do not wish to continue through to
                                                                                                                                                      Subjects offered include design techniques, environmentally
  the Advanced Diploma level they may complete the Certificate IV           Gordon, East Geelong
  after 12 months, Diploma after 18 months and Advanced Diploma                                                                                       sustainable design principles, 2D and 3D software skills, graphic
                                                                            59011 (VGF), 59014 (Fee type determined by provider)                      presentation, project management and administration.
  after two years. The Certificate IV covers tasks such as office tax,
  BAS, operational reporting, compiling budget information and              » Diploma of Building and Construction (Building): FT2                    The course is typically delivered over a three year period with the
  data for job costing and relevant legal requirements, preparing           About the course: The Diploma of Building and Construction                third year on a part time basis. Successful completion of this course
  students to work as bookkeepers/account clerks. Diploma and               (Building) equips students with the academic requirements and             meets the minimum academic requirements for registration with
  Advanced Diploma covers preparing tax returns, reporting on               training for a career at a supervision/management level within            the Building Practitioners Board as building designer.
  business performance, introducing and maintaining accounting              the construction industry, specifically medium-sized construction         Major studies: Architecture, Building (construction methods),
  systems and internal control.                                             companies.                                                                Building information modelling, Computer-aided drafting (CAD),
  Major studies: Accounting, BAS, Budgeting, Commercial Law,                The course provides students with para-professional skills and            Design process, Project administration, Project management.
  Communication Skills, Economics, Financial Systems, OHS,                  knowledge in order to plan and coordinate the construction                Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  Reporting, Taxation.                                                      of medium-rise residential and commercial buildings, and is
                                                                                                                                                      Selection mode: Form, Information Session, ATAR or VCAL. See
  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                         structured to simulate workplace environments and industry
                                                                                                                                                      Extra requirements for specifics.
                                                                            expectations.
  Selection mode: Information Session: See Extra requirements                                                                                         Extra requirements:
  for specifics                                                             Subjects offered range from supervision skills, contract
                                                                            administration, quality and risk, and construction theory,                Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Supplementary
  Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                 Application form by 14 October (Late Applicants by 11 November,
                                                                            developing a variety of techniques to fully prepare you for working
  Information Session: Applicants must attend Fenwick Street                in residential and commercial construction.                               Very Late Applicants by 9 December).Applicants can download
  Campus, Auditorium on Thursday 24th November 2011. Applicants                                                                                       the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or
                                                                            The course is typically delivered over a two year period. Successful
  must telephone to register their attendance and confirmation of                                                                                     telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the form posted.
                                                                            completion of this course meets the minimum academic
  time (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0701. Applicants must bring pen                                                                                    Information Session: Applicants must attend room E1.06
                                                                            requirements for registration with the Building Practitioners Board
  and paper                                                                                                                                           (Theatrette) E building East Geelong campus Wednesday 12
                                                                            as a domestic builder (unlimited) and commercial builder.
                                                                                                                                                      October 6.30pm
                                                                            Major studies: Building (construction methods), Building control
n Beauty Therapy                                                            and legislation, Building surveying procedures (compliance),              VCAL students will be assessed on the basis of their
                                                                            Computer applications, Contracts and tenders, Site surveying.             supplementary application form and attendance at the
  Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                                                                                              compulsory information session.
                                                                            Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   59221 (VGF), 59224 (Fee type determined by provider)                     Selection mode: Form, information session, ATAR or VCAL. See
  » Diploma of Beauty Therapy: FT1                                          Extra requirements for specifics.                                      n Building Surveying
  About the course: The Diploma of Beauty Therapy will equip                Extra requirements:
  students with relevant and comprehensive skills and knowledge to          Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Supplementary
                                                                                                                                                      Gordon, East Geelong
  successfully enter the beauty sector as a qualified Beauty Therapist      Application form by 14 October (Late Applicants by 11 November,           59021 (VGF), 59024 (Fee type determined by provider)
  in a Salon, Day Spa, Resort Spa or International Spa.                     Very Late Applicants by 9 December).Applicants can download               » Diploma of Building Surveying: FT2
  This varied course covers the fundamentals of beauty therapy              the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or                 About the course: The Diploma of Building Surveying provides
  as well as advanced spa therapy treatments, including waxing,             telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the form posted.                         the academic requirements and training for a career in the
  tinting, manicures and pedicures, facials, massage, aromatherapy,         Information Session: Applicants must attend room E1.06                    Building Surveying (Building Inspector) industry. This course
  reflexology, hot stone massage and lymphatic drainage massage.            (Theatrette) E building East Geelong campus Wednesday 12                  equips students with para-professional skills and knowledge
  The course is based at The Gordon’s City Campus in Geelong where          October 6.30pm                                                            to carry out building inspection work and building surveying
  students gain hands-on experience at The Gordon’s dedicated               VCAL students will be assessed on the basis of their                      specifically related to residential construction.
  Creative Futures salon and also undertake industry training at a          supplementary application form and attendance at the                      The course is structured to simulate workplace environments and
  luxury spa in Werribee.                                                   compulsory information session.                                           industry expectations, where students learn a range of techniques
  Major studies: Advanced Facials, Anatomy and physiology, Body                                                                                       to fully prepare them to operate in the residential construction sector.
  Treatments, Eyelash and eyebrow tinting, Facials, Make-up, Manicure                                                                                 Subjects offered range from building regulations, building
  and Pedicure Services, Nutrition, Reflexology, Relaxation Massage,                                                                                  surveying procedures and construction theory.
  Skin Biology, Skin science, Spa therapies, Temporary epilation.
  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.



                                                                                                                                                                                  Gordon (The) | 181
 Higher Education qualification                             Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                                Other Graduates

   The course is typically delivered over a two year period. Successful            Interview: Details will be provided on receipt of                                    Extra requirements:
   completion of this course meets the minimum academic                            Supplementary Application form. Written confirmation of                              Form: Applicants must complete a Supplementary Application
   requirements for registration with the Building Practitioners Board             details will be sent to applicants. Applicants must attend on                        Form by 14 October. Download from (http://www.thegordon.edu.
   as Building Inspector.                                                          either 15 November or 8 December.                                                    au/vtacsuppappform) or telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the
   Major studies: Building, Building (construction methods),                       Late and very late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 to                       form posted.
   Building control and legislation, Building surveying procedures                 register for interviews on 8 December OR 25 January 2012.                            Information Session: Applicants must attend room E1.06
   (compliance), Computer applications, Site surveying.                            Very late applicants (after 8 December) will only be considered for                  (Theatrette) E building East Geelong campus Wednesday 12
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                               Round 2 offers.                                                                      October 6.30pm
   Selection mode: Form, information session, ATAR or VCAL. See                    NONY12                                                                               VCAL students will be assessed on the basis of their
   Extra requirements for specifics.                                               Information pack: Applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 to                        supplementary application form and attendance at the
   Extra requirements:                                                             request a pack by 20 October (for early offers) (Late applicants by                  compulsory information session
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Supplementary                       17 November).
   Application form by 14 October (Late Applicants by 11 November,                 Form: A supplementary application form is included in the                       Commercial Cookery
   Very Late Applicants by 9 December).Applicants can download                     information pack. Applicants must complete and submit the form
   the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or                       by 8 November (Late applicants by 17 November). Supplementary                        Gordon, Geelong (City)
   telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the form posted.                               form must be returned to be given an interview time.
                                                                                                                                                                        59531 (VGF), 59534 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Information Session: Applicants must attend room E1.06                          Information session and test: Details will be sent to applicants in
   (Theatrette) E building East Geelong campus Wednesday 12                        the information pack. Applicants must attend room H3.06, Fenwick                     » Certificate IV in Hospitality (Commercial Cookery): FT1.5
   October 6.30pm                                                                  Street campus, 6-7pm, 6 September OR 27 October.                                     About the course: The Certificate IV in Hospitality (Commercial
                                                                                                                                                                        Cookery) is designed for those who are looking for more than
   VCAL students will be assessed on the basis of their                            Interview: Details will be provided on receipt of
                                                                                                                                                                        a standard chef’s qualification, extending their knowledge of
   supplementary application form and attendance at the                            Supplementary Application form. Written confirmation of
                                                                                                                                                                        practical cookery to include theoretical skills for the management
   compulsory information session.                                                 details will be sent to applicants. Applicants must attend on
                                                                                                                                                                        of a dynamic and innovative kitchen environment.
                                                                                   either 15 November or 8 December.
                                                                                                                                                                        The first year of the course covers the skills and knowledge which
 Children’s Services                                                              Late and very late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 to
                                                                                                                                                                        reflect the role of a qualified cook including selection, preparation
                                                                                   register for interviews on 8 December OR 25 January 2012.
                                                                                                                                                                        and cooking of different foods and techniques, as well as
   Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                          Very late applicants (after 2 December) will only be considered for                  workplace hygiene procedures and storing supplies. In the last six
                                                                                   Round 2 offers.                                                                      months students will develop in-depth knowledge in quality and
   59111 (VGF), 59114 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                   Additional information: Any paid or voluntary work experience                        stock control, catering revenue and costs, bulk cooking food safety,
   » Diploma of Children’s Services (Early childhood education                     in a childcare setting will be highly regarded.                                      finance and human resources.
     and care): FT2
                                                                                                                                                                        Students gain experience and practice their skills across The Gordon’s
   About the course: This course develops the skills and knowledge
   required to provide programs for infants, pre-school and school-           Civil Construction Design                                                                professional hospitality venues; Cafe on Track and The Davidson
                                                                                                                                                                        Restaurant. There is an opportunity to exit after the first year of study
   age children in children’s services settings. Child Care Workers
                                                                                                                                                                        with a Certificate III in Hospitality (Commercial Cookery).
   are responsible for developing, evaluating and implementing                     Gordon, East Geelong
   programs and have responsibility for the supervision of children,                                                                                                    Major studies: Business Management, Catering Operations,
                                                                                    59481 (VGF), 59484 (Fee type determined by provider)
   other staff and volunteers.                                                                                                                                          Cookery, Finance, Food Safety, Hospitality, Hospitality
                                                                                   » Certificate IV in Civil Construction Design: FT1                                   Management, Human Resources, Occupational Helath and Safety.
   The course involves both theory and hands-on practical training
                                                                                   » Diploma of Civil Construction Design: FT2 - CANCELLED                              Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   and assessment, and encompasses health, education and
   sociological perspectives to prepare students for work in a range of            About the course: The Certificate IV in Civil Construction (Design)                  Selection mode: Information Session, Interview. See Extra
   environments. Possible career opportunities include working as a                and Diploma of Civil Construction (Design) develops the skills and                   requirements for specifics
   room leader in a child care setting, teacher or assistant in 3 and 4            knowledge required to design and document civil works.
                                                                                                                                                                        Extra requirements:
   year old group settings, or an Out of School Hours Care coordinator.            The completion of the Diploma provides higher level training
                                                                                   for a career as a design/draftsperson in a supportive role to Civil                  Information and interview session: Applicants must attend only
   This is a full time two year course with 25 hours class attendance                                                                                                   one of two compulsory information and interview sessions held in
   per week. Students have the option of exiting the course with the               Engineers, enabling more autonomy in the role.
                                                                                                                                                                        room T2.22 Fenwick Street campus 10am-12pm, 23 November OR
   Certificate III in Children’s Services after the first six months.              This course is structured for students to simulate workplace                         7 December.
   Major studies: Childhood development, Family and diversity,                     environments and industry expectations, with subjects offered in
                                                                                   a range of areas including design skills (subdivision), construction                 Additional information: An initial information session will be held
   Health studies, Play and curriculum studies, Professional practice,                                                                                                  on Sunday 21 August - see The Gordon website for more details.
   Program planning.                                                               and structural design and theory, 2D CAD and detailing skills,
                                                                                   project and risk management, and site surveying.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                               Computer Systems
                                                                                   The Certificate IV is typically delivered over a one year period,
   Selection mode: ATAR or VCAL, interview, form, information                      and the Diploma is typically delivered over a further year
   session, information pack, test. See Extra requirements for specifics.          of study (completion of Certificate IV is pre-requisite to                           Gordon, East Geelong
   Extra requirements:                                                             undertaking Diploma).                                                                59341 (VGF), 59344 (Fee type determined by provider)
   CY12                                                                            Successful completion of this course meets the minimum academic
                                                                                                                                                                        » Advanced Diploma of Computer Systems Engineering: FT2
   Information pack: Applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 to                   requirements for industry as a Civil Designer/draftsperson.
                                                                                                                                                                        About the course: This course provides students with advanced
   request an information pack by 20 October (Late applicants by 15                Major studies: 2D CAD and detailing skills, Civil Construction,                      skills and knowledge in the design, installation and maintenance
   November)                                                                       Construction and structural design and theory, Design skills (Ssub-                  of Local and Wide Area Networks, Wireless Networking, Client-
   Form: A supplementary application form is included in the                       division), Project and risk management, Site Surveying.                              Server Software, Enterprise Network Administration, Computer
   information pack. Applicants must complete and submit the form                  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    Hardware Maintenance and Desktop Deployment.
   by 8 November (Late applicants by 17 November). Supplementary                   Selection mode: Form, information session, ATAR or VCAL. See                         The course includes extensive practical laboratory tasks
   form must be returned to be given an interview time.                            Extra requirements for specifics.                                                    incorporating design, construction, systems commissioning
   Information session: Details will be sent to applicants in the                                                                                                       and maintenance.
   information pack. Applicants must attend room H3.06, Fenwick
   Street campus, 6-7pm, 6 September OR 27 October.



                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
182 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
  The Gordon has strong partnerships with key ICT vendors including          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                           The Gordon’s event management units are specifically chosen
  CISCO networking academy, Sun Microsystems, and Microsoft.                 Selection mode: Information session, interview. See Extra                   by industry professionals to align with the needs of industry.
  These provide students with current and relevant skills and                requirements for specifics.                                                 Students will gain theory and practical skills in advanced
  knowledge required for their future career.                                                                                                            event management, including legal, leadership, venue and
                                                                             Extra requirements:
  Graduates may also achieve vendor accreditations that are highly                                                                                       site planning, sustainability, bids and sponsorships, event
                                                                             Information session: Applicants must attend Room G2.02, East                registration and marketing.
  regarded in the industry including CISCO CCNA, Microsoft MCSA
                                                                             Geelong Campus, Boundary Road East Geelong, 6pm, Wednesday
  and CompTIA A+ and Server+.                                                                                                                            This course continues the focus on providing hands-on and real-life
                                                                             12 October.
  Graduates can look forward to careers in Network Administration                                                                                        experience, and includes a significant internship program.
                                                                             Interview: Applicants may be requested for an interview, if needed.
  and Engineering, Systems Software Development, Client Desktop                                                                                          Major studies: Business (management), Conferences,
  and Technical Support as well as Technical Project Management.             Late Applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 for details.                  Conventions and exhibitions, Event registration, Event staging,
  Major studies: Computer and network security, Computer                     Additional information: A new training package encompassing                 Financial accounting, Human resource management, Leadership,
  engineering, Computer hardware, Computer hardware/software,                this course will be introduced shortly, and course codes and                Legal requirements, Marketing, Obtaining bids and managing
  Computer operating systems, Engineering (computer systems),                content may change slightly. Please refer to The Gordon website             sponsorship, Sustainability, Venue and site planning (CAD).
  Network design, Network management and network systems,                    for the most up to date information.                                        Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  Network systems, Operating systems, Programming, Project                                                                                               Selection mode: Information and interview session. See Extra
  management, Server-side programming, Website development,               n Engineering–Mechanical/Manufacturing                                         requirements for specifics.
  Wireless network security.
                                                                                                                                                         Extra requirements:
  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          Gordon, East Geelong                                                        Information and Interview session: Applicants must attend
  Selection mode: Information Session, Interview, ATAR or VCAL.              59231 (VGF), 59234 (Fee type determined by provider)                        Fenwick Street campus, Room F201, 3-5pm on either Wednesday
  See extra requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                  23 November or Wednesday 7 December. Applicants must bring
                                                                             » Diploma of Engineering Technology: FT1
  Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                    pen and paper. Applicants need to telephone to register their
                                                                             » Advanced Diploma of Engineering Technology: FT2
  Information session: An information session will be held late                                                                                          attendance (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799.
                                                                             About the course: This course provides students with the
  November or early December 2011. Applicants should check The               knowledge and skills to apply engineering and scientific principles         Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799
  Gordon website for details.                                                to mechanical and manufacturing engineering applications with               before applying.
  Interview: Informal interviews will be held with applicants at the         applicability to both the public and private sectors across all             Additional information: An initial information session will be held
  conclusion of the information session.                                     engineering streams, and to small, medium and large enterprises.            on Sunday 21 August 2011, see website for times and locations.
  VCAL students will be assess on the basis of their attendance at the       Students will learn to analyse, diagnose, design and execute
  compulsory information session                                             judgments with respect to the mechanical and manufacturing               n Events/Sustainability/Project Management
  Additional information: An exciting new training package                   engineering solutions, for careers in mechanical and plant design,
  for all Information and Communication Technology courses will              production supervision and manufacturing planning. This course
                                                                             includes a practical workshop component of 200 hours                        Gordon, Geelong (City)
  soon be introduced and course codes and content will be updated
  to reflect latest industry standards. Please refer to The Gordon           Major studies: Computer-aided design (CAD), Computer-aided                  59551 (VGF), 59554 (Fee type determined by provider)
  website for the most up to date information on this course                 drafting (CAD), Design (tooling), Drafting, Engineering (fluid              » Diploma of Events/Diploma of Project Management/
                                                                             power), Engineering (manufacturing), Engineering (materials),                 Diploma of Sustainability: FT1.5
                                                                             Engineering (mechanical), Engineering (process engineering),                About the course: The Event industry is recognised in Australia
n Conservation and Land Management                                           Industrial engineering, Machine dynamics, Mechanical design,                and world-wide as a rapidly developing area. The Diploma of
                                                                             Mechanics (applied).                                                        Events incorporates competencies from a range of Certificate
  Gordon, East Geelong                                                       Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                           III qualifications, and aims to provide students with a life-long
   59751 (VGF), 59754 (Fee type determined by provider)                      Selection mode: Information session. See Extra requirements                 foundation of skills and knowledge to build a career in this exciting
  » Diploma of Conservation and Land Management: FT2                         for specifics.                                                              growth industry.
  About the course: This practical, hands-on course provides                 Extra requirements:                                                         With specialist teachers and strong industry partnerships, students
  students with a solid grounding in environmental management.                                                                                           will gain both theory and practical skills, covering core areas of
                                                                             Information session: Applicants must attend an information                  event and project management, research, finance, and human
  Students gain specialised skills and knowledge in natural resource         session at East Geelong Campus, Boundary Road East Geelong
  management, with an emphasis on technical and practical skills for                                                                                     resources, as well as the opportunity to complete a Diploma of
                                                                             Room M2.07 at 10.30am on 24 November. Applicants must                       Project Management and a Diploma of Sustainability to increase
  field work. This course has a strong industry focus, offering a range      telephone to register their attendance (03) 5225 0500 or
  of units designed to enable students to confidently work in the area                                                                                   their employability prospects.
                                                                             (03) 5225 0949.
  of natural resource management upon completion of the course.                                                                                          The course focuses on providing hands-on and real-life experience,
  The units include natural area restoration, wildlife management,           Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0949             and students gain the benefit of working with our highly
  plant and animal identification, community engagement and pest             before applying.                                                            experienced staff, undertaking industry visits, volunteering and
  plant and animal management. The Gordon is conveniently located                                                                                        practical opportunities to develop their job-ready skills.
  close to many State and National Parks, coastal environments and        n Events                                                                       Major studies: Conferences, Conventions and exhibitions,
  catchment areas, which are regularly used for field work. Students                                                                                     Event registration, Event staging, Finances, Human resources
  can complete the Course in Coastal Management and Dual Diploma             Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                      management, Leadership, Legal, Project management ,
  in Sustainability while studying this course. Upon completion of this                                                                                  Sustainability, Venue and site planning.
  Diploma students may use this qualification to progress towards a          59251 (VGF), 59254 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                                                                                         Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  Bachelor Degree in a related area.                                         » Advanced Diploma of Events: FT2
                                                                             About the course: The Advanced Diploma of Events develops                   Selection mode: Information Session, Interview. See Extra
  Major studies: Aquatic science, Coastal management,
                                                                             high level business and management skills which enable students             requirements for specifics.
  Community engagement, Conservation biology/ecology,
  Conservation management (revegetation), Ecological studies,                to develop a career or build their own businesses across several            Extra requirements:
  Ecotourism, Environmental management, Environmental                        industries: government, corporate and public services in areas such         Information and Interview session: Applicants must attend
  science, Forect ecology, Freshwater ecosystems, Land and water             as marketing, hospitality, community development, tourism, or in            Fenwick Street campus, Room F201, 3-5pm on either Wednesday
  management, Mapping systems, Marine environment, Natural                   a welfare/community organisation.                                           23 November OR Wednesday 7 December. Applicants must bring
  resource management, Park and wilderness management,                       Students will develop and build upon their skills over two years;           pen and paper. Applicants must telephone to register their
  Parks and recreation management, Parks and wildlife reserve                covering Certificate III in the first six months, the Diploma over the      attendance (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799.
  management, Soil science, Vegetation and wildlife management,              next 12 months, and Advanced Diploma in the final six months.               Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799
  Wildlife conservation and ecology.                                                                                                                     before applying.


                                                                                                                                                                                   Gordon (The) | 183
n Higher Education qualification                             n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                              n Other Graduates

   Additional information: An initial information session will be                  The second year increases students’ awareness of the                                 Campus - Fenwick Street Geelong, room T3.Foyer. Please contact
   held on Sunday 21 August 2011, see the website for times and                    complementary and integrated roles of design, pattern                                (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0716 to book your place. Please bring
   locations.                                                                      making, construction and associated technologies; developing,                        pen and paper.
                                                                                   investigating and creating skills related to current and future
n Fashion and Textile Merchandising                                                directions of the fashion industry.                                            n Hairdressing (Salon Management)
                                                                                   In the final year students enhance their skills in design, marketing
                                                                                   and global operations to work within the fast-paced fashion world
   Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                          from designers through to manufacturers. Students also undertake
                                                                                                                                                                        Gordon, Geelong (City)
   59591 (VGF), 59594 (Fee type determined by provider)                            an internship with a fashion enterprise, and have the opportunity                    59381 (VGF), 59384 (Fee type determined by provider)
   » Advanced Diploma of Fashion and Textiles                                      to participate in an international study tour.                                       » Diploma of Hairdressing Salon Management: FT0.5
     Merchandising: FT2.5                                                          Major studies: Fabric technology, Fashion (design concepts),                         About the course: The Diploma of Hairdressing Salon
   About the course: Always wanted to start your own range of                      Fashion (design), Fashion (illustration), Fashion (pattern grading),                 Management provides students with the relevant and
   Fashion or Textile products? This new course equips students with               Marketing research, Marketing strategy, Networking.                                  comprehensive skills and knowledge to successfully own or
   the industry skills and knowledge to do so.                                     Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    manage a Hairdressing and/or Beauty Salon.
   Students will develop basic sewing, patternmaking and textile                   Selection mode: Form, resume, folio, interview. See Extra                            The course is designed for those looking to own or run a business,
   skills to assist in the development of fashion and textile ranges.              requirements for specifics.                                                          rather than work as a qualified hairdresser and covers core business
   Real-world projects with industry partners give students an insight                                                                                                  and management units including business planning, finance,
                                                                                   Extra requirements:
   into the Australian and International markets, with opportunities                                                                                                    recruitment and leadership, OHS, and marketing strategies to
   for internships and study tours.                                                Form, resume and folio: Applicants must complete a                                   expand and diversify your client base.
                                                                                   Supplementary Application Form by 15 November. Download
   Students will research future trends and directions to develop                                                                                                       Major studies: Business (Finance), Business (management),
                                                                                   the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or
   their ranges, as well as cover marketing, merchandising and global                                                                                                   Business Planning, Hairdressing, Human resource managment,
                                                                                   telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the form posted. Applicants
   operations as advanced skills in importing and product sales.                                                                                                        Management, Marketing, Occupational health and safety,
                                                                                   must also include a resume with photographs of design work and
   The comprehensive and well-rounded skills developed through                                                                                                          Recruitment and selection.
                                                                                   garments. (Late applicants by 16 December).
   this course are highly sort after by today’s industry, and provide the                                                                                               Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                   Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 to arrange
   opportunities to develop your own business in the future.                                                                                                            Selection mode: Information session. See Extra requirements
                                                                                   an interview time. Applicants must attend an interview, to be held
   Major studies: Fashion, Global operations, Product development,                 from September. Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500                        for specifics.
   Range/product development, Textile and fashion merchandising.                   before applying.                                                                     Extra requirements:
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                               Additional information: Applicants are encouraged to attend                          Information Session: Applicants must attend a compulsory
   Selection mode: Interview, Form, Folio, Resume. See Extra                       a Fashion Course Seminar on either Sunday 21 August 2011 10.30                       information session on 26 October, 6.00pm-7.00pm, City Campus,
   requirements for specifics                                                      am or 1 pm OR Tuesday 11 October at 7pm; City Campus - Fenwick                       Fenwick Street Room G2.29. Applicants must phone (03) 5225
   Extra requirements:                                                             Street Geelong, room G2.10. Please contact 5225 0500 to book                         0500 or (03) 5225 0525 to register attendance.
   Form, folio and resume: Applicants must complete a                              your place. Please bring pen and paper                                               Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 before applying.
   Supplementary Application form by 25 November. Download
   the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or                 n Graphic Design                                                                     n Hospitality
   telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have form posted. Applicants also
   need to include a resume with photographs of design work and                    Gordon, Geelong (City)
   garments (late applicants by 16 December)
                                                                                                                                                                        Gordon, Geelong (City)
                                                                                    59001 (VGF), 59004 (Fee type determined by provider)                                59571 (VGF), 59574 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Interview: Applicants must contact 5225 0500 to arrange an
   interview time to be held on 27 September.                                      » Diploma of Graphic Design: FT2                                                     » Certificate IV in Hospitality: FT1
                                                                                   About the course: The Diploma of Graphic Design will equip                           » Diploma of Hospitality: FT1.5
   Additional information: Applicants are encouraged to attend
                                                                                   students with comprehensive skills and knowledge to enter                            » Advanced Diploma of Hospitality: FT2
   the Fashion Course Seminar on Sunday 21 August 2011 10.30 am
                                                                                   the graphic design industry. The course is taught by industry
   OR 1 pm; City Campus - Fenwick Street Geelong, Room G2.10.                                                                                                           About the course: In the first year, the Certificate IV covers
                                                                                   professionals and students will use industry-standard software
   Please contact (03) 5225 0500 to book your place. Please bring pen                                                                                                   fundamental skills to work in a Hospitality supervisory role,
                                                                                   and hardware. The course covers conceptual skills, techniques and
   and paper.                                                                                                                                                           including responsible service of alcohol, hygiene, espresso coffee,
                                                                                   the use of resources required for the development of effective
                                                                                                                                                                        customer service, food service, and food and beverage knowledge.
                                                                                   visual communication. In second year, the course includes a
n Fashion Design                                                                   practical placement component and many real work opportunities.                      In the second year students progress towards the Advanced
                                                                                   Graduates will be prepared to work as Graphic Designers and                          Diploma covering areas of management including human
   Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                          follow careers in corporate design, illustration, freelance design,                  resources, leadership, legal, business planning, finance, and
                                                                                   printing and graphic design. This is a two-year full-time course                     small business operations. Students will have the opportunity to
   59171 (VGF), 59174 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                                 participate in an industry placement, and work at highly regarded
                                                                                   with approximately 25 hours of classes attendance a week.
   » Certificate IV in Applied Fashion Design and Technology: FT1                  Major studies: Graphic design, Illustration, Pre-press, Publication
                                                                                                                                                                        hospitality businesses, as well as optional participation on an
   » Diploma of Applied Fashion Design and Technology: FT2                                                                                                              interstate study tour.
                                                                                   design, Typography.
   » Advanced Diploma of Applied Fashion Design and                                                                                                                     Students experience working in The Gordon’s two operational
                                                                                   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
     Technology: FT3                                                                                                                                                    venues; Cafe on Track and the Davidson Restaurant, and may exit
                                                                                   Selection mode: Interview, Folio.                                                    with a Certificate IV in Hospitality after the first year or with a
   About the course: This course incorporates four qualification
                                                                                   See extra requirements for specifics.                                                Diploma of Hospitality after 18 months.
   levels, to equip students with the skills, knowledge and design
   capabilities to work in the fashion industry as a designer,                     Extra requirements:                                                                  Possible career outcomes from the Advanced Diploma include
   merchandiser or quality assurance officer.                                      Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must attend an                          Food and Beverage Manager, management in hotels, or small
   In the first year students develop foundation skills across core                interview in either late October or during November. Applicants                      business owners.
   disciplines in pattern making, fibres and fabrics, illustration, range          must telephone (03) 5225 0500 to arrange a time.                                     Major studies: Business planning, Business skills, Business
   development, garment construction and quality assurance.                        Additional information: Applicants are encouraged to attend a                        Technology, Customer service, Financial management, Food and
                                                                                   Graphic Design Course Information Seminar on either Sunday 21                        beverage management, Food and beverage service, Hospitality
                                                                                   August 2011 at 11.30am OR Tuesday 11 October at 6:30pm; City                         sales and marketing, Human resource management, Legal
                                                                                                                                                                        knowledge, Occupational health and safety, Stock control,
                                                                                                                                                                        Sustainability, Wine and beer knowledge.


                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
184 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                 KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          Additional information: An initial information session will be held        Major studies: Network applications, Network design,
   Selection mode: Form, interview, information session. See Extra            on Sunday 21 August 2011, see website for times and locations.             Network infrastructure, security and wireless, Network server
   requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                           administration, Networking, Operating systems, Project
                                                                           n Information Technology                                                      management, Project planning, Server side web programming,
   Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                         Systems analysis, Wireless network security, Workplace skills.
   Form: Applicants must complete a Supplementary Application
                                                                                                                                                         Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Form and submit it at the information session along with any               Gordon, East Geelong
   prior qualifications gained in the hospitality industry. Download                                                                                     Selection mode: Information Session, ATAR or VCAL. See Extra
                                                                              59331 (VGF), 59334 (Fee type determined by provider)                       requirements for specifics
   the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or
   telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the form posted.                          » Certificate IV in Information Technology (General): FT1                  Extra requirements:
   Information and interview session: Applicants must attend only
                                                                              » Diploma of Information Technology (General): FT2                         CY12: Applicants must attend an information session to be held
   one of two compulsory information and interview sessions held in           About the course: The Diploma of Information Technology                    in late November or early December. Applicants should check The
   room F2.01 Fenwick Street campus 1pm-3pm, 23 November OR 7                 (General) incorporates the Certificate IV as its first year of study,      Gordon website for details.
   December. Applicants must telephone to register their attendance           equipping students with a broad range of information and
                                                                                                                                                         Interviews: (some applicants only) Applicants with VCAL
   (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799.                                          communications technology skills and knowledge for an exciting
                                                                                                                                                         must attend an informal interview at the conclusion of the
                                                                              career in the industry.
   Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799                                                                                       information session.
   before applying.                                                           This practical, hands-on course covers many aspects of ICT
                                                                                                                                                         NONY12: Applicants must attend an information session to be held
                                                                              including Microsoft applications, computer programming,
   Additional information: An initial information session will be held                                                                                   in late November or early December. Applicants should check The
                                                                              database design and development, networks, hardware, operating
   on Sunday 21 August 2011, see website for times and locations.                                                                                        Gordon website for details.
                                                                              systems, systems analysis and design and developing websites and
                                                                              multimedia.                                                                Interviews: (some applicants only) Applicants must attend an
n Hospitality/Events                                                          The course emphasis is on software development, databases,
                                                                                                                                                         informal interview at the conclusion of the information session.
                                                                              multimedia and websites, and provides an opportunity for students          Additional information: An exciting new training package
   Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                     to specialise and attain a high level of expertise in specific areas.      for all Information and Communication Technology courses will
                                                                                                                                                         soon be introduced and course codes and content will be updated
   59501 (VGF), 59504 (Fee type determined by provider)                       Students can expect around 20 hours of classes per week.
                                                                                                                                                         to reflect latest industry standards. Please refer to The Gordon
   » Diploma of Events/Diploma of Hospitality: FT1.5                          Students successfully completing the first year of the Diploma of
                                                                                                                                                         website for the most up to date information on this course.
                                                                              Information Technology (General) will receive a Certificate IV in
   About the course: Students studying a dual qualification in
                                                                              Information Technology (General)
   Hospitality and Event Management at The Gordon will meet a
                                                                              Major studies: Computer programing, Database design and                 n Information Technology (Website
   clear industry demand for management staff who can combine
   hospitality knowledge with event management skills. This new dual          management, Hardware tools, Networks, Operating systems,                  Development)
   qualification is designed to meet the industry trend focused on event      Software applications, Systems analysis and design, Web
   development in hospitality (in produce, wine, regional produce, food       development, Workplace skills.                                             Gordon, East Geelong
   and wine festivals), adding supporting knowledge and experience            Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          59081 (VGF), 59084 (Fee type determined by provider)
   to the traditional skill sets across functions, catering and food and      Selection mode: ATAR or academic record.
   beverage management, conferences and weddings.                                                                                                        » Certificate IV in Information Technology (Websites): FT1
                                                                              Additional information: An exciting new training package
   The course covers core skills in event and project management,                                                                                        » Diploma of Information Technology (Website
                                                                              for all Information and Communication Technology courses will
   research, finance, human resource management as well as food                                                                                            Development): FT2
                                                                              soon be introduced and course codes and content will be updated
   and beverage service and management, catering logistics, OHS                                                                                          About the course: This course incorporates the Certificate IV as
                                                                              to reflect latest industry standards. Please refer to The Gordon
   and stock control.                                                                                                                                    its first year of study, and equips students with advanced skills
                                                                              website for the most up to date information on this course.
                                                                                                                                                         in the widely expanding field of Internet and Intranet website
   With an increasing demand and industry growth in this area,
                                                                                                                                                         development and design.
   students can enjoy a range of career options from function and          n Information Technology (Networking)
   event manager, to catering company supervisor.                                                                                                        The course has been developed with industry assistance and
                                                                                                                                                         covers all aspects of website management including design and
   Major studies: Business Networking, Business technology,
                                                                              Gordon, East Geelong                                                       development, site performance, security fundamentals, database
   Catering Logistics, Customer Service, Events management,
                                                                              59191 (VGF), 59194 (Fee type determined by provider)                       design and integrity, advanced Java programming, platform
   Financial management, Food and beverage service and
                                                                                                                                                         testing and monitoring.
   management, Hospitality and Events Sales and Marketing, Human              » Certificate IV in Information Technology (Networking): FT1
   resources, Legal Knowledge, Occupational Health and Safety,                                                                                           Students can expect around 20 hours of class per week, which
                                                                              » Diploma of Information Technology (Networking): FT2
   Sustainablity.                                                                                                                                        includes a website project to encourage students to integrate
                                                                              About the course: This course incorporates the Certificate IV              their skills to produce a web solution for a real business. Graduates
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          as its first year of study, and is ideal for people wishing to gain        will have the skills to enable them to enter careers in web
   Selection mode: Form, Information session, Interview. See Extra            entry at an advanced level within the Computer Networking and              programming, website management and e-commerce, or work as
   requirements for specifics                                                 Security field.                                                            web architects or designers.
   Extra requirements:                                                        The course equips students with advanced skills and knowledge              Students successfully completing the first year of the Diploma
   Form: Applicants must complete a Supplementary Application                 in the design, installation and maintenance of Local and Wide              of Information Technology (Website Develop.) will receive a
   Form and submit it at nominated information session                        Area Networks, Wireless Networking, Server Software and                    Certificate IV in Information Technology (Website Develop.).
   along with any prior qualifications gained in the hospitality              Enterprise Network Administration, while configuring a high
                                                                              level Secured Enterprise.                                                  Major studies: Database design and management, Hardware
   industry. Download the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/                                                                                             tools, Operating systems, Software applications, Systems analysis
   vtacsuppappform) or telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the form              The Gordon has a strong Industry partnership with key IT vendors           and design, Web applications programming, Website design and
   posted.                                                                    including CISCO networking academy, Microsoft and Orical, and              strategies, Website development, Workplace skills.
   Information and interview session: Applicants must attend only             graduates may also achieve vendor accreditations which are highly
                                                                              regarded in industry, including CISCO CCNA, Microsoft MCSA,                Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   one of two compulsory information and interview sessions held
                                                                              Comp TIA Security+ and Certified Information System Security               Selection mode: ATAR or academic record.
   23 November OR 7 December in room F2.02 Fenwick Street
   campus 10am-12pm. Applicants must telephone to register their              Professional (CISSP).                                                      Additional information: An exciting new training package
   attendance (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799.                               Graduates can look forward to careers in Network                           for all Information and Communication Technology courses will
                                                                              Administration, Network Engineering, Network Security and                  soon be introduced and course codes and content will be updated
   Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799
                                                                              Technical Project Management.                                              to reflect latest industry standards. Please refer to The Gordon
   before applying.
                                                                                                                                                         website for the most up to date information on this course.



                                                                                                                                                                                    Gordon (The) | 185
n Higher Education qualification                               n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                                n Other Graduates

n Interactive Digital Media                                                            Major studies: Colour studies, Computer-aided design (CAD),                    n Laboratory Technology
                                                                                       Construction, Digital applications (photoshop), Drawing,
                                                                                       Furnishings, Interior design, Lighting, Materials, Purchasing.
   Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                                                                                                                   Gordon, Geelong (City)
                                                                                       Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   59091 (VGF), 59094 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                                     Biological and Environmental Testing: 59181 (VGF),
                                                                                       Selection mode: Form, information session, ATAR or VCAL. See
   » Certificate IV in Interactive Digital Media: FT1                                  Extra requirements for specifics
                                                                                                                                                                            59184 (Fee type determined by provider)
   » Diploma of Interactive Digital Media: FT1.5                                       Extra requirements:                                                                  » Diploma of Laboratory Technology: FT2
   » Advanced Diploma of Screen and Media: FT2                                         Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Supplementary                            Biotechnology: 59291 (VGF), 59294 (Fee type
   About the course: These courses provide a broad knowledge base                      Application form by 14 October (Late Applicants by 11 November,                      determined by provider)
   in the digital media industry and encompass a growing range of                      Very Late Applicants by 9 December).Applicants can download
   applications across business, education, entertainment, art and                                                                                                          » Diploma of Laboratory Technology: FT2
                                                                                       the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or
   commerce; in fact, anywhere where different media are integrated.                   telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the form posted.                                    Forensic and Pathology Testing: 59211 (VGF), 59214
   Using digital technology, participants learn to use industry                                                                                                             (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                       Information Session: Applicants must attend room E1.06
   standard software to create products that include presentations,
   movies, animations, web-sites, special effects, games, learning
                                                                                       (Theatrette) E building East Geelong campus Wednesday 12                             » Diploma of Laboratory Technology: FT2
                                                                                       October 6.30pm                                                                       About the course: This course provides broad based training for
   objects and more.
                                                                                       VCAL students will be assessed on the basis of their                                 technical officers, analysts and other job roles in biotechnology,
   The first year of study represents a Certificate IV in Interactive
                                                                                       supplementary application form and attendance at the                                 biological and environmental testing, chemical analysis and
   Digital Media and it is possible to exit after this first year. Continuing
                                                                                       compulsory information session.                                                      testing, and pathology of other scientific laboratories.
   students complete the Diploma codelivered with the Advanced
   Diploma in their second year of study. This structure makes it possible                                                                                                  The course comprises nine core units to develop essential skills
   to obtain three qualifications over a two year period.                        n International Business                                                                   required for technical officers plus testing, sampling, biology and
                                                                                                                                                                            chemistry, microscopy and calibrations, and other specialist units.
   Major studies: Animation design and production, Digital video,
   Interactive digital media, Visual effects production, World Wide Web.               Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                               The course is recommended for anyone interested in science
                                                                                                                                                                            within any laboratory environment and is delivered with a
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    59441 (VGF), 59444 (Fee type determined by provider)                                hands-on approach in a simulated laboratory, offering elective
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                    » Certificate IV in International Trade: FT1                                         streams in Pathology Testing, Biological and Environmental
   Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 before applying.                      » Diploma of International Business: FT2                                             Testing, and Biotechnology.
   Extra requirements:                                                                 About the course: The Diploma of International Business reflects                     The Gordon’s laboratory facilities are state of the art, having
   Interview: Applicants must attend an interview in late October                      the role of individuals who have responsibility for the work of other                recently undergone refurbishment. With highly experienced
   or during November 2011, applicants will be contacted to                            staff, and lead teams in conducting international business activities.               teaching staff and extensive industry contacts, students have the
   arrange a time.                                                                     This course incorporates the Certificate IV in International Trade                   opportunity to use and maintain a range of equipment, as well as
                                                                                       as its first year of study, covering generic business knowledge and                  undertaking mandatory work placement.
   Additional information: Applicants are encouraged to attend an
   Information Seminar                                                                 skills, specific international knowledge of cross-culture, marketing                 Major studies: Biological and environmental testing,
                                                                                       and business activities for both service and product trading and                     Biotechnology, Chemistry (medical, forensic and analytical),
   on either Sunday 21 August 2011 at
                                                                                       management skills.                                                                   Environmental testing, Laboratory technology, Occupational health
   12.15pm OR Tuesday 11 October at 7.15pm; City Campus -                                                                                                                   and safety, Pathology.
                                                                                       In the second year, students enhance their theoretical knowledge
   Fenwick Street Geelong, room T3.Foyer. Please contact                               in international business, as well as developing their managerial                    Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0716 to book your place.                                skills to ensure that international business activities are conducted
   Please bring pen and paper.                                                         effectively within an organisation or business department.                     n Make-up
                                                                                       Major studies: Import and export business studies, International
n Interior Design and Decoration                                                       business, International law, International trade, International trade
                                                                                       and export, Management, Risk analysis, Transport and logistics.
                                                                                                                                                                            Gordon, Geelong (City)
   Gordon, East Geelong                                                                                                                                                     59371 (VGF), 59374 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                       Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   59051 (VGF), 59054 (Fee type determined by provider)                                Selection mode: Form, ATAR or VCAL.                                                  » Diploma of Specialist Make-up Services: FT1
                                                                                       See Extra requirements for specifics.                                                About the course: The Diploma of Specialist Makeup allows
   » Certificate IV in Interior Decoration: FT1                                                                                                                             students to study the world of makeup artistry applicable to the
   » Diploma of Interior Design and Decoration: FT2                                    Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                                            screen and media sectors. Students will learn basic skin analysis,
   About the course: These two courses provide the skills and                          Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Supplementary                            safety issues, product and tool knowledge to incorporate into a
   knowledge to design and document interiors for residential and                      Application Form by 22 December. Download the form (http://                          design for film, television and theatre. A variety of application
   commercial buildings, for a career as an interiors consultant in the                www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or telephone (03)                              techniques along with resourcing and researching to replicate
   retail sector (Certificate IV) or an interior designer (consultant) in              5225 0500 to have the form posted.                                                   historical and period design applications for their respective medium.
   the residential and commercial construction industry (Diploma).                     VCAL students will be assessed on the basis of their supplementary                   Students will gain knowledge of script interpretation and apply safe
   The course is structured to simulate workplace environments                         application form.                                                                    work procedures when applying special effects products.
   and industry expectations, with subjects offered across a range                                                                                                          Graduates could establish a career as a freelance film and
   of techniques including colour and fabric selection, residential                                                                                                         television makeup artist, session stylist and makeup artist for
   construction methods, 2D and 3D software skills, and                                                                                                                     fashion, makeup designer for retail cosmetic house or a wedding
   graphic presentation.                                                                                                                                                    makeup specialist.
   The Certificate IV is typically delivered over a one year period,                                                                                                        Major studies: Apply and remove makeup, Continuity, Design,
   and the Diploma is typically delivered over a further year                                                                                                               Hair styling and wig applications, Occupational health and safety,
   of study (completion of Certificate IV is pre-requisite to                                                                                                               Specialised makeup effects.
   undertaking Diploma).                                                                                                                                                    Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Successful completion of this course meets minimum                                                                                                                       Selection mode: Information session, Interview. See Extra
   industry requirements to work as an interior designer                                                                                                                    requirements for specifics.
   decorator (consultant).




                                                                                CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
186 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                    KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
  Extra requirements:                                                       course students cover human anatomy and physiology, nutrition,            (community recreation), Risk analysis and management, Rock
  Information Session: Applicants must attend a compulsory                  pathology, and also learn how to work safely and ethically                climbing and abseiling, Scuba diving, Sea kayaking, Snorkelling,
  information session on 26 October, 5.00pm, City Campus, Fenwick           in health care and wellness environments, to communicate                  Wilderness first aid.
  Street Room G2.26. Students may bring additional documentation            effectively with clients and other health care workers, and how to        Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  supporting their chosen study. Documentation may be in the form           operate a massage practice. After completing the course graduates
                                                                                                                                                      Selection mode: ATAR or VCAL, information session, test. See
  of a portfolio of their work using photographs and illustrated            can apply for registration with the Australian Association of
                                                                                                                                                      Extra requirements for specifics.
  designs. Other evidence could be a document outlining an                  Massage Therapists (AAMT). Students can also complete the
                                                                            Advanced Diploma of Remedial Massage (Myotherapy) with a                  Extra requirements:
  inspirational artist whom they aspire to.
                                                                            further year of full time year of study.                                  Information session (some applicants only): VCAL students must
  Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
                                                                            Major studies: Anatomy, Business, Clinical assessment,                    attend an information session on Monday 14 November, East
  telephone or mail to applicants required to attend.
                                                                            Communication skills, Massage, Massage therapy, Pathology,                Geelong Campus, 6.00pm in Room H1.02. Applicants must bring
                                                                            Physiology, Professional practice, Sports therapy, Therapeutic            any additional relevant supporting documents, CV, references
n Marketing                                                                 massage.                                                                  etc. Preference will be given to applicants with knowledge or
                                                                                                                                                      experience in the sport industry.
                                                                            Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                    Selection mode: Information pack, form. See Extra requirements
                                                                                                                                                      Test: VCAL students will be assessed based on a basic literacy and
   59421 (VGF), 59424 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                               numeracy test completed at the compulsory information session.
                                                                            for specifics.
  » Certificate IV in Marketing: FT1                                                                                                                  Additional information: An information session will be held
                                                                            Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                      on Monday 14 November, East Geelong Campus, 6.00pm in
  » Diploma of Marketing: FT2                                               CY12                                                                      Room H1.02. This session is not compulsory for applicants not
  » Advanced Diploma of Marketing: FT2.5                                    Information pack. Applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 to             studying VCAL, but they are encouraged to attend. Late applicants
  About the course: The Advanced Diploma of Marketing                       request an information pack by 1 October (Late applicants by              should telephone (03) 5225 0500 by 16 December for details
  incorporates the Certificate IV as its first year of study, and the       9 December).                                                              on an alternative information session. Applicants should bring
  Diploma as the second year of study and provides students with an         Form: A Supplementary Application form is included in the                 any additional relevant supporting documents, CV, references
  advanced level of skills and knowledge to develop, compete, and           Information pack. Applicants must complete and submit the form            etc. Preference will be given to applicants with knowledge or
  adopt effective and successful marketing practices in a demanding         by 22 December.                                                           experience in the sport industry.
  and ever-changing global market place.                                                                                                              A new training package for all Sport and Recreation courses will
                                                                            Applicants must include whether they have completed a Massage
  As well as an overall introduction to business, this course provides      short course. Applicants must attach certified evidence of course         soon be introduced, and course codes and content may change
  students with a sound knowledge of sales, marketing and basic             completion (if applicable).                                               slightly. Please refer to The Gordon website for the most up to
  management, to effectively work in a management position or to                                                                                      date information.
  start your own business.                                                  NONY12
  This course is offered in flexi-mode format, allowing students            Information pack. Applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 to
                                                                            request an information pack by 1 October.                              n Public Relations
  to complete components in their own time as well as attend
  specialist workshops on-campus.                                           Form: A Supplementary Application form is included in the
                                                                            Information pack. Applicants must complete and submit the form            Gordon, Geelong (City)
  There are a number of employment opportunities resulting from
  this field of study, and graduates can look forward to careers            by 18 November.                                                           59121 (VGF), 59124 (Fee type determined by provider)
  in marketing, sales, personnel and administration in corporate            Applicants must include whether they have completed a Massage             » Diploma of Business (Public Relations): FT1
  enterprises and private institutions including international              short course. Applicants must attach certified evidence of course         » Advanced Diploma of Business (Public Relations):
  organisations and government bodies.                                      completion (if applicable).                                                 FT1 - CANCELLED
  Major studies: Direct marketing, Distribution and logistics,                                                                                        About the course: The Advanced Diploma of Business (Public
  E-marketing, Finance, Marketing management, Marketing                  n Outdoor Recreation                                                         Relations) incorporates the Diploma of Business (Public Relations)
  promotions, Marketing research, Marketing strategy, Retail                                                                                          and provides further insight and advanced skills for a PR career
  marketing, Services marketing.                                            Gordon, East Geelong                                                      within any the private and public sectors, or to set up a business in
  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                   your own right.
                                                                            59061 (VGF), 59064 (Fee type determined by provider)
  Selection mode: Form, ATAR or VCAL.                                                                                                                 At the Diploma level, the course provides excellent grounding in
                                                                            » Diploma of Outdoor Recreation: FT2                                      writing skills, media communications, customer research, public
  See Extra requirements for specifics.
                                                                            About the course: This course has been developed alongside                relations campaigns and project management. At the Advanced
  Extra requirements:                                                       industry professionals to develop skills and knowledge in outdoor         level the course further develops skills in communication and
  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Supplementary                 recreation and immerses students in specific activity fields. The         writing, as well as financial and business management, marketing
  Application Form by 22 December. Download the form (http://               course includes Bushwalking, Snorkeling, Climbing, Abseiling,             and publicity, sponsorship and fundraising, grant writing,
  www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or telephone (03)                   Challenge Ropes Course, Wilderness First Aid and Adventure                multimedia, legal, and crisis management training.
  5225 0500 to have the form posted.                                        Based Learning. Students also select one major water activity: Sea
                                                                                                                                                      In 2012 this course offers excellent opportunities for students to gain
  VCAL students will be assess on the basis of their supplementary          Kayaking or Scuba Diving.
                                                                                                                                                      genuine industry experience across all units, including work on the
  application form                                                          The course includes mandatory work placement to a minimum                 presentation of a major project for the City of Greater Geelong.
                                                                            of 90 hours per year, which can be undertaken in an area of
                                                                                                                                                      Major studies: Administrative requirements, Budgets and
n Massage/Myotherapy                                                        students’ choice.
                                                                                                                                                      finance, Business continuity, Business plans, Communications,
                                                                            Graduates could expect to gain employment across a range of               Fundraising and Sponsorship, Government relations, Industry
  Gordon, East Geelong                                                      settings including adventure tourism, outdoor recreation centres          knowledge, Legal requirements, Occupational health and safety,
                                                                            or camps, specialist activity instruction, outdoor recreation stores      Public relations, Research and anaylsis, Visual design.
   59161 (VGF), 59164 (Fee type determined by provider)                     and tourist resorts.
                                                                                                                                                      Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  » Diploma of Remedial Massage: FT2                                        There is a significant lifestyle and financial commitment to
  About the course: The Diploma of Remedial Massage will equip                                                                                        Selection mode: ATAR or VCAL, Form.
                                                                            successfully complete the requirements of this qualification.
  students with comprehensive skills and knowledge to work                                                                                            See Extra requirements for specifics.
                                                                            Students have an option to exit the course at the end of the first
  as an unsupervised remedial massage therapist. Students will              year will receive a Certificate IV in Outdoor Recreation.                 Extra requirements:
  gain theoretical and practical training in planning, applying and         Major studies: Adventure based learning, Bushwalking,                     Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Supplementary
  assessing massage treatment in the health care and soft tissue            Challenge ropes course, Client services, Law (sports), Occupational       Application Form by 25 November. Download the form (http://
  treatment industries. Remedial massage includes sport, postural,          health and safety, Outdoor leadership and guiding, Recreation             www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or telephone (03)
  therapeutic, relaxation and remedial techniques. Throughout the                                                                                     5225 0500 to have the form posted.


                                                                                                                                                                                 Gordon (The) | 187
 Higher Education qualification                              Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               Other Graduates

   VCAL students will be assessed on the basis of their supplementary              Major studies: Austswim, Event management, Exercise                                  any additional relevant supporting documents, CV, references
   application form.                                                               science, Facilities management, First aid, Law (sports), Nutrition,                  etc. Preference will be given to applicants with knowledge or
   Additional information: Applicants are encouraged to contact                    Occupational health and safety, Officiating and coaching,                            experience in the sport industry.
   the Course Coordinator (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0556 prior to                Personal training, Psychology, Recovery programs, Small business                     Test: VCAL students will be assessed based on a basic literacy and
   applying to discuss the course in detail.                                       management, Strength training.                                                       numeracy test completed at the compulsory information session.
                                                                                   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    Additional information: An information session will be held
 Retail Management                                                                Selection mode: ATAR or VCAL, information session, test. See                         on Monday 14 November, East Geelong Campus, 6.00pm in
                                                                                   Extra requirements for specifics.                                                    Room H1.02. This session is not compulsory for applicants not
                                                                                   Extra requirements:                                                                  studying VCAL, but they are encouraged to attend. Late applicants
   Gordon, East Geelong                                                                                                                                                 should telephone (03) 5225 0500 by 16 December for details
   59411 (VGF), 59414 (Fee type determined by provider)                            Information session (some applicants only): VCAL students must
                                                                                                                                                                        on an alternative information session. Applicants should bring
                                                                                   attend an information session on Monday 14 November, East
   » Diploma of Retail Management: FT0.5 - CANCELLED                               Geelong Campus, 6.00pm in Room H1.02. Applicants must bring
                                                                                                                                                                        any additional relevant supporting documents, CV, references
   About the course: This course has been developed with industry                                                                                                       etc. Preference will be given to applicants with knowledge or
                                                                                   any additional relevant supporting documents, CV, references
   assistance to provide relevant skills and knowledge in key areas                                                                                                     experience in the sport industry.
                                                                                   etc. Preference will be given to applicants with knowledge or
   of retail management, and is ideal for those moving into higher                 experience in the sport industry.                                                    A new training package for all Sport and Recreation courses will
   management positions. These skills will be applicable to a small                                                                                                     soon be introduced, and course codes and content may change
                                                                                   Test: VCAL students will be assessed based on a basic literacy and
   retail outlet, a section or department within a larger retail store, a                                                                                               slightly. Please refer to The Gordon website for the most up to
                                                                                   numeracy test completed at the compulsory information session.
   small wholesale outlet, or a section or department within a larger                                                                                                   date information.
   wholesale business.                                                             Additional information: An information session will be held
                                                                                   on Monday 14 November, East Geelong Campus, 6.00pm in
   The course is delivered over a series of workshops including a                                                                                                  Tourism
                                                                                   Room H1.02. This session is not compulsory for applicants not
   mixture of case studies, team activities, theory and practical
                                                                                   studying VCAL, but they are encouraged to attend. Late applicants
   assessments and e-learning. It covers human resources, managing
   budgets, setting strategic plans, controlling inventory, managing
                                                                                   should telephone (03) 5225 0500 by 16 December for details                           Gordon, Geelong (City)
                                                                                   on an alternative information session. Applicants should bring                       59881 (VGF), 59884 (Fee type determined by provider)
   teams and being innovative in the workplace.
                                                                                   any additional relevant supporting documents, CV, references
   Major studies: Create an innovative work environment, Human                     etc. Preference will be given to applicants with knowledge or                        » Certificate IV in Tourism: FT1
   resources, Inventory control, Manage operations to budget,                      experience in the sport industry.                                                    » Certificate IV in Tourism (Guiding): FT1
   Manage sales and service delivery, Merchandising, Recruit and                                                                                                        » Diploma of Tourism: FT1.5
                                                                                   A new training package for all Sport and Recreation courses will
   select personnel, Set strategic plans, Team leadership.                                                                                                              About the course: The Diploma of Tourism specialises in
                                                                                   soon be introduced, and course codes and content may change
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                               slightly. Please refer to The Gordon website for the most up to                      ecotourism, and works closely with ecotourism operators both
   Selection mode: Information session, interview and form. See                    date information.                                                                    within the Geelong region and state-wide.
   Extra requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                                    The first year of the course includes the dual qualification
   Extra requirements:                                                        Sport and Recreation Administration/                                                     Certificate IV in Tourism and Certificate IV in Guiding, which
   Form: Applicants must complete a Supplementary Application                                                                                                           equips students with the skills to work as a tour guide in a range
                                                                               Events                                                                                   of tourism environments, including in-bound and local tour
   Form and submit by 25 November. Download the form (http://
   www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or telephone (03)                                                                                                              operators. The course also develops core skills in marketing,
   5225 0500 to have the form posted.                                              Gordon, East Geelong                                                                 research, communication, OHS, E-business and sustainability, as
                                                                                    59601 (VGF), 59604 (Fee type determined by provider)                                well as experience in outdoor recreation and nature-based tourism.
   Information and interview session: Applicants must attend
   a compulsory information and interview session to be held                       » Diploma of Events/Diploma of Sport and Recreation: FT1                             Ideally situated within the Great Ocean Road tourism region,
   5 December. Details will be provided by telephone or mail to                                                                                                         The Gordon works in close partnership with the local tourism
                                                                                   About the course: In consultation with industry, The Gordon
   applicants upon submission of supplementary application form.                                                                                                        industry, and students gain the benefit of working with our highly
                                                                                   has a developed a dual Diploma in Sport and Recreation
                                                                                                                                                                        experienced staff with extensive backgrounds and contacts in the
                                                                                   Administration and Event Management. This course has been
                                                                                                                                                                        Tourism industry. The course includes extensive overnight field
 Sport (Sport Development)                                                        developed based on a growing demand for specialist skills
                                                                                                                                                                        trips and an industry visit program, including nature based guiding
                                                                                   focusing on Sport and Events. Students will develop skills and
                                                                                                                                                                        on the Great Ocean Walk.
                                                                                   knowledge to work specifically in the Sport and Recreation
   Gordon, East Geelong                                                            Industry, providing Event Management in an administrative or                         Major studies: Administration, Communication, Customer
   59071 (VGF), 59074 (Fee type determined by provider)                            organisational capacity in fitness centres, sporting grounds or                      service, Marketing, Occupational health and safety, Planning and
                                                                                   complexes and aquatic centres.                                                       product development, Regional destination knowledge, Sales and
   » Diploma of Sport (Development): FT1
                                                                                                                                                                        operations, Sustainable business practices, Tour guiding.
   About the course: This course is a dual qualification including                 Our carefully selected areas of study develop students’ ability to
   the Diploma of Sport Development and Certificate IV in Fitness.                 develop, plan and implement sporting events, auxiliary functions,                    Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   It includes industry qualifications in Pool Bronze, Austswim                    carnivals, multisport events, fundraising sports days, corporate                     Selection mode: Information session, interview and test. See
   teaching, Level 2 First Aid and experience in event management,                 sporting activities, and sporting bids.                                              Extra requirements for specifics.
   personal training, coaching, and exercise science and nutrition.                With specialist teachers and strong industry partnerships, students                  Extra requirements:
   Students’ studies have been designed to offer hands-on                          will gain both theory and practical skills via a hands-on approach,                  Information and interview session: Applicants must attend only
   experience in the local region, via schools, sporting facilities and            covering topics including event concepts and staging, marketing,                     one of two compulsory information and interview sessions held in
   major Geelong events.                                                           managing volunteers, OHS and risk management, and budgeting.                         room F2.01 Fenwick Street campus 1pm-3pm, 23 November OR 7
   The course includes mandatory work placement to a minimum of                    Major studies: Event Management, Law, Marketing,                                     December.Applicants must bring pen and paper. Applicants must
   160 hours which can be undertaken in an area of students’ choice.               Occupational health and safety, Organisational risk, Project                         telephone to register their attendance (03) 5225 0500 or
   Some hours are completed as structured class, and the majority                  management, Volunteering.                                                            (03) 5225 0799.
   must be completed outside of class hours.                                       Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    Test (some applicants only): VCAL students will be assessed based
   Graduates from the Diploma of Sport Development could expect                    Selection mode: ATAR or VCAL, information session, test. See                         on a basic literacy and numeracy test completed at the compulsory
   to gain employment in a range of sports and fitness settings                    Extra requirements for specifics.                                                    information session.
   including gym instructor, swim teacher, personal trainer, sports                                                                                                     Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799
   coaches and facility/event management type roles.                               Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                                        before applying.
                                                                                   Information session (some applicants only): VCAL students must
                                                                                   attend an information session on Monday 14 November, East                            Additional information: An initial information session will be
                                                                                   Geelong Campus, 6.00pm in Room H1.02. Applicants must bring                          held on Sunday 21 August, see the website for times and locations.


                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
188 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                 KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
n Tourism/Events                                                              participate in industry placements, extensive industry visits           n Visual Merchandising
                                                                              and field trip programs, as well as opportunities to work with
                                                                              tourism businesses.
   Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                                                                                                Gordon, Geelong (City)
                                                                              Major studies: Business planning, E-business, Finance, Human
   59511 (VGF), 59514 (Fee type determined by provider)                       resources, Legal requirements, Marketing, Research, Sustainability.
                                                                                                                                                         59391 (VGF), 59394 (Fee type determined by provider)
   » Diploma of Events/Diploma of Tourism: FT1.5                              Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          » Diploma of Visual Merchandising: FT1
   About the course: This course offers a dual qualification in                                                                                          About the course: The Diploma of Visual Merchandising is a
                                                                              Selection mode: Information session and interview. See Extra
   both Tourism and Events – industries which are strongly related                                                                                       hands-on, practical course equipping students with the skills and
                                                                              requirements for specifics.
   - equipping students with the ability to multi-skill across a range                                                                                   knowledge necessary to gain employment in the retail, visual
   of areas and increasing employability options. Students will               Extra requirements:                                                        merchandising, display and exhibition industries.
   gain both theory and practical skills, covering areas of tourism           Information and interview session: Applicants must attend only             The course covers a range of creative disciplines as well as theoretical
   marketing, outdoor recreation, communication and customer                  one of two compulsory information and interview sessions held in           and business units in marketing, OHS, and event management.
   service as well as event planning and management, high level               room F2.01 Fenwick Street campus 1pm-3pm, 23 November OR 7
                                                                                                                                                         Students undertake the course in flexi-mode, with full time
   organisational skills, research, finance and product development.          December. Applicants must telephone to register their attendance
                                                                                                                                                         attendance on-campus combined with industry placement and
   The course focuses on providing hands-on and real-life experience,         (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799.
                                                                                                                                                         online content.
   with The Gordon working in close partnership with local                    Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799
                                                                                                                                                         Major studies: Advertising, Business (Marketing), Computer
   businesses, government bodies and industry groups in the wider             before applying.
                                                                                                                                                         graphics, Conventions and exhibitions, Design, Digital art and
   Geelong region.                                                            Additional information: An initial information session will be             design, Drafting, Drawing and illustration, Event management
   Students gain the benefit of working with our highly experienced           held Sunday 21 August, see the website for times and locations.            (festivals), Graphic design, History (design), Internet and
   staff, and will undertake industry visits, volunteering and practical                                                                                 multimedia, Marketing (retail), Multimedia design, Occupational
   placements to develop job ready skills in one of Australia’s            n Visual Art                                                                  health and safety, Photo styling, Professional practice, Retail
   strongest employment markets.                                                                                                                         (promotion), Visual Merchandising, Visual theory.
   Major studies: Customer Service, Event management,                         Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                     Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Finance, Leadership, Legal, Occupational health and safety,
                                                                              59151 (VGF), 59154 (Fee type determined by provider)                       Selection mode: Information session, interview and form. See
   Project management, Research Skills, Sales and marketing,
                                                                                                                                                         Extra requirements for specifics.
   Toursim operations.                                                        » Certificate IV in Visual Arts and Contemporary Craft: FT1
                                                                                                                                                         Extra requirements:
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          » Diploma of Visual Art: FT2
                                                                              About the course: The Diploma of Visual Art is a contemporary              Information Session: Applicants must attend a compulsory
   Selection mode: Information session, interview and form. See
                                                                              course equipping students with comprehensive skills and                    information session held 2 November, 6.30pm, City Campus, Room
   Extra requirements for specifics
                                                                              knowledge for a career in the arts or related industries, either as a      G2.29 At this session, applicants will be given interview times for
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                   16 November 2011.
                                                                              practising artist or as an arts worker.
   Form: Applicants must complete a Supplementary Application                                                                                            Interview: Applicants must attend a compulsory interview to be
   Form and submit it at the information session. Download the form           The Certificate IV in Visual Art and Contemporary Craft is part of
                                                                              the Diploma course. At this level students will develop core skills        held 16 November. Time for interview will be given at information
   (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or telephone                                                                                            session. Applicants are encouraged to bring along any supporting
   (03) 5225 0500 to have the form posted.                                    in painting, drawing, photography, digital imaging, printmaking,
                                                                              jewellery, textiles and sculpture, drawing techniques, 2D and 3D           documentation of prior experience to their interview, such as a folio.
   Information and interview session: Applicants must attend only             design, and researching and analysing history and theory.                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Supplementary
   one of two compulsory information and interview sessions held in                                                                                      Application Form at the compulsory information session. Download
   room F2.02 Fenwick Street campus 3pm-5pm, 23 November OR 7                 The Diploma of Visual Art continues work on a multidisciplinary
                                                                              platform which includes more advanced skills in drawing, painting,         the form (http://www.thegordon.edu.au/vtacsuppappform) or
   December. Applicants must telephone to register their attendance                                                                                      telephone (03) 5225 0500 to have the form posted.
   (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799.                                          printmaking, installation, sculpture, research and arts business.
   Late applicants must telephone (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0799            Graduates from the Diploma of Visual Art will emerge as multi-
   before applying.                                                           skilled artists, able to move directly into their own professional
                                                                              practice, to seek work in an arts related industry or to pursue
   Additional information: An initial information session will be             further study in a Visual or Fine Arts undergraduate degree.
   held on Sunday 21 August, see the website for times and locations.
                                                                              Major studies: Digital imaging, Drawing, Jewellery, Painting,
                                                                              Photography, Printmaking, Sculpture, Textiles.
n Tourism/Sustainability                                                      Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                              Selection mode: Interview, folio, test. See Extra requirements
   Gordon, Geelong (City)                                                     for specifics.
   59541 (VGF), 59544 (Fee type determined by provider)                       Extra requirements:
   » Diploma of Sustainability/Advanced Diploma of                            Interview, test and folio: Applicants must telephone (03)
     Tourism: FT2                                                             5225 0500 to arrange an interview. Applicants must attend an
   About the course: The Gordon’s tourism students gain a strong              interview/drawing test in late October or during November 2011.
   working knowledge and understanding of all sectors of the                  Applicants must bring folio to interview. Late Applicants must
   tourism industry, offering a broad range of career pathways                telephone (03) 5225 0500.
   including operational, supervisory and management roles.                   Additional information: Applicants are encouraged to attend
   The Advanced Diploma of Tourism develops core skills and                   a Visual Arts Course Information Seminar on either Sunday 21
   knowledge in research, communication, finance, business                    August 2011 at 1.00pm OR Tuesday 11 October at 7.15pm; City
   management and tourism marketing. In the first year of study               Campus - Fenwick Street Geelong, room T3.12. Please contact
   students will also complete a specialist stream in either Guiding          (03) 5225 0500 or (03) 5225 0716 to book your place. Please
   or Retail Travel, and in the second year will complete a Diploma           bring pen and paper.
   of Sustainability.
   The Gordon is ideally situated within the Great Ocean Road
   tourism region, and works in partnership with the local tourism
   industry. Students gain the benefit of working with our highly
   experienced staff with extensive tourism backgrounds, and



                                                                                                                                                                                     Gordon (The) | 189
Goulburn Ovens
                                                              GOTAFE is a large regional TAFE Institute servicing the Goulburn, North-      Minimum tertiary entrance requirements
                                                              East, Gippsland, Western District and Metropolitan regions of Victoria
                                                                                                                                            See page 7.
                                                              and provides educational opportunities for approximately
                                                              16 000 students annually.                                                     Student services
                                                              The Institute provides a high quality range of programs, training and         The institute has excellent support services for its students including:
                                                              services via campuses at Benalla, Seymour, Shepparton, Wangaratta,            •	   Customer Service Centre
                                                              Werribee, Gippsland, Northern Victoria and Western Victoria. GOTAFE
                                                              delivers training programs at a national level to the community and           •	   Learning Resource Centre
                                                              industry and as such is a progressive educational training Institute in the   •	   Student Hostel and Accommodation Register
                                                              region and in the state of Victoria.                                          •	   Multicultural Education Centre
                                                              Fields of study include art and design, business and hospitality, health      •	   Koorie Education Unit
                                                              and community services, equine, engineering, automotive, animal
                                                                                                                                            •	   Youth and Student Services Officers
                                                              care, interactive media, performing arts, food science, agriculture and
                                                              horticulture, general studies and building and construction.                  •	   Student Association
                                                              The Institute has excellent facilities and services to support students.      •	   Recreational, leisure and sporting activities
                                                              Teaching Centres are equipped with modern technology including access         •	   Professional Counsellor
                                                              to the Internet. A student hostel is located at the William Orr Campus        •	   Disability Liaison Officer
                                                              Shepparton providing accommodation for 32 students and a 12-14
                                                              bed multi-unit student accommodation is available to students at the          •	   AUSTUDY, ABSTUDY, CentreLink Information.
                                                              Wangaratta Campus. Fully licensed training restaurants are available
                                                                                                                                            Further information
  Campus location and contacts                                at the Shepparton, Benalla and Wangaratta campuses. The Learning
                                                              Resource Centres provide library, auditorium and audio-visual facilities.     Contact Goulburn Ovens Institute of TAFE on
Fryers Street campus                                                                                                                        1300 468 233.
Fryers Street
Shepparton VIC 3630
William Orr campus                                            Courses available through VTAC
Wanganui Road
Shepparton VIC 3630                                                                                                                              The course focuses heavily on practical based delivery and revolves
Seymour campus
                                                              n Accounting                                                                       around acting methodologies that provide a core on which
Wallis Street                                                                                                                                    personal acting technique may be developed or enhanced. The
Seymour VIC 3660                                                   Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton                                                    high profile teaching staff have been sourced from the industry,
Docker Street campus                                                60101 (VGF), 60104 (Fee type determined by provider)                         and include professional actors, directors, filmmakers, writers and
Docker Street                                                      » Certificate IV in Financial Services (Accounting): FT1                      specialists in voice and movement.
Wangaratta VIC 3677                                                                                                                              Major studies: Acting, Audition Skills, Industry Survival Skills,
Rural Industries campus                                            Goulburn Ovens, Wangaratta                                                    Movement studies, Music, Performance, Screen and TV Studies,
Tone Road                                                           83191 (VGF), 83194 (Fee type determined by provider)                         Theatre history, Vocal studies.
Wangaratta VIC 3677                                                                                                                              Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
Benalla campus
                                                                   » Certificate IV in Financial Services (Accounting): FT1
                                                                   About the course: These courses have been developed with                      Selection mode: Audition and interview. See Extra requirements
57 Samaria Road                                                                                                                                  for specifics.
Benalla VIC 3672                                                   industry assistance to provide skills in standard accounting
                                                                   support functions, including duties such as, completion of BAS                Extra requirements:
Western Victoria campus
                                                                   and other office taxes, operational reporting, production of basic            Audition and Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233
7161 Princess Highway
                                                                   management reports, production of basic job costing reports,                  for audition time and date.
Terang VIC 3264
                                                                   preparation of budgets, supervising the operation of computer-
Werribee campus                                                    based systems, classifying, recording and reporting of accounting
3 Research Close                                                   information, maintaining inventory and fixed asset records, and
                                                                                                                                            n Agriculture
Werribee VIC 3030                                                  making decisions in a legal context.
Warragul campus
                                                                   Major studies: Accounting, Asset Registers, Budgets, Business
                                                                                                                                                 Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton
4/24 Mason Street                                                                                                                                 82011 (VGF), 82014 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                   Activity Statements, Business Reports, Computer-Based Systems,
Warragul VIC 3820                                                  Job Costing Reports, Maintaining Inventory, Making Decisions in a             » Diploma of Agriculture: FT2
Leongatha campus                                                   Legal Context, Taxation.                                                      » Advanced Diploma of Agriculture: FT2.5
18 Smith Street                                                    Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
Leongatha VIC 3953                                                                                                                               About the course: This course provides professional education
                                                                                                                                                 and training for employment as overseers and managers of
                                                              n Acting                                                                           Agricultural and pastoral enterprises, technicians, agronomists,
Toll Free: 1300 468 233                                                                                                                          nutritionists. Included in the studies are practical agricultural and
email: enquiry@gotafe.vic.edu.au                                                                                                                 associated business management skills. To achieve the Advanced
www.gotafe.vic.edu.au                                              Goulburn Ovens, Benalla                                                       Diploma qualification participants maybe required undertake up to
                                                                    83161 (VGF), 83164 (Fee type determined by provider)                         6 months of industry experience. The course is structured to enable
                                                                   » Advanced Diploma of Arts (Acting): FT3                                      students who have completed Certificate II, III or IV qualifications
  Fees:                                                                                                                                          to enter the course at the appropriate level. Similarly upon
                                                                   About the course: The Advanced Diploma of Arts (Acting) is
For further information about fees for these courses go to:        offered exclusively by GRADA in Victoria.                                     satisfactory completion of necessary course work participants may
                                                                                                                                                 exit the course with a qualification at certificate II, III or IV. This
http://www.gotafe.vic.edu.au/courses/fees.cfm                      The Advanced Diploma of Arts (Acting) focuses on building a
                                                                                                                                                 course is currently under review therefore course content, structure
                                                                   company of actors who will work and train together for 3 years,
                                                                                                                                                 and award titles may change.
                                                                   and upon graduation be equipped with skills to pursue an acting
                                                                   career in the professional arena.



190 | VTAC Guide 2012
   Major studies: Agribusiness, Agricultural marketing, Agricultural         Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.        n Information Technology (Networking)
   technology, Animal management, Crop management, Farm                      Extra requirements:
   planning and management, Farming practices, Irrigation and
   water management, Land development, Resource management.
                                                                             Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 to book by 29             Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton
                                                                             October.                                                                   60061 (VGF), 60064 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Selection mode: Interview - see Extra Requirements                                                                                                   » Certificate IV in Information Technology (Networking):
                                                                          n Graphic Design                                                                FT2
   Extra requirements:
   Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 by 30th                  Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton                                                 Goulburn Ovens, Wangaratta
   October for an interview time and date.
                                                                             60001 (VGF), 60004 (Fee type determined by provider)                       83051 (VGF), 83054 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                             » Diploma of Graphic Design: FT2                                           » Certificate IV in Information Technology (Networking):
n Agriculture (Dairy)                                                                                                                                     FT2
                                                                             Goulburn Ovens, Wangaratta                                                 About the course: These courses have been developed with
   Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton                                                83011 (VGF), 83014 (Fee type determined by provider)                       industry assistance to provide skills in managing, configuring
   83021 (VGF), 83024 (Fee type determined by provider)                      » Diploma of Graphic Design: FT2
                                                                                                                                                        and administering a local area network and wide area network.
   » Diploma of Agriculture: FT2                                                                                                                        Certificate IV in Information Technology (Networking) aims to
                                                                             About the course: This course focuses on building strong                   develop knowledge and skills in the areas of network design,
   » Advanced Diploma of Agriculture: FT3                                    technical expertise in finished art, and enable students to                network installation and connectivity, network security, computer
   About the course: This course provides professional education             become professional users of the Graphic Design Industry                   and network hardware, network troubleshooting, software
   and training for employment as supervisors and managers of dairy          standards software (InDesign, Illustrator and Photoshop).                  applications, network and stand alone operating systems, web
   farms, technicians, agronomists, nutritionists and other service          Creating web sites, page layouts and typography according to a             page development and other support areas of the information
   providers. Included in the studies are practical agricultural and         brief are all components of this course. During the course there           technology industry.
   business management skills. To achieve the Advanced Diploma               is collaboration with industry and local businesses to provide
                                                                                                                                                        Major studies: Network design, Network security, Networking.
   qualification participants maybe required undertake up to 6               students with innovative and challenging projects, increasing
   months of industry experience.                                            their capability, knowledge and skill base. The intensive program          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   The course is structured to enable students who have completed            aims to have students career-ready within the two year duration.           Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   Certificate II, III or IV qualifications to enter the course at the       Career opportunities are virtually endless with this high level            Extra requirements:
   appropriate level. Similarly upon satisfactory completion of              qualification, and include Corporate Design, Illustration, Freelance
                                                                                                                                                        Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 to book by 29
   necessary course work participants may exit the course with a             Design, Interactive Digital Media, Printing and Graphic Design.
                                                                                                                                                        October.
   qualification at certificate II, III or IV                                Major studies: Design, Design theory, Digital art and design,
   Major studies: Agribusiness, Agricultural technology, Agriculture,        Graphic arts.
                                                                                                                                                     n Interactive Digital Media
   Animal and plant biology, Animal breeding, Animal health, Animal          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   husbandry, Dairy studies, Farm planning and management,                   Selection mode: Interview, folio presentation. See Extra
   Farming practices, Irrigation and water management, Land                  requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                        Goulburn Ovens, Wangaratta
   development, Land resource management, Livestock production,
                                                                             Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                        83041 (VGF), 83044 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Pastures and fodder crops, Plant and animal production, Plant and                                                                                    » Diploma of Interactive Digital Media: FT1.5 to 2
   soil science, Rural business management.                                  Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must telephone
                                                                             1300 468233 to book, by 29 October. Applicants must attend in              About the course: The Certificate IV qualification reflects the
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                    role of individuals who use well-developed skills and a broad
                                                                             December.
   Selection mode: Interview: see Extra Requirements                                                                                                    knowledge base in a wide variety of contexts in the digital content
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                  industry. Student will learn specific skills in web developments,
                                                                          n Hospitality                                                                 CSS, action scripting, wiki’s, blogs, pod and vod casting, drawing,
   Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 by 30 October
                                                                                                                                                        design, digital imaging and the interactive digital media industry.
   for an interview time and date.
                                                                             Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton                                                 The Diploma qualification reflects the role of individuals who
                                                                             60941 (VGF), 60944 (Fee type determined by provider)                       possess a sound theoretical knowledge base and use a range
n Events                                                                                                                                                of specialised, technical or managerial competencies to plan,
                                                                             » Certificate IV in Hospitality: FT1                                       carry out and evaluate the work of self and/or team in the film,
                                                                             » Diploma of Hospitality: FT1 to FT2
   Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton                                                                                                                           television, radio and digital media industries.
                                                                             About the course: Prepares students for employment in                      Major studies: Animation (3D), Animation design and
   Part-time: 60041 (VGF), 60044 (Fee type determined by                     the operational, supervisory and management aspects of the                 production, Design, Digital audio, Digital video, Finance, Image
   provider)                                                                 hospitality industry. Students will gain practical experience in food      making, Image processing, Imaging and sound, Marketing,
   » Diploma of Events: PT2                                                  and beverage service, cookery and events and will also participate         Multimedia, Multimedia analysis and design, Multimedia
   About the course: This qualification is designed for application          in learning in the workplace.                                              authoring, Multimedia communications, Multimedia production
   across multiple industries including tourism, hospitality, sports         Major studies: Administration, Bar management, Business                    and development, Multimedia programming, Multimedia
   and recreation. It reflects the role of the Event Manager who             (accounting), Communications, Cookery, Customer service, Food              technology, Project management, World Wide Web, Writing
   is responsible for the overall organisation and management of             and beverage management, Food and beverage production, Food                (media).
   conferences, festivals and events either within a venue such as           and beverage service, Food handling, Food safety and regulation,           Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   a convention centre, sporting venue, hotel, and theatre or as             Hospitality management, Hospitality sales and marketing,
                                                                             Housekeeping, Leadership, Marketing, Restaurant operations.                Selection mode: Interview, folio presentation. See Extra
   an external independent or meetings organiser/manager. The
                                                                                                                                                        requirements for specifics.
   pathway to the Diploma of Events incorporates competencies from           Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   a range of Certificate III qualifications. Contact the institute for                                                                                 Extra requirements:
                                                                             Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   pathway advice.                                                                                                                                      Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must telephone
                                                                             Extra requirements:                                                        1300 468233 to book, by 30 October. Applicants must attend in
   Major studies: Administration, Business (accounting),
   Communications, Conventions and exhibitions, Environmental                Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 to book by 29             November.
   management, Event management (festivals), Event Staging,                  October.
   Human Resourse Managment, Leadership, Management,
   Marketing, OH & S, Risk Management, Tourism.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.


                                                                                                                                                                           Goulburn Ovens | 191
n Higher Education qualification                           n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                              n Other Graduates

n Live Production, Theatre and Events                                            Major studies: Clinical studies, Health studies, Medical                             Major studies: Editing, Feature writing, Fiction writing,
                                                                                 technology, Nursing, Nursing (acute care), Nursing (primary care).                   Journalism, Non-fiction writing, Performance writing, Publishing
                                                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    (print), Screenplay, Scriptwriting, Writing (children and young
   Goulburn Ovens, Benalla                                                                                                                                            adults).
   83171 (VGF), 83174 (Fee type determined by provider)                          Selection mode: Information session, test, interview. See Extra
                                                                                 requirements for specifics.                                                          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   » Advanced Diploma of Live Production, Theatre and                                                                                                                 Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
                                                                                 Extra requirements:
     Events (Technical Production): FT3
                                                                                 Information session: All applicants must attend an information                       Extra requirements:
   About the course: At GRADA production students work alongside
   the Acting students to create high quality entertainment outcomes             session at relevant campus. Test: Applicants must complete a                         Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 to book by 29
   through participation in projects. A sound theoretical knowledge              VETASSESS test prior to interview. Interview: Applicants must                        October.
   base and practical competencies are achieved through a mix of                 telephone 1300468233 to arrange an interview SUCCESSFUL
   classes and extensive project work. The course will suit those                APPLICANTS Police check: Students must complete a National                     n Sport
   students who demonstrate potential for and wish to acquire                    Police Records Check before commencing the course.
   expertise in all aspects of production for the entertainment                                                                                                       Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton
   industry. If you like working behind the scenes and want to do this     n Outdoor Recreation
   for a living then this is the course for you.                                                                                                                      60051 (VGF), 60054 (Fee type determined by provider)
   In First Year you will achieve competency at an assistant level in a          Goulburn Ovens, Benalla                                                              » Diploma of Sport and Recreation: FT1
   broad range of theatre production areas. Second Year gives you a
                                                                                  83201 (VGF), 83204 (Fee type determined by provider)                                Goulburn Ovens, Wangaratta
   higher level of competency and you can start specialising. In Third
   Year you achieve a higher skill level in your chosen specialisation           » Diploma of Outdoor Recreation: FT2                                                 83981 (VGF), 83984 (Fee type determined by provider)
   and will be taking on roles such as Stage Manager, Lighting / Audio           About the course: The Diploma of Outdoor Recreation at GOTAFE
                                                                                                                                                                      » Diploma of Sport and Recreation: FT1
   Designer, Set / Costume Designer, Head Technician and Production              provides students with a flexible program delivering a diverse
                                                                                 range of adventure activities to those starting out in the outdoor                   About the course: The Diploma of Sport and Recreation provides
   Manager.
                                                                                 industry or outdoor professionals seeking to broaden their skill                     the core skills and knowledge needed to perform a wide range
   Major studies: Audio, Costume design, Lighting, Multimedia,                                                                                                        of tasks and duties required within the Sport and Recreation
   Production management, Props and Scenery, Stage management.                   set. Students undertaking the Diploma of Outdoor Recreation will
                                                                                 gain the necessary skills needed to guide, instruct and coordinate a                 industry. The course specialises in preparing graduates in the
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                                  key industry sectors of sports administration, facility, program
                                                                                 variety of adventure activities.
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                                                                                                   management tourism, sports psychology, fitness, personal training
                                                                                 Training and assessment involves “hands on” experience in the                        and coaching. At the Shepparton campus, the Diploma has a focus
   Extra requirements:                                                           field, online theory, experience and mentoring in project and                        on sports management, event management and sports coaching.
   Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 to book an                   field work. Course is conducted by staff with recognised industry                    The Wangaratta campus specialises in fitness instruction, personal
   interview time and date.                                                      experience.                                                                          training, sports coaching and sports science, and also includes
                                                                                 After successful completion of first Year, students qualify for                      the Certificate III and Certificate IV (Personal Training) within the
n Nursing                                                                        Certificate IV in Outdoor Recreation. Successful completion the                      Diploma program.
                                                                                 Diploma of Outdoor Recreation qualifies students to enter the                        Major studies: Sport, Sport (development), Sport and recreation,
                                                                                 industry as an outdoor leader and facilitator.
   Goulburn Ovens, Benalla                                                                                                                                            Sports (coaching).
                                                                                 Articulation pathways available                                                      Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   83141 (VGF), 83144 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                 Major studies: Hardskill Training in Adventure Activity Skills,                      Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   » Diploma of Nursing (Enrolled/Division 2 nursing): FT1.5                     Leadership and Facilitation, Program and Facilities Management.
                                                                                                                                                                      Extra requirements:
                                                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Goulburn Ovens, Seymour                                                                                                                                            Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 to book by 29
                                                                                 Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics
   82001 (VGF), 82004 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                               October.
                                                                                 Extra requirements:
   » Diploma of Nursing (Enrolled/Division 2 nursing): FT1.5
                                                                                 Interview: Applicants must telephone 1300 468233 to book an                    n Visual Art
   Goulburn Ovens, Shepparton                                                    interview time and date.
   60091 (VGF), 60094 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                               Goulburn Ovens, Wangaratta
   » Diploma of Nursing (Enrolled/Division 2 nursing): FT1.5
                                                                           n Professional Writing & Editing                                                           83961 (VGF), 83964 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                                                                                                      » Diploma of Visual Art: FT2
   Goulburn Ovens, Wangaratta                                                    Goulburn Ovens, Wangaratta
                                                                                                                                                                      About the course: The Diploma of Visual Art is a multidisciplinary
   83151 (VGF), 83154 (Fee type determined by provider)                          Part-time: 83651 (VGF), 83654 (Fee type determined by                                course spanning Painting, Sculpture, Photography and
   » Diploma of Nursing (Enrolled/Division 2 nursing): FT1.5                     provider)                                                                            Printmaking. This program prepares individuals who wish to
   About the course: This course develops the skills and knowledge               » Certificate IV in Professional Writing and Editing: PT1                            pursue a career as a practicing visual artist or in other creative
   required for application for registration with the relevant                   About the course: The course reflects the role of writers and                        fields. This is achieved by studying practical and theoretical courses
   regulatory body as a Division 2 Enrolled Nurse.                               editors who possess sound theoretical knowledge and who                              covering important components of the arts business and health,
                                                                                 use a range of specialised and technical skills to plan, carry out                   safety and security procedures. Graduates may also choose to use
   Successful graduands will be able to communicate and interact
                                                                                 and evaluate written projects. There is an emphasis on sound                         the Diploma as a pathway to further degree studies. The course
   professionally and effectively with all members of the health care
                                                                                 grammatical construction and development of original ideas. The                      culminates in a professional Exhibition at the end of second year,
   team across the full spectrum of health care environments.
                                                                                 qualification has application across a range of industry contexts                    which enables students to publicly demonstrate their aesthetic,
   There is a significant theoretical and practical components to                                                                                                     social, environmental and ethical concepts and processes necessary
                                                                                 including newspaper journalism, freelance fiction or non-fiction
   the course. The practical components are completed as clinical                                                                                                     to reflect their personal creative enquiry.
                                                                                 writing, proof-reading and business writing. The Certificate IV is
   placement across a range of health care facilities and providers
                                                                                 delivered part time and off campus, and covers the acquisition of                    Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   giving students exposure to a variety of skills and health settings.
                                                                                 basic and specialised skills of writing and editing. Students also                   Selection mode: Interview, folio presentation. See Extra
   During the course students will be provided education on                      learn to use technology for writers as both a communication and                      requirements for specifics.
   medication administration, anatomy and physiology, acute,                     an effective research tool.
   chronic and complex health care provision and management, aged                                                                                                     Extra requirements:
   care, wound management and delivery of health care in a variety                                                                                                    Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must telephone
   of settings to clients from culturally diverse backgrounds.                                                                                                        1300 468 233 to book, by 29 October. Applicants must attend in
                                                                                                                                                                      November.

                                                                          CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
192 | VTAC Guide 2012                                              KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
                                                                                                                                              Grenadi School of Design
                                                              Established in 1995 Grenadi School of Design is a specialist design         Advanced Diploma courses. The school is a member of the Australian
                                                              college where design is not just a career choice but rather a way of        Council for Private Education and Training and is an Adobe Certified
                                                              life. Grenadi provides qualifications up to Advanced Diploma level that     Training Provider. Grenadi is Austudy approved and also a registered
                                                              are Government accredited. In addition, Grenadi is the only Australian      CRICOS Institute for overseas students (CRICOS code 02212E).
                                                              design school accredited to provide the exclusive and internationally       Design is creative and many students have an interest in fashion, beauty
                                                              sought after City & Guilds qualifications. With these qualifications        and similar areas. As such Grenadi School of Design has established
                                                              Grenadi really does open the doors to a world of design opportunities.      a boutique campus named Olivié School of Beauty offering courses in
                                                              So if you’re ready to take on the challenge of finding innovative design    Beauty Therapy. This school operates from a separate focussed campus
                                                              solutions, to face the risk of standing out in the crowd, to be pushed to   and is independent of the Design campus. The philosophy of small
                                                              explore and discover talents you didn’t know you had – you’re ready for     classes and industry professional teachers is fundamental to all Grenadi
                                                              a course at Grenadi School of Design.                                       campuses.
                                                              At Grenadi, you learn from friendly, supportive, industry-trained and
                                                              experienced tutors – people who know the industry for which you are         Minimum tertiary entrance requirements
                                                              aiming, and who are committed to your success. Your course is based         See page 7.
                                                              on practical, hands-on training, with the latest versions of industry-
                                                              standard software and current technologies to support your new              Student services
                                                              knowledge base and enable you to move straight into your chosen             Grenadi School of Design provides expert services in all aspects of
                                                              industry, confidently and well prepared.                                    student education and employment. Services include counseling, career
                                                              But it’s not just about learning the latest software or knowing how to      advice and planning, along with unlimited facility access. The Grenadi
                                                              handle the fastest computers, or even getting a qualification to say        Job Bank Register actively promotes students to prospective employers
                                                              you’ve done all that – at Grenadi School of Design you will have gained     giving students lifetime access to jobs and opportunities presented
  Campus location and contacts                                so much more. You will have experienced educational excellence, you’ll      exclusively through Grenadi only for Grenadi students. Students
                                                              know and understand your chosen industry and will have already begun        have life time hosting of their digital CV and folio of work on www.
Melbourne Campus
                                                              to form a network of contacts that will lead you to a real job when         designerpoint.com.au
Level 2, 253 Lonsdale Street, Melbourne Vic 3000
                                                              you graduate. The majority of Grenadi students obtain employment
                                                              during their training with almost all the remaining students obtaining      Further information
Bairnsdale Campus
                                                              employment immediately after graduating.                                    Interested students are encouraged to come in and visit the college and
8 Pearson Street, Bairnsdale, Vic, 3875
                                                              Grenadi courses are not about “fitting square pegs into round holes”.       meet teachers, students and support staff and inspect student work.
                                                              Our small classes (on average less than ten) ensure students get quality    The school runs regular information sessions. Dates can be obtained by
Postal Address                                                                                                                            calling the college or by visiting www.graphicschool.com.au
Level 2, 253 Lonsdale Street, Melbourne, Vic, 3000            individual attention – you are always a person not a student number.
                                                              You are encouraged to explore your own creativity, while you learn the
Telephone: (03) 9663 0001
                                                              skills and techniques to develop your own style. Your work will stand out
                                                                                                                                          Mid Year Entry
Fax: (03) 9663 0002                                           from the mainstream, giving you an essential competitive edge to enter      Grenadi accepts applications to enrol and commence studies mid year.
Email: enquiries@grenadi.vic.edu.au                           the design industry.                                                        For more information visit www.graphicschool.com.au or telephone
Bairnsdale Telephone: (03) 5152 7000                                                                                                      the office.
                                                              Grenadi School of Design is a privately registered education provider,
                                                              established in 1995, offering certificate to Advanced Diploma level         Part Time & Online Courses
www.grenadi.vic.edu.au                                        courses in a wide range of graphic design, web design, multimedia and
                                                              related subject areas. Grenadi School of Design is registered to provide    Students are not able to apply for part time and online courses through
  Open days:                                                  VET FEE HELP through the Australian Government for Diploma and              VTAC. For more information on studying design part time (evening) or
                                                                                                                                          online visit www.graphicschool.com.au or telephone the office.
14 August 2011 (Open Day)
27 September 2011 (Information Evening)
18 October 2011 (Information Evening)
                                                              Courses available through VTAC
22 November 2011 (Information Evening)
13 December 2011 (Information Evening)                        n Advertising and Graphic Design                                                 About the course: This course is designed to produce graduates
                                                                                                                                               with an in-depth knowledge of commercial practices in Graphic
                                                                                                                                               Design and Advertising industries. Broadening studies in
Bairnsdale Campus                                                  Grenadi, Bairnsdale                                                         business management and professional practice will enable the
20 August 2011 (Open Day)                                           97152 (DFP)                                                                graduate to work in a supervisory or self employed capacity.
17 November 2011 (Information Evening)                                                                                                         Students study in small focused classes (average class size 10)
                                                                   » Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Desktop
                                                                     Publishing): FT0.5                                                        with industry professionals as teachers. Students will complete
  Semester dates:                                                  » Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia):                briefs, presentations and exhibitions resulting in a folio of work to
                                                                     FT1                                                                       position the student for a career as a Graphic Design Professional.
Semester 1: 5 March 2012                                                                                                                       This course will equip the student through development of
                                                                   » Certificate IV in Design: FT1
Semester 2: 23 July 2012                                                                                                                       drawing, photography, computer skills, design studio, multimedia,
                                                                   » Advanced Diploma of Advertising and Graphic Design:
                                                                                                                                               webdesign, concepts, experimentation and the use of various
                                                                     FT2 PT4
  Fees:                                                                                                                                        forms of traditional and future media. Student work on industry
                                                                                                                                               developed briefs with client interaction incorporating constraints
                                                                   Grenadi, Melbourne                                                          such as client needs and timelines, promotional strategies, visual
For further information about fees for these courses go to:
                                                                    97322 (DFP), 97323 (IFP)                                                   presentation and merchandising and environmental issues.
http://www.graphicschool.com.au
                                                                   » Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Desktop                      Major studies: Advertising design, Animation, Branding and
                                                                     Publishing): FT0.5                                                        identity design, Colour management (printing), Communication
                                                                   » Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia):                design, Computer animation, Computer graphics, Computer Skills,
                                                                     FT1                                                                       Design history, Design Studio, Drawing and illustration, Graphic
                                                                   » Certificate IV in Design: FT1                                             design, Internet and multimedia, Marketing, Multimedia design,
                                                                   » Advanced Diploma of Advertising and Graphic Design:
                                                                     FT2 PT4

                                                                                                                            Institutional and Course Information | 193
n Higher Education qualification                          n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                             n Other Graduates

   Package design, Page layout (electronic publishing), Photography,           in the areas in which they teach. As part of the course students will                Interview: Applicants will be asked to present a folio of artwork.
   Pre-press, Publishing (print), Typography, Visual communication,            gain access to the mentoring program which exposes them to a                         This may be in any discipline such as drawing or photography or
   Web design.                                                                 range of mentors such as lawyers, accountants, financial advisers,                   can be a combination. Interviews are conducted between mid-
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                           bankers franchise professionals, retail operators and other business                 October and the end of December.
                                                                               men and women. This mentoring program is available for life,
   Selection mode: Form, folio, interview. See Extra requirements
                                                                               providing unique support to students after course completion.
   for specifics.
                                                                               Major studies: Administration, Advertising, Advertising
   Extra requirements:
                                                                               campaigns, Advertising concept development, Advertising design,
   Form: Applicants must complete a supplementary information                  Advertising marketing, Advertising media planning, Document
   form (www.grenadi.vic.edu.au) to arrange for an interview.                  design and development, Document management, Document
   Interview: Applicants will be asked to present a folio of artwork.          production, Human resource development, Human resource
   This may be in any discipline such as drawing or photography or             management, Management, Media, Media and communication,
   can be a combination. Interviews are conducted between mid-                 Meeting and event management, Professional practice and
   October and the end of December.                                            reflection, Risk analysis and management.
                                                                               Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
n Beauty Therapy                                                               Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
                                                                               specifics.
   Grenadi, Bairnsdale                                                         Extra requirements:
   97192 (DFP)                                                                 Form: Applicants must complete a supplementary information
   » Certificate II in Nail Technology: FT0.25                                 form (www.grenadi.vic.edu.au) to arrange for an interview.
   » Certificate II in Retail Make-up and Skin Care: FT0.25                    Interview: Interviews are conducted between mid-October and the
                                                                               end of December.
   » Diploma of Beauty Therapy: FT1
   About the course: The course combines practical skills with
   theoretical delivery to produce graduates who are able to provide     n Design
   quality services within the beauty and spa industry. Students
   study nail services, lash/ brow treatments, nutrition, make-up,             Grenadi, Bairnsdale
   waxing, facials, massage and body treatments, spa therapies,
                                                                                97142 (DFP)
   aromatherapy, stone therapy and Indian head massage. Graduates
   work in salons, day spas, resorts and on luxury cruise ships. The           » Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Desktop
   course offers business units giving confidence to those graduates             Publishing): FT0.5
   seeking to successfully run their own business. Students benefit            » Certificate IV in Design: FT1
   from small classes in a modern, up to date facility. Teachers are
   industry professionals with extensive experience and a desire to            Grenadi, Melbourne
   help students achieve rewarding employment upon graduation.                  97332 (DFP), 97333 (IFP)
   Students receive a professional tunic, linen, a make-up brush kit
   and an extensive manicure and pedicare kit. Community day spas
                                                                               » Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Desktop
   are run for students to practice skills on a wide range of people,
                                                                                 Publishing): FT0.5
   ensuring graduates are well prepared upon graduation.                       » Certificate IV in Design: FT1
   Major studies: Aromatherapy, Beauty Professional and Business               About the course: This course is designed to equip students for
   Practice, Body Massage and Treatments, Body Structures and                  a career in the Graphic Design industry. Students study in small
   Skin Biology, Cosmetic Compositions, Facial Treatments, Healthy             focused classes (average class size 10) with industry professionals
   Nutrition Options, Indian Head Massage, Lash and Eyebrow                    as teachers. Over the duration of the course students will complete
   treatments, Make-up Studies, Manicure and Pedicare Services, Spa            various briefs, presentations and exhibitions resulting in a folio
   Therapies, Stone Therapy, Waxing Treatments.                                of work to position the student for a career as a Graphic Design
                                                                               Professional.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                               This course will equip the student through development of
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.            design studio, drawing, photography, computer skills, concepts,
   Extra requirements:                                                         experimentation and the use of various forms of media. Student
   Form: Applicants must complete a supplementary information                  work on industry developed briefs with client interaction
   form (www.grenadi.vic.edu.au) to arrange for an interview.                  incorporating constraints such as client needs and timelines,
   Interview: Interviews are conducted between mid-October and the             promotional strategies, visual presentation and merchandising and
   end of December.                                                            environmental issues.
                                                                               Major studies: Branding and identity design, Colour studies,
n Business                                                                     Communication design, Design history, Digital art and design,
                                                                               Digital photography, Drawing and illustration, Graphic design,
                                                                               Occupational health and safety, Package design, Pre-press,
   Grenadi, Bairnsdale                                                         Professional practice, Typography, Visual communication.
   97162 (DFP)                                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   » Diploma of Business: FT1                                                  Selection mode: Interview, folio. See Extra requirements for
   About the course: This course provides a professional education             specifics.
   in a range of business and commerce disciplines. The course is              Extra requirements:
   entrepreneurial in nature, focusing on assisting students gain
   a successful career in business (private and public). Students              Form: Applicants must complete a supplementary information
   will develop the capacity to integrate knowledge and practical              form (www.grenadi.vic.edu.au) to arrange for an interview.
   experience from across a range of disciplines to create innovative
   solutions in small and large organizational settings. Classes are
   small and interactive with teachers who have practical experience

                                                                        CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
194 | VTAC Guide 2012                                             KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
                                                                                                                                                                                 Holmes Institute
                                                                         Holmes Institute has been a leading provider of business education            Student services
                                                                         and training at tertiary level since 1963. Thousands of successful
                                                                                                                                                       Student advisers are available to provide guidance and support
                                                                         graduates are testament to Holmes commitment to quality and student
                                                                                                                                                       for students in a variety of areas: study skills, written and spoken
                                                                         support. Holmes graduates around the world are enjoying rewarding
                                                                                                                                                       English, computer operation, research skills, examination techniques,
                                                                         careers or have utilised their qualification as a pathway to further study.
                                                                                                                                                       preparation of curriculum vitae and employment advice and assistance.
                                                                         With programs from Certificate to Masters, the Holmes philosophy of
                                                                         training focuses on a balance between theory and practice. Courses            Course Fees
                                                                         are developed in conjunction with industry bodies and experts in the          Fees vary in accordance with each course. Please contact our admissions
                                                                         relevant fields. The emphasis of all Holmes programs is on the relevance      office or www.holmes.edu.au for further details. Eligible students may
                                                                         in today’s changing business world, developing the skills required by         receive FEE HELP for the Bachelor programs.
                                                                         employers or as a pathway to further advanced training.
                                                                         Students learn in a modern city based campus where the focus is on the        Later year/Mid year entry
                                                                         individual. All Holmes programs offer students the opportunity to make
                                                                         a smooth transition to the business world or further study.
                                                                                                                                                       Direct Application
                                                                                                                                                       Bachelor programs have direct applications for July and November
                                                                         The Holmes pathway offers eligible students entry into a range                semesters. Diploma programs have a range of additional intake dates
                                                                         of qualifications to suit their study goals: Certificate, Diploma,            that may not correspond with VTAC application dates. Please see www.
                                                                         Bachelor, Masters.                                                            holmes.edu.au for intake dates available for direct application.
                                                                         Minimum tertiary entrance requirements
                                                                         See page 7.
  Campus location and contacts
Melbourne campus
(opposite Parliament Station)                                            Courses available through VTAC
185 Spring Street
Melbourne VIC 3000
                                                                                                                                                            Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, possible interview. NONY12: ATAR
                                                                         n Accounting                                                                       or academic record, GPA, interview, form. See extra requirements
Telephone: (03) 9662 2055                                                                                                                                   for specifics.
Fax: (03) 9662 2083                                                           Holmes Inst, City                                                             Extra requirements:
email: info@holmes.edu.au                                                      89772 (DFP), 89773 (IFP)
www.holmes.edu.au                                                                                                                                           NONY12
                                                                              » Diploma of Accounting: FT 40 weeks                                          Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9662 2055 to book their
                                                                              About the course: The pathway to the Diploma of Accounting                    interview. Late applicants must telephone before applying.
  Open days:                                                                  includes competencies from the Certificate III in Financial Services
                                                                              (Accounts/Clerical). The Holmes accounting course prepares
Please contact Holmes Institute directly to arrange a campus visit.
                                                                              students to perform assistant accounting duties for small to large       n Commercial Cookery
                                                                              businesses.
  Semester dates:                                                             Major studies: Accounting, Accounting (small business),                       Holmes Inst, City
                                                                              Business (accounting), Business (taxation), Business computing,               89782 (DFP), 89783 (IFP)
These are institutional intakes dates and may not correspond with VTAC        Business statistics, Computer accounting, Computer applications,
application dates.                                                                                                                                          » Certificate IV in Hospitality (Commercial Cookery): FT1
                                                                              Law (commercial), Law (contract), Law (taxation), Management
                                                                                                                                                            » Diploma of Hospitality: FT1
                                                                              (financial), Mathematics/statistics.
Bachelor Programs:                                                                                                                                          About the course: Designed for people seeking entry into
                                                                              Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                             professional cookery in a variety of commercial applications
21 March, 18 July, 14 November
                                                                              Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.              such hotels, restaurants, motels, conference centres and food
                                                                              Extra requirements:                                                           manufacturers in operational management, staff supervisory roles
Diploma Programs:                                                                                                                                           or owner operators. The program provide extensive cookery and
                                                                              Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9662 2055 to book an
7 February, 14 March, 26 April, 30 May, 18 July, 22 August, 3 October,                                                                                      restaurant experience. Students will be able articulate into the
                                                                              interview. Late applicants must telephone before applying.
7 November                                                                                                                                                  Holmes Diploma of Hospitality.
                                                                                                                                                            Major studies: Administration, Cookery, Food handling, Food
                                                                         n Business (Degree)
  Fees:                                                                                                                                                     preservation and processing, Food safety and regulation, Food
                                                                                                                                                            science and nutrition, Health and safety, Hygiene, Leadership,
For further information about fees for these courses go to:                   Holmes Inst, City                                                             Restaurant operations.
http://www.holmes.edu.au/diploma/fees-and-start-dates-                         89792 (DFP), 89793 (IFP)                                                     Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
diploma                                                                       » Bachelor of Business (Marketing, Management,                                Selection mode: ATAR, interview. See Extra requirements for
                                                                                International Business): FT3                                                specifics.
For further information about Bachelor fees for these courses go to:          About the course: This course aims to develop highly skilled and              Extra requirements:
http://www.holmes.edu.au/undergraduate/fees-and-start-                        employable graduates who have a well balanced combination                     Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9662 2055 to book their
dates-degree-programs                                                         of core business skills combined with specialist marketing,                   interview. Late applicants must telephone before applying.
                                                                              management or international business knowledge.
For further information about Masters fees for these courses go to:           Four credit points per semester for three years. Total 24 credit
http://www.holmes.edu.au/postgraduate/fees-and-start-                         points. Accelerated program includes up to 4 credit points per
dates-degree-postgraduate                                                     summer semester, possible duration two years.
                                                                              Major studies: Accounting, Human resource management,
                                                                              International business, Management, Marketing.
                                                                              Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.



                                                                                                                                        Institutional and Course Information | 195
n Higher Education qualification                          n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                              n Other Graduates

n Hospitality                                                             n Management

   Holmes Inst, City                                                            Holmes Inst, City
   89762 (DFP), 89763 (IFP)                                                      89752 (DFP), 89753 (IFP)
   » Diploma of Hospitality: FT 40 weeks PTA                                    » Diploma of Management: FT 40 weeks
   About the course: Prepares students for employment in                        About the course: This course aims to equip students with
   the operational, supervisory and management aspects of                       management skills and qualifications. They also aim to develop
   the hospitality industry. This course provides students with a               an innovative and entrepreneurial approach to management.
   theoretical and practical training in the hospitality industry. The          Preparation of students with the training to manage a business
   program has been designed to offer an even spread of front office,           unit with an organisation, become a team leader or manage
   business administration, workplace relations, restaurant and wine            their own business. Provides a broad range of vocational business
   units providing students with the necessary skills and knowledge             administration and management skills for those aspiring to a
   to gain employment in a wide variety of hospitality organisations            management role. Successful graduates will gain direct entry into
   or to articulate into the Holmes Institute Bachelor of Business.             the Holmes Institute Bachelor of Business.
   Major studies: Accommodation management, Bar management,                     Major studies: Business practice, Change management,
   Bookkeeping, Computer applications, Event and tournament                     Communication systems, Communications, Computer accounting,
   management, Food and beverage management, Food and                           Computer applications, Economics, Management (finance),
   beverage production, Food and beverage service, Food handling,               Management (financial), Management accounting, Management
   Food quality management, Food safety and regulation, Health and              information systems, Marketing, Organisational behaviour,
   safety, Hospitality management, Hospitality sales and marketing,             Organisations and management.
   Hotel operations management, Housekeeping, Restaurant                        Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   operations, Tourism (wine).
                                                                                Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                Extra requirements:
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
                                                                                Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9662 2055 to book an
   Extra requirements:                                                          interview. Late applicants must telephone before applying.
   Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9662 2055 to book an
   interview. Late applicants must telephone before applying.             n Professional Accounting (Degree)
n Information Technology                                                        Holmes Inst, City
                                                                                 89642 (DFP), 89643 (IFP)
   Holmes Inst, City
                                                                                » Bachelor of Professional Accounting: FT3
   89722 (DFP), 89723 (IFP)                                                     About the course: This course aims to provide professional
   » Diploma of Information Technology: FT 40 weeks PTA                         education in business and accounting principles and practice. It is
   About the course: Provides a breadth of knowledge and skills                 designed for those wishing to become accounting professionals
   in the information technology industry as well as the opportunity            with a strong emphasis on developing analytical skills. Applicants
   for students to specialise and attain a high level of expertise in           may receive up to twelve credits for relevant vocational or tertiary
   specific areas. The program has been developed in provide training           studies and other qualifications on a case by case basis. This degree
   in computer programming and software development in order                    is accredited for associate membership by the ICAA, CPA Australia
   to determine end user needs, scope projects, develop programs,               and NIA.
   document and provide completed projects for clients. The pathway             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   to the Diploma incorporates competencies from the Certificate IV.
                                                                                Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, interview. NONY12: ATAR, academic
   Please contact the institute for pathway advice.
                                                                                record, interview, GPA. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   Major studies: Internet and World Wide Web, Internet
                                                                                Extra requirements:
   technology, Network computing, Networks and data
   communications, Networks and database concepts, Object-                      Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9662 2055 to book. Late
   oriented design, Object-oriented modelling, Object-oriented                  applicants must telephone before applying.
   programming, Object-oriented software engineering,
   Programming, Programming (C), Programming (C++),
   Programming (Internet), Programming (Java), Programming
   (Visual Basic), Software applications, Software development,
   Software engineering, Software systems.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   Extra requirements:
   Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9662 2055 to book an
   interview. Late applicants must telephone before applying.




                                                                         CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
196 | VTAC Guide 2012                                              KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
                                                                                                                                                                                     Holmesglen
                                                              Holmesglen provides students with an education for the new world.            nothing new at Holmesglen. Our staff and students have been successful
                                                              Students are trained with the latest industry equipment and get job          in many major awards over the years, and in 2010 we had the following
                                                              placements -so they’re work ready when they graduate. Our teachers are       successes – just to name a few!
                                                              from industry – so they know what they’re talking about. Our staff include   •	   Victorian Tourism Awards, Winner, Hospitality & Tourism Award 2010
                                                              advertising gurus, award winning chefs, actors and health professionals.
                                                                                                                                           •	   Winner of the Vocational Student of the Year Award, Michael Hogan
                                                              Because industry knows what skills are needed in the work place, our
                                                                                                                                           •	   Graduate finalist in Melbourne Design Awards, David Fajardo
                                                              courses are focused on these needs. In addition our degree programs
                                                              are developed in conjunction with industry and many are accredited by        •	   Victoria State AUS-TAFE Culinary Challenge Best Overall Apprentice,
                                                              professional peak bodies.                                                         Elizabeth Payne
                                                              At Holmesglen, we’re about more than just text books! As well as job         •	   Furniture Design Award at the 2010 Furnitex Exhibition, Iman Shafaghi
                                                              placements, Holmesglen encourages and assists students to enter              In addition, we hold an annual Awards Festival in May to celebrate,
                                                              industry competitions – and because they have real skills, they win too!     recognise and reward outstanding student achievement and excellence.

                                                              What we offer:                                                               Opportunities for the new world
                                                              We over 600 programs across 10 study areas, including degrees,               Get involved in an internship, traineeship and industry events. You
                                                              advanced diplomas, diplomas, certificates, pre-apprenticeships,              also have the opportunity to work with real clients, attend networking
                                                              apprenticeships, graduate certificates, short courses and Vocational         events, join student clubs and more!
                                                              Colleges, offering an alternative to VCE.                                    Examples of our student involvement include:
                                                              Study areas:                                                                 •	   Bricklaying students undertook restoration work on the Puffing
                                                                                                                                                Billy track.
                                                              •	   Arts & Design
  Campus location and contacts                                •	   Building & Construction
                                                                                                                                           •	   Advertising students worked with real clients, like Victoria Police,
                                                                                                                                                to produce real campaigns.
Chadstone campus                                              •	   Business & Finance                                                      •	   Tourism students held an information session about marketing strategies
Cnr Batesford and Warrigal Roads                              •	   Education & Languages                                                        to assist Marysville businesses after the devastating bushfires.
Holmesglen VIC 3148                                           •	   Engineering & Technology                                                •	   Our TV and Radio students wrote, produced and filmed a television
                                                              •	   Fitness & Wellbeing                                                          show called HIT TV that was broadcast on Channel 31.
City campus
332 St Kilda Road                                             •	   Furnishing & Decoration                                                 Minimum tertiary entrance requirements
Melbourne VIC 3004                                            •	   Health & Social Sciences                                                See page 7.
                                                              •	   Horticulture & Environment
Moorabbin campus                                              •	   Hospitality & Tourism                                                   Principles of Selection
488 South Road                                                Students can also benefit from flexible delivery with many courses           Prerequisites and selection processes vary between courses across
Moorabbin VIC 3189                                            offered part time, full time, weekend, evening and off campus.               all study areas, and may include consideration of ATAR, age, previous
                                                                                                                                           qualifications, folio presentation, etc. Please refer to individual course
                                                              Skills for the new world                                                     information for entry requirements.
Waverley campus
595 Waverley Road                                             Want job ready skills? It’s time to open your eyes to a different kind of
                                                              learning. At Holmesglen you won’t just complete the important theory         Dual awards
Glen Waverley VIC 3150
                                                              based work, but you will also gain hands on, practical experience in         Holmesglen offers a number of dual award programs, in which two VET
                                                              the career of your choice. Once completing your study, you will be           qualifications may be undertaken at the same time. These are offered in
Telephone: 1300 MY FUTURE (1300 693 888)                      confident and well prepared to step out in the workforce and take on the     the following areas:
email: info@holmesglen.edu.au                                 challenges thrown your way.                                                  •	   Business & Finance
Web: www.holmesglen.edu.au
                                                              Teachers in the new world                                                    •	   Fitness & Wellbeing
                                                              Teachers at Holmesglen really care; they actually know your name! Many       •	   Hospitality & Tourism
  Open days:                                                  teachers have come from industry so they truly know their stuff, and         Please refer to individual course information for further details.
Chadstone, Moorabbin and Waverley campus:                     are able to pass their personal experiences on to their students. Because
Saturday 20 August 10am – 3pm
                                                              many of our teachers are still working in the industry, students often       Student services
                                                              have the chance to network with potential employers.                         Holmesglen offers a range of student services including: student
                                                              Industry matters                                                             counselling; welfare assistance; referral services; job seeking skills;
  Semester dates:                                                                                                                          learning commons (library facilities); fitness centre; language support;
                                                              Our courses are designed to meet industry trends and needs. No matter        career guidance; recreational activities; medical services; bookshop;
Semester 1: February – June                                   what you choose to study, you will have the opportunity to participate in    childcare centre; open access to computers; and a range of student clubs.
Semester 2: July – November                                   relevant industry learning. Networking opportunities are made available
(Commencement dates will vary between courses)                to our students – in many cases the industry groups come to you in           Course fees
                                                              class. Think of it as us giving you the keys to unlock a great career!
                                                                                                                                           An important change affecting students is the schedule of fees for new
  Fees:                                                       New world classrooms                                                         enrolments in all courses. Some fees have gone down in price and some
                                                                                                                                           fees have gone up.
                                                              State-of-the-art facilities feature across all three campuses. Investing
For further information about fees for these courses go to:   in facilities that add value to students’ experiences has been one of        If you are eligible for a Government Subsidised Place, the Government
www.holmesglen.edu.au/fees                                    our long term goals. To prepare for your career, you need the right          still pays most of the cost of your course and you will pay some fees as
                                                              supporting materials – and we have them.                                     previously, according to the new fee schedule.
                                                                                                                                           If you are not eligible for a Government Subsidised Place, you may still
                                                              Healthy competition                                                          undertake the course of your choice but will have to pay on a fee-for-
                                                              Being the best you can be is important, that’s why learning by doing         service basis, which means you pay the full cost for your training.
                                                              is important at Holmesglen. Our students have tangible project work,         Fees will vary depending on your age, any qualification you already have
                                                              so they are able to enter great work into major competitions and             and the course you want to do. You should check the Eligibility Guide
                                                              prestigious award categories. Hearing about yet another award win is         and the Fees and Charges information on our website.


                                                                                                                             Institutional and Course Information | 197
n Higher Education qualification                             n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                              n Other Graduates

Part-time courses                                                            Mid-year entry                                                                       Further information
Part time study and flexible delivery are available for some courses         Some courses offer mid year entry (July), through direct application to              To find out about all the courses that Holmesglen has on offer, visit
through direct application to Holmesglen. Visit individual course pages      Holmesglen. Visit individual course pages on the Holmesglen website for              www.holmesglen.edu.au
on the Holmesglen website for detailed information or call 1300 MY           detailed information or call 1300 MY FUTURE.
FUTURE.


Courses available through VTAC
                                                                                   Graduates from the Advanced Diploma are guaranteed direct entry
n Accounting                                                                       into the Accounting Degree at Holmesglen which is accredited with              n Accounting (Degree)
                                                                                   the CPA. Students will receive up to 1.5 years advance standing.
     Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                         This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level                  Holmesglen, Chadstone
      61201 (VGF), 61204 (Fee type determined by provider)                         qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic                    61062 (DFP)
                                                                                   progress, to the higher qualification levels.                                        » Bachelor of Business (Accounting): FT3
     » Certificate IV in Accounting: FT1
                                                                                   Major studies: Accounting, Accounting (small business),                              About the course: Holmesglen’s Bachelor of Business
     » Diploma of Accounting: FT1.5
                                                                                   Auditing, Bookkeeping, Budgeting, Company accounting,                                (Accounting) has been developed to provide individuals with the
     » Advanced Diploma of Accounting: FT2                                         Computer accounting, Financial accounting, Financial planning,                       opportunity to achieve an Accounting qualification through a
                                                                                   Forensic accounting, Law (business), Law (taxation), Management                      more practical and hands-on approach to learning. This program
     Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                         (financial), Taxation and auditing.                                                  has been recognised and accredited by the ICAA, CPA Australia
      66111 (VGF), 66114 (Fee type determined by provider)                         Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    and the IPA and provides a nationally recognised qualification
     » Certificate IV in Accounting: FT1                                           Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                     in accounting. Accountants are currently in demand in Australia
     » Diploma of Accounting: FT1.5                                                Extra requirements:                                                                  in both the public and private sectors with outstanding career
     » Advanced Diploma of Accounting: FT2                                                                                                                              opportunities available in a wide range of services and industries.
                                                                                   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
     About the course: This course provides students with training                 telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              The course is structured to provide a bachelor level degree
     in accounting skills to become qualified as assistant accountants                                                                                                  qualification, upon the completion of 24 subjects. This qualification
     and bookkeepers. The Advanced Diploma comprises the Diploma                                                                                                        comprises 21 core subjects and a selection of 3 electives from a
     of Accounting, Certificate IV in Accounting and Certificate III in                                                                                                 range of 9 elective subjects. After the completion of the first 16
     Accounts administration.                                                                                                                                           subjects, students are eligible to exit the course with the Associate
     Graduates from the Diploma are guarantee direct entry into the                                                                                                     degree in Business (Accounting).
     Accounting Degree at Holmesglen which is accredited with the                                                                                                       Major studies: Accounting, Accounting information systems,
     CPA. Students will receive up to one year advance standing.                                                                                                        Business (computing), Law (commercial), Law (corporate).




                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
198 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                 KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                      n Advertising                                                                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Screen and Media
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, interview. NONY12 Form, interview.                                                                                       form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can
   See Extra requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                also request the form by telephone (03) 9564 6254. Interview:
                                                                             Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                      Applicants must telephone (03) 9564 6254 to arrange an
   Extra requirements:                                                       66121 (VGF), 66124 (Fee type determined by provider)                       interview. Interviews are held in November and December.
   NONY12: Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor
                                                                             » Certificate IV in Advertising: FT0.5
   of Business Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.
   edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can also request the form by         » Diploma of Advertising: FT1                                           n Banking Services
   telephone (03) 9564 1648.                                                 » Advanced Diploma of Advertising: FT1.5
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by             About the course: This course provides students with knowledge             Holmesglen, Chadstone
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                   and skills to carry out the duties and tasks of an advertising             61901 (VGF), 61904 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                             coordinator, account executive or media planner. The Advanced
   Additional information: Graduates will be eligible for associate                                                                                     » Certificate IV in Banking Services: FT1
                                                                             Diploma of Advertising consists of the Diploma of Advertising and
   membership of CPA Australia, the Institute of Public Accountants                                                                                     » Diploma of Banking Services Management: FT1.5
                                                                             the Certificate IV of Business (Advertising). Students are given
   (IPA) and the Institute of Chartered Accountants Australia (ICAA).
                                                                             the opportunity to work on genuine projects within advertising             About the course: This course will appeal to students wanting
                                                                             agencies allowing them to develop practical skills in business             to work within the banking and retail financial services sectors.
n Administration                                                             development, creative development and management. Graduates                The course aims to develop workplace knowledge and skills in
                                                                             from the Advanced Diploma are guaranteed direct entry into the             customer/client service, retail financial services, para planning and
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                     Holmesglen business degree (Marketing Management) with up to               other financial services.
                                                                             one year advanced standing. This is a Pathway Program. You will be         The study pathway into the Diploma of Banking Services
   61241 (VGF), 61244 (Fee type determined by provider)                      enrolled in the lowest level qualification and will progress, subject      Management begins with the Certificate IV in Banking Services.
   » Certificate IV in Business Administration: FT1                          to satisfactory academic progress, to the higher qualification             Students who complete the Certificate IV in Banking Services are
   » Diploma of Business Administration: FT1.5                               levels.                                                                    eligible for ASIC-RG-146 Tier 11 recognition.
                                                                             Major studies: Advertising, Advertising communication,                     Graduates from this Diploma are guaranteed direct entry into
   Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                     Advertising concept development, Advertising marketing,                    a Holmesglen Business Degree with up to one year advanced
   66281 (VGF), 66284 (Fee type determined by provider)                      Advertising media planning, Advertising production, Advertising            standing.
                                                                             research, Copywriting, Marketing research, Sales marketing, Web
   » Certificate IV in Business Administration: FT1                                                                                                     This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level
                                                                             development.
   » Diploma of Business Administration: FT1.5 - CANCELLED                                                                                              qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic
                                                                             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          progress, to the higher qualification levels.
   About the course: This nationally recognised course benefits
   those seeking employment in an office environment. Students may           Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.           Major studies: Bank deposits, Bank deposits and products,
   be required to enrol in the Certificate III to complete prerequisite      Extra requirements:                                                        Banking and finance, Bookkeeping, Business, Business
   competencies.                                                             Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by              (computing), Business (law), Business (management), Business
   Holmesglen students receive hands-on training in the latest               telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                    statistics, Credit management, Debt recovery, Finance, Financial
   MS Office suite and learn current administrative practices in                                                                                        management, Financial services, Insurance, Personal financial
   a simulated office and/or a Virtual Enterprise. The course has                                                                                       planning, Securities.
                                                                          n Animation–Screen Production (Degree)
   a practical focus with the opportunity to participate in live                                                                                        Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   community projects and/or conferences.                                                                                                               Selection mode: ATAR, interview. See Extra requirements for
   Delivery is over 3 to 4 days per week and is via a supportive
                                                                             Holmesglen, Waverley                                                       specifics.
   classroom learning environment .                                          61282 (DFP)
                                                                                                                                                        Extra requirements:
   Graduates from the Diploma are guaranteed direct entry, with up           » Bachelor of Screen Production (Animation): FT3                           Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   to one year advanced standing into Holmesglen business degrees:           About the course: The Bachelor of Screen Production (Animation)            telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   Bachelor of Business Administration and Bachelor of Business              is a three year course which provides students with the skills
   (Executive Administration).                                               required for employment in animation related areas of the screen
                                                                             production industry. The course offers a blend of practical skills      n Building (Construction Management)
   This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level
   qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic         and theory. The course covers areas such as the history of film,          (Degree)
   progress, to the higher qualification levels.                             scripting and pre-production skills, production techniques and
                                                                             production roles, industry organisations and legal requirements            Holmesglen, Chadstone
   Major studies: Administration, Business (administration),
                                                                             of the industry, modelling, rigging and lighting, computer
   Database administration, Internet and World Wide Web, MYOB,
                                                                             editing techniques, and promotion of films. The course promotes            61732 (DFP)
   Office administration, Payroll, Project administration, Software                                                                                     » Bachelor of Construction Management and Economics:
                                                                             collaborative projects which provide the teamwork skills required
   applications, Spreadsheets and databases, Word processing.                                                                                             FT2+2 trimesters
                                                                             to work successfully in industry. This is a course with an emphasis
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                         on practical animation skills, but also provides substantial tuition       About the course: The Bachelor of Construction Management
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.          in business, theoretical awareness and story writing skills to             and Economics is a four year professional degree designed to
   Extra requirements:                                                       enhance the overall range of industry relevant content.                    meet the professional curriculum requirements for accreditation
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by             Major studies: Animation (2D), Animation (3D), Animation                   by the Australian Institute of Building and the Australian Institute
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                   (modelling), Animation and video editing, Audio production,                of Quantity Surveyors. The program covers the construction
                                                                             Cinema studies, Computer animation, Editing, Film and video,               management and quantity surveying fields of study which are
                                                                             Lighting, Production planning, Production processes, Screen and            generally considered to be a specialised management discipline
                                                                             media production, Scriptwriting, Sound recording and production,           and covers the construction and financial administration of
                                                                             Special effects, Video content creation, Video production.                 building projects through their life cycle. A Problem Based
                                                                             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          Learning delivery method is utilised and provides students with
                                                                                                                                                        the skills and knowledge needed to operate effectively and
                                                                             Selection mode: Pre-selection kit, interview. See Extra                    professionally as construction managers, project managers and
                                                                             requirements for specifics.                                                quantity surveyors.
                                                                             Extra requirements:                                                        Major studies: Building, Building (construction methods),
                                                                                                                                                        Building (economics), Building (estimating), Building (surveying),
                                                                                                                                                        Building contract administration, Building law and building
                                                                                                                                                        practice, Construction, Construction management.

                                                                                                                                                                                     Holmesglen | 199
n Higher Education qualification                              n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               n Other Graduates

   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                 Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                  n Business Administration (Degree)
   Selection mode: ATAR, interview, form. See extra requirements                     telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   for specifics.                                                                                                                                                         Holmesglen, Chadstone
   Extra requirements:                                                         n Building Surveying                                                                       61622 (DFP)
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor of
                                                                                                                                                                          » Bachelor of Business Administration: FT3
   Construction Management and Economics Supplementary                               Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                About the course: The Bachelor of Business Administration
   Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms).                         61021 (VGF), 61024 (Fee type determined by provider)                                is structured to equip students with a thorough understanding
   Applicants can also request the form by telephone: (03) 9564
   1741.                                                                             » Diploma of Building Surveying: FT1                                                 of each specialized business function including: business
                                                                                     About the course: Provides to students para-professional skills                      management, economics, finance, technology, marketing,
   Interview: (some applicants only), details will be provided by                                                                                                         business communications, statistics, business law and people
                                                                                     and knowledge for building inspection work and for surveying
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                                                                                                                management.
                                                                                     related to residential, industrial and commercial buildings. Project
                                                                                     based learning gives students the opportunity to develop their                       The final year of the degree includes applied projects in Strategic
n Building and Construction (Building)                                               technical and research skills in an environment of self paced                        Management, and Entrepreneurship and New Venture Creation
                                                                                     learning. This program may be run as an alternative Industry based                   that integrate multiple business disciplines, expose students to the
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                             pathway please contact HIT to obtain further information. The                        need for innovation and change management and ensure that a
                                                                                     course is also available as part-time.                                               students work is grounded in practical application to produce work
   61011 (VGF), 61014 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                     Major studies: Building, Building (construction methods),                            ready graduates.
   » Diploma of Building and Construction (Building): FT2                            Building (surveying), Building (technology), Building law and                        The range of electives will enable students to develop a broad
   About the course: The Diploma of Building and Construction                        building practice.                                                                   based business education and include public relations, professional
   (Building) provides an educational basis and practical training                                                                                                        sales, international business, business leadership, compliance and
                                                                                     Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   for a career at middle management level within the building and                                                                                                        risk management and customer relationship management.
   construction industry. The program provides para-professional                     Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                                          Major studies: Administration, Business (accounting), Business
   skills and knowledge needed to plan and coordinate the                            Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                                          (computing), Business (economics), Business (information
   construction of medium-rise residential and commercial buildings                  Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                        systems), Business (law), Business (management), Business
   including for example: monitoring, costing systems, scheduling,                   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              communications, Entrepreneurship, Human resource management,
   contractor selection, managing risk and quality assurance. Please
                                                                                                                                                                          International business, Marketing.
   note the Certificate IV in Building and Construction (Building) is
   not delivered as the first year of this course and is not an exit point.    n Building Surveying (Degree)                                                              Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Project based learning gives students the opportunity to develop                                                                                                       Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, interview. NONY12 Form, interview.
   their technical and research skills in an environment of self paced               Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                See Extra requirements for specifics.
   learning. The course is also available as part-time. Graduates may                 61742 (DFP)                                                                         Extra requirements:
   apply for direct articulation into the Holmesglen degree program                  » Bachelor of Building Surveying: FT2+2 trimesters                                   NONY12
   and will be eligible for credits towards Holmesglen’s Bachelor of                 About the course: The Bachelor of Building Surveying is a                            Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor of
   Applied Science (Built Environment).                                              four year professional course designed to meet the professional                      Business Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.
   Major studies: Building, Building (construction methods),                         accreditation requirements of the Australian Institute of Building                   edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can also request the form by
   Building (estimating), Building (law), Building (management),                     Surveyors. A Problem Based Learning (PBL) delivery method is                         telephone (03) 9564 1648.
   Building (technology), Building codes and standards (low rise),                   utilised and provides students with the skills and knowledge                         Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   Building codes and standards (medium rise), Building contract                     needed to operate effectively across a number of roles in the                        telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   administration, Building law and building practice, Building                      building and construction industry. The program incorporates
   regulations.                                                                                                                                                           Additional information: Applicants may receive up to eight
                                                                                     a syllabus and subject structure designed to demonstrate the
                                                                                                                                                                          exemptions for the successful completion of a Diploma and up to
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                 interrelationships involved in the building process that students
                                                                                                                                                                          twelve exemptions for the successful completion of an Advanced
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                  would expect to encounter in the building construction workplace.
                                                                                                                                                                          Diploma in a related area of study, or other relevant qualifications
                                                                                     Graduates will develop an in-depth technical knowledge in
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                    on a case-by-case basis. Applicants may apply for Recognition of
                                                                                     building surveying and will be able to operate independently as
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                                                                                                          Prior Learning (RPL) on a basis of work or life experience.
                                                                                     a professional within this field. Its strong vocational and building
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                           discipline focus will assist graduates in meeting the academic
                                                                                     requirements for membership of relevant professional bodies in                 n Ceramics
n Building Design                                                                    the building sector.
                                                                                     Major studies: Building, Building (construction methods),                            Holmesglen, Chadstone
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                             Building (economics), Building (estimating), Building (surveying),                   61081 (VGF), 61084 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                     Building contract administration, Building law and building
   61031 (VGF), 61034 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                                   » Diploma of Ceramics: FT2
                                                                                     practice, Construction, Construction management, Risk
   » Advanced Diploma of Building Design (Architectural):                            management.                                                                          About the course: The Diploma of Ceramics is a specialized
     FT2.5                                                                           Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                                                                                                          course that prepares individuals for a career in the ceramics field.
   About the course: Provides to participants para-professional                                                                                                           The course delivery is designed to develop a sound knowledge of
                                                                                     Selection mode: ATAR, interview, form. See extra requirements                        ceramic techniques and production skills as well as a proficiency in
   skills and knowledge needed for the design and CAD drafting of
                                                                                     for specifics.                                                                       design. Traditional and contemporary methods and philosophies
   residential, industrial and commercial buildings. Project based
   learning gives students the opportunity to develop their technical                Extra requirements:                                                                  are taught. Together with the core units of ceramics are a range
   and research skills in an environment of self paced learning. The                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor of Building                     of subjects that provide fundamental depth and breadth to the
   course is also available as part-time.                                            Surveying Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.                            course e.g. drawing, research & critical analysis, develop self as
                                                                                     edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can also request the form                       an artist, OH & S and marketing. Students work in a professional
   Major studies: Architecture, Building, Building (construction
                                                                                     by telephone: (03) 9564 1741. Interview (some applicants only),                      studio environment with highly experienced and supportive staff
   methods), Building (design), Building (technology), Computer-
                                                                                     details will be provided by telephone or mail to the applicants                      and exhibit their work at the end of the course. Graduates of the
   aided drafting (CAD).
                                                                                     required to attend.                                                                  program are equipped to establish themselves as practicing artists
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                                      or to work in the industry. The course also prepares students for
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                                                                                                       further study at a tertiary level.
   Extra requirements:

                                                                              CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
200 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                  KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Major studies: Ceramics, Design, Drawing, Production planning,             and Facilitation, Indigenous Land Management, Lands, Parks and       n Early Childhood Education (Degree)
   Production processes.                                                      Wildlife, Natural Area Restoration and Management, Weed and
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                          Vertebrae Pest Management.
                                                                                                                                                      Holmesglen, Waverley
   Selection mode: Folio, interview, form. See Extra requirements             This course is currently under review so course content or award
                                                                              titles may change.
                                                                                                                                                      61781 (CSP)
   for specifics.
                                                                              Whilst studying within the Conservation and Land Management             » Bachelor of Early Childhood Education: FT4
   Extra requirements:
                                                                              program you have the opportunity to complete four (4) additional        About the course: This contemporary four-year Bachelor of
   Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must telephone (03)                                                                                   Early Childhood Education prepares students as specialists in the
                                                                              specialist ‘Sustainability’ units which are offered through online
   9564 1602 to book by 5 November. Applicants must attend in                                                                                         education of children from birth to eight years. Graduates will be
                                                                              delivery. Upon successful completion of these units you will be
   December. Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Ceramics                                                                                     qualified early childhood teachers, eligible to apply for Victorian
                                                                              entitled to the award of Diploma of Sustainability.
   Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/                                                                                             Institute of Teaching registration and able to seek employment as
   applicationforms) by 23 December.                                          Major studies: Aquatic science, Behavioural change for
                                                                                                                                                      primary school teachers (specialising in early years programs), and
                                                                              sustainability, Coastal management, Conservation biology/
                                                                                                                                                      early childhood educators within licensed early childhood settings
                                                                              ecology, Conservation management (revegetation), Ecological
n Community Services Work                                                     studies, Ecotourism, Environmental management, Environmental
                                                                                                                                                      in Victoria.
                                                                              science, Fire management, Forest ecology, Freshwater ecosystems,        Holmesglen students learn through a combination of on-campus
   Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                      Land and water management, Mapping systems, Marine                      theory and well supported practicum experiences. Students
                                                                              environment, Natural resource management, Parks and wildlife            attend practicum within every semester of the course and across a
   66501 (VGF), 66504 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                              reserve management, Soil science, Sustainability concepts,              range of early childhood education areas including kindergartens,
   » Diploma of Community Services Work: FT2                                  Sustainable business practices, Sustainable production and              preschools and primary schools.
                                                                              consumption, Vegetation and wildlife management, Wildlife               Major studies: Early childhood education.
   Holmesglen, Waverley                                                       conservation and ecology.                                               Prerequisites: Units 1 and 2–general mathematics or
   61791 (VGF), 61794 (Fee type determined by provider)                       Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                       mathematical methods or Units 3 and 4–mathematica (any). Units
   » Diploma of Community Services Work: FT2                                  Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for             3 and 4– a study score of 25 in English (any).
   About the course: This course is for designed for people                   specifics.                                                              Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and interview. NONY12: Form,
   interested in working in the community services sector. Students                                                                                   interview and STAT (see page 36). See Extra requirements for
                                                                              Extra requirements:
   are exposed to a range of community services areas and are trained                                                                                 specifics.
   to work with a variety of clients in a range of situations. Graduates      Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                              page 21).                                                               Extra requirements:
   occupations may include: Community worker, Welfare Worker, Case
   Worker, Coordinator or Manager.                                            Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by           CY12: Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
                                                                              telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                 telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   Major studies: Advocacy, Community studies, Occupational
   health and safety, Sociology, Welfare studies, Written                     Additional information: It is recommended that applicants               NONY12: Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor
   communication.                                                             attend an information session on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and         of Bachelor of Early Childhood Education application form (www.
                                                                              Change of Preference information session on 13 December at              holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms) by 23 December.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                              6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 6391.                     Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                                                                                        telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   specifics.
                                                                            n Design                                                                  Test: Applicants must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                36).
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Community                                                                                              SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
   Services Work application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/                     Holmesglen, Chadstone
   applicationforms).                                                          61341 (VGF), 61344 (Fee type determined by provider)                   WWC check: Students must hold a valid Working With Children
                                                                                                                                                      card before undertaking placements.
   Interview: Details will be provided by telephone or mail. Applicants       » Certificate IV in Design: FT1
   must attend in November, December or January.                              About the course: The course provides a general grounding
   Additional information: Applicants are strongly advised to                 and the opportunity to produce a folio of work that meets the        n Engineering–Mechanical/Manufacturing
   attend the information session to be held at the Moorabbin                 requirements of entry to a wide variety of Art and Design courses.
   campus on 11 October between 6.30-8.30 pm, or at the Waverley              Students are introduced to the design principles and elements           Holmesglen, Moorabbin
   campus on 13 October between 6.30-8.30 pm.                                 through implementation of the design process. The focus of the          66361 (VGF), 66364 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                              course is on working with a wide range of mediums on industry
                                                                              standard equipment in outstanding facilities. Students are
                                                                                                                                                      » Diploma of Engineering Technology: FT1
n Conservation and Land Management/                                           helped with folio presentation and interview technique. Students        » Advanced Diploma of Engineering Technology: FT2
  Sustainability                                                              participate in an end of year exhibition.                               About the course: This course enables students to develop
                                                                              Major studies: Design, Design (2D), Design (3D), Design (aspects        knowledge and acquire practical skills using current industrial
   Holmesglen, Waverley                                                       of colour), Design (product design), Design history, Design             mechanical and manufacturing applications relevant to the
                                                                                                                                                      Engineering industry. Students will be able to analyse, diagnose,
   61751 (VGF), 61754 (Fee type determined by provider)                       principles, Design process, Design theory, Graphic design.
                                                                                                                                                      design and execute judgements with respect to mechanical and
   » Diploma of Conservation and Land Management/                             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                       manufacturing engineering solutions and scientific principles.
     Diploma of Sustainability: FT1.5                                         Selection mode: Folio, interview, form. See Extra requirements          Students are able to stream their studies across key Engineering
   About the course: This practical and hands on course provides              for specifics.                                                          focus areas: Manufacturing; Drafting and Design. Students
   students with a solid grounding in environmental science                   Extra requirements:                                                     undertake significant hands on practical experience, using
   and specialized skills, along with knowledge in general land               Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Graphic Art                 high-end manufacturing and mechanical engineering facilities
   management. Emphasis is on technical and practical skills in field         and Design Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/                     and resources. Students are engaged in project based learning
   work and students will be provided practical on-site training.             applicationforms) by 5 November. Applicants can also request            experiences and are instructed in the use of current industry
   Holmesglen’s Rural Learning Centre situated at Eildon provides             the form by telephone, (03) 9564 1602. Interview and folio              practices and standards.
   access for all students to gain practical experience in the field. The     presentation: Applicants must telephone for details by 5                Major studies: 2D Computer aided drafting (CAD), 3D Computer
   course structure involves collection and preservation of biological        November. Applicants must attend late-November - early-                 aided drafting (CAD), Computer aided Manufacturing (CAM),
   specimens, management of natural areas and restoration,                    December.                                                               Computer numerical control machining (CNC), Fluid mechanics,
   chemicals, plant identification and other environmental subjects.
                                                                                                                                                      Hydraulics, Manufacturing processes, Mathematics, Mechanical
   Graduates may have opportunities to work in the sectors of Land
   Management, Conservation Earthworks, Community co-ordination


                                                                                                                                                                                  Holmesglen | 201
n Higher Education qualification                         n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                                n Other Graduates

   drive systems, Mechanics, Pneumatics, Robotics, Science, Solid          n Executive Administration (Degree)                                                        Interview: (some applicants only), details will be provided by
   modelling tequniques (solid works), Stength of Materials,                                                                                                          telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   Thermodynamics.
                                                                                 Holmesglen, Chadstone
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                            n Fashion Design (Degree)
                                                                                  61172 (DFP)
   Selection mode: ATAR, interview. See Extra requirements for
                                                                                 » Bachelor of Business (Executive Administration): FT3
   specifics.
                                                                                 About the course: The Bachelor of Business (Executive
                                                                                                                                                                      Holmesglen, City
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                61802 (DFP)
                                                                                 Administration) was developed in response to demand from
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                 industry for highly skilled professionals in administration and                      » Bachelor of Fashion (Apparel Engineering and Design):
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                       business management. The course incorporates sought after                              FT3
                                                                                 technical skills and the professional placements equip students                      About the course: The Bachelor of Fashion (Apparel Engineering
n Events/Management                                                              with the practical skills to cope with the dynamic business                          and Design) aims to produce graduates who will have a thorough
                                                                                 environment. The course contains twenty-four subjects and                            understanding in the areas of design innovation, pattern
   Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                         incorporates an exit point after the completion of the first sixteen                 engineering, manufacturing and pre-production, and professional
                                                                                 subjects. Students exiting after successful completion of first and                  industry practice in order to create innovative fashion designs and
   66371 (VGF), 66374 (Fee type determined by provider)                          second year are eligible to receive an Associate Degree in Business                  garments.
   » Diploma of Events/Diploma of Management: FT1                                (Executive Administration).
                                                                                                                                                                      The course provides students with a depth of patterning and
                                                                                 Major studies: Administration, Business (computing), Business                        design skills, both manually and electronically, using computer
   Holmesglen, Waverley                                                          (law), Business (management), Desktop publishing.                                    aided design technology, illustration, block making and garment
   61521 (VGF), 61524 (Fee type determined by provider)                          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    construction. This provides graduates with a strong skill set with
   » Diploma of Events/Diploma of Management: FT1                                Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, interview. NONY12 Form, interview.                       which to enter the Textiles Clothing and Footwear industry, both
   About the course: This dual qualification is designed to develop              See Extra requirements for specifics.                                                domestically and internationally. Graduates are also equipped
   knowledge and skills in Event Management across multiple                                                                                                           with the business and communication skills necessary to convey
                                                                                 Extra requirements:
   industries including business, tourism, hospitality, sports and                                                                                                    their creative ideas to others and develop them into commercial
                                                                                 NONY12: Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor                         products. Students work using industry standard facilities and
   recreation. It reflects the role of the Event Manager who is
                                                                                 of Business Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.                          equipment, developing problem solving skills appropriate to the
   responsible for the overall organisation and management of
                                                                                 edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can also request the form by                    professional practice of fashion design.
   conferences, festivals and events either within a venue such as
                                                                                 telephone (03) 9564 1648.
   a convention centre, sporting venue, hotel, and theatre or as an                                                                                                   Major studies: Design innovation, Manufacturing and pre-
   external independent event or meetings organiser/manager.                     Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                        production, Pattern engineering, Professional practice and industry
   Sustainable business practices are encouraged throughout the                  telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              issues.
   learning within this program. This course will attract individuals                                                                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   interested in developing and staging events across a broad              n Facilities Management (Degree)                                                           Selection mode: Form, interview and folio presentation. See
   cross-section of industries. Students progressively complete units                                                                                                 Extra requirements for specifics.
   which deal with the operational elements of staging an event as               Holmesglen, Chadstone
   well as the business acumen for successful events. The Diploma                                                                                                     Extra requirements:
   of Management ensures graduates are able to apply finance,                     61722 (DFP)                                                                         Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor of Fashion
   human resource management and marketing skills across multiple                » Bachelor of Facilities Management: FT2+2 trimesters                                form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can
   domains. Modules are presented in a range of formats including                About the course: The Bachelor of Facilities Management                              also request the form by telephone 9564 1602.
   reports, presentations and practical experience in the event and              is a four year professional specialisation course designed to                        Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must telephone 9564
   management procedures. The Diploma of Events incorporates the                 meet the academic requirements of the Facility Management                            1602 to arrange an interview. Interviews are held in November
   Certificate III in Events.                                                    Association for professional recognition. Facilities management                      and December.
   Major studies: Administration, Business (accounting),                         is an exciting and contemporary field which demands a diverse
   Communications, Conventions and exhibitions, Environmental                    set of skills to manage modern technology-driven facilities. It                n Fitness
   management, Event management, Event management (festivals),                   involves managing organisational business assets, such as space,
   Human resource management, Leadership, Management,                            infrastructure, equipment, image, reputation and support services,
   Marketing, Meetings and conventions management, Meetings and                  and integrating procurement strategies with financial, business                      Holmesglen, Waverley
   event management, Project management, Tourism.                                and human resource needs. Facilities managers are key decision-                      61701 (VGF), 61704 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                             makers in the areas of communications, utilities, maintenance and                    » Certificate IV in Fitness: FT.5
                                                                                 other workplace services. The course has been designed to develop
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                                                                                                        » Diploma of Fitness: FT1.5
                                                                                 the skills, knowledge and attributes that will enable graduates
   specifics.                                                                    to undertake facility management roles at management and                             About the course: This course develops both the instructional
   Extra requirements:                                                           professional levels. A Problem-based learning delivery method is                     and fitness-specific skills to undertake exercise programming
                                                                                 utilised through the whole course.                                                   for a variety of populations. Working as a personal trainer you
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                                                                                                      will be skilled to work in a variety of settings including sports
   page 21).                                                                     Major studies: Building, Building (construction methods),                            conditioning, within an allied health rehabilitation framework and
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                 Building (economics), Building (estimating), Building (surveying),                   with clients with special needs. Upon completion of this program
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                       Building contract administration, Building law and building                          successful graduates will be eligible for registration with either
   Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                     practice, Construction, Construction management, Facilities                          Fitness Australia or Kinect Australia. This course incorporates the
   attend an information session at Moorabbin on 12 October at                   management.                                                                          Certificate III and Certificate IV in Fitness. Please note this Training
   6.00pm or at Waverley on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and Change                Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    Package is undergoing review and the course content may change
   of Preference information session at Waverley campus only on 13               Selection mode: ATAR, interview, form. See extra requirements                        during 2011. On successful completion of the course students
   December at 6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 1699.               for specifics.                                                                       may employment opportunities within personal training studios,
                                                                                 Extra requirements:                                                                  fitness centres, sporting clubs or become self employed. You will be
                                                                                                                                                                      admitted into the highest qualification level and can choose to exit
                                                                                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor of Facilities
                                                                                                                                                                      with a lower listed qualification upon the successful completion of
                                                                                 Management Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.
                                                                                                                                                                      the required courses (subjects).
                                                                                 edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can also request the form by
                                                                                 telephone: (03) 9564 1741.


                                                                          CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
202 | VTAC Guide 2012                                               KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Major studies: Exercise physiology, Exercise prescription and risk          Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by              Major studies: Design, Design (product design), Design drawing,
   analysis, Exercise science, First aid, Fitness testing and evaluation,      telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                    Design process, Design theory, Digital art and design, Graphic
   Functional anatomy, Nutrition, Nutrition and exercise, Resistance           Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                  arts, Graphic design, Graphic design (2D), Graphic design (3D),
   training, Sports conditioning.                                              attend an information session at Moorabbin on 12 October at                Professional practice, Typography.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                           6.00pm. Late and Change of Preference information session on 14            Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                 December at 6.00pm. For more information please call 9209 5589.            Selection mode: Folio, interview, form. See Extra requirements
   specifics.                                                                                                                                             for specifics.
   Extra requirements:                                                      n Furniture Design and Technology                                             Extra requirements:
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                                                                                          Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Graphic Art
   page 21).                                                                   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                      and Design Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by               61681 (VGF), 61684 (Fee type determined by provider)                       applicationforms) by 5 November. Applicants can also request
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                                                                                                the form by telephone, (03) 9564 1602. Interview and folio
                                                                               » Certificate IV in Furniture Design and Technology: FT1                   presentation: Applicants must telephone for details by 5
   Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                   » Diploma of Furniture Design and Technology: FT1.5                        November. Applicants must attend late-November/early-
   attend an information session on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and
                                                                               » Advanced Diploma of Furniture Design and Technology:                     December.
   Change of Preference information session on 13 December at
                                                                                 FT2
   6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 1699.
                                                                               About the course: This course gives students a sound                    n Horticulture (Landscape)/Sustainability
                                                                               underpinning knowledge in furniture design. The emphasis is
n Food Processing                                                              designing furniture for volume production, as Holmesglen has
                                                                               a long established relationship with manufacturing and retails             Holmesglen, Waverley
   Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                       sectors. Students who complete this course are qualified to work           61711 (VGF), 61714 (Fee type determined by provider)
   66531 (VGF), 66534 (Fee type determined by provider)                        as production designers in large companies. Design disciplines             » Diploma of Horticulture (Landscape)/Diploma of
                                                                               are taught with special emphasis on professional standard                    Sustainability: FT1.5
   » Diploma of Food Processing: FT2 - CANCELLED                               presentation & documentation skills. Other units include autocad,          About the course: This course is designed for individuals who are
   About the course: This course prepares students for employment              manual drawing, ergonomics, materials and technology and                   new to the horticulture industry, intending owners of horticulture
   in the operational, supervisory and management aspects of the               sustainable manufacturing. This is a Pathway Program. You will be          landscape businesses or who are involved in the landscape
   food processing industry. It will provide you with the skills to work       enrolled in the lowest level qualification and will progress, subject      industry. The skills and knowledge is provided through professional
   at a mid level management role within a food processing plant and           to satisfactory academic progress, to the higher qualification             education and practical hands on training Horticulture industry
   the ability to take responsibility for the environment that you will        levels.                                                                    contacts provide students with cutting edge industry techniques.
   be working in.
                                                                               Major studies: Ergonomics, Furniture design, Materials                     The course structure can involve quotes and tenders, managing
   Major studies: Business studies, Food hygiene, Food processing              technology, Modelling (3D), Prototyping.                                   landscape projects, design and irrigation. A graduate may be
   technology, Manufacturing engineering (food), Occupational                                                                                             qualified to select a career in design, supervisory or managerial
                                                                               Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   health and safety.                                                                                                                                     operations. This qualification may also provide an opportunity
                                                                               Selection mode: Form. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                      for graduates to manage landscape projects commercial and
                                                                               Extra requirements:
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                                                                                            domestic. This course is currently under review so course content
   specifics.                                                                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit an Furniture                     or award titles may change. Whilst studying within the Diploma
                                                                               Design and Technology Supplementary Application form (www.                 of Horticulture (Landscape) program you have the opportunity to
   Extra requirements:
                                                                               holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms) by 24 November. Applicants             complete four (4) additional specialist ‘Sustainability’ units which
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see               can also request the form by telephone (03) 9564 1851. Late                are offered through online delivery. Upon successful completion
   page 21).                                                                   and Change of Preference applicants must return the form by 21             of these units you will be entitled to the award of Diploma of
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by               December.                                                                  Sustainability.
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                                                                                                Major studies: Arboriculture, Communications, Design
   Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                n Graphic Design                                                              (ecologically sustainable), Garden design, Horticulture,
   attend an information session at Moorabbin on 12 October at                                                                                            Horticulture (nursery), Horticulture (plant nutrition), Horticulture
   6.00pm. Late and Change of Preference information session on 14                                                                                        (turf), Irrigation and water management, Landscape design and
   December at 6.00pm. For more information please call 9209 5589.
                                                                               Holmesglen, Chadstone
                                                                                                                                                          planning, Landscape horticulture, Occupational health and safety,
                                                                               61131 (VGF), 61134 (Fee type determined by provider)                       Parks and gardens, Soil science.
n Food Science and Technology                                                  » Diploma of Graphic Design: FT2                                           Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                               61381 (VGF), 61384 (Fee type determined by provider)                       Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
   Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                       » Advanced Diploma of Graphic Design: FT2                                  specifics.
   66541 (VGF), 66544 (Fee type determined by provider)                        About the course: The Diploma of Graphic Design and the                    Extra requirements:
   » Certificate IV in Food Science & Technology: FT1.5 -CANCELLED             Advanced Diploma of Graphic Design address the specific                    Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                               knowledge and skills required to work across a wide range of               page 21).
   About the course: This course prepares students for employment
                                                                               Graphic Design industry occupations. The Advanced Diploma of
   in the technical area of the food processing industry. You will learn                                                                                  Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
                                                                               Graphic Design is aimed at those who have completed the Diploma
   the technical skills of food production, distribution and storage as                                                                                   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
                                                                               level qualification by providing conceptual thinking, problem
   well as the environmental factors surrounding the food industry.                                                                                       Additional information: IIt is recommended that applicants
                                                                               solving and advanced design skills. These skills are developed
   Major studies: Cookery, Food hygiene, Food science and                      using a range of current industry standard software and hardware           attend an information session on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and
   biotechnology, Laboratory technology (food), Manufacturing                  in outstanding facilities by working on projects that reflect              Change of Preference information session on 13 December at
   engineering (food), Occupational health and safety.                         industry needs. Industry placement and access to live industry jobs        6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 6391.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                           provides students with real experience, access to industry expertise
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                 and employment. Holmesglen has successfully gained awards
   specifics.                                                                  in nationally recognised competitions and design events over
                                                                               many years. This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the
   Extra requirements:
                                                                               lowest level qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see               academic progress, to the higher qualification level.
   page 21).


                                                                                                                                                                                       Holmesglen | 203
 Higher Education qualification                             Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               Other Graduates

 Horticulture/Sustainability                                                     events including Master Class at Melbourne Food and Wine                             Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
                                                                                  festival, the Good Food and Wine Show, and Celebrity Chef Dinners.                   specifics.
                                                                                  Students are also trained on industry standard software including                    Extra requirements:
   Holmesglen, Waverley                                                           Micros and Opera.
   61391 (VGF), 61394 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                                Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                  Major studies: Accommodation management, Administration,                             page 21).
   » Diploma of Horticulture/Diploma of Sustainability: FT1.5                     Bar management, Business (accounting), Communications,
                                                                                                                                                                       Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   About the course: This course is designed for individuals who are              Cookery, Cultural diversity, Customer service, Employee
                                                                                                                                                                       telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   new to the horticulture industry, intending owners of horticulture             relations, Environment and sustainability, Event management,
   businesses or individuals who are involved in general horticulture.            Financial management, Food and beverage management, Food                             Additional information: It is recommended that applicants
   The skills and knowledge is provided through professional                      and beverage production, Food and beverage service, Food                             attend an information session at Moorabbin on 12 October
   education and practical hands on training. Horticulture industry               handling, Food law, Food safety and regulation, Hospitality,                         at 6.00pm or at Waverley on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and
   contacts provide students with cutting edge industry techniques.               Hospitality management, Hospitality sales and marketing, Hotel                       Change of Preference information session at both campuses on 13
   The course structure can involve plant identification, tree                    management, Hotel operations management, Housekeeping,                               December at 6.00pm. For more information please call Moorabbin
   assessment, tenders and quotes, weeds and pests, establishing                  Industrial relations, Inventory control, Leadership, Marketing,                      9209 5938 or Waverley 9564 6250.
   turf, customer specialist advice. A graduate may be qualified to               Purchasing and inventory, Quality control, Recruitment and
   select a career in technical, supervisory or managerial operations             selection, Restaurant operations, Sales and marketing.                          Hospitality Management (Degree)
   in Horticulture both in commercial and domestic operations. This               Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   course is currently under review so course content or award titles                                                                                                  Holmesglen, Waverley
                                                                                  Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
   may change. Whilst studying within the Diploma of Horticulture
                                                                                  specifics.                                                                           61762 (DFP)
   program you have the opportunity to complete four (4) additional
   specialist ‘Sustainability’ units which are offered through online             Extra requirements:                                                                  » Bachelor of Hospitality Management: FT3 - CANCELLED
   delivery. Upon successful completion of these units you will be                Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                        About the course: The Holmesglen Bachelor of Hospitality
   entitled to the award of Diploma of Sustainability.                            page 21).                                                                            Management (BHM) is a three year degree for students who wish
   Major studies: Arboriculture, Communication, Design                            Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                        to prepare for a career in management in the hospitality industry.
   (ecologically sustainable), Floriculture, Garden design,                       telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              The course covers many of the essential, vocational skills needed in
   Horticulture, Horticulture (nursery), Horticulture (plant nutrition),          Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                            hospitality organisations, and then moves on to develop a sound
   Horticulture (turf), Irrigation and water management, Landscape                attend an information session at Moorabbin on 12 October                             knowledge base for aspiring managers in this field. It is designed
   design and planning, Landscape horticulture, Occupational health               at 6.00pm or at Waverley on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and                           to produce versatile, adaptable and confident graduates who
   and safety, Parks and gardens, Plant sciences, Soil science.                   Change of Preference information session at both campuses on 13                      are comfortable in a broad range of hospitality contexts - both
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                              December at 6.00pm. For more information please call Moorabbin                       in Australia and internationally. Graduates of the BHM are able
                                                                                  9209 5589 or Waverley 9564 6250.                                                     to consider positions in major hotels, local and international
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
                                                                                                                                                                       resorts, commercial catering operations, restaurants and events
   specifics.
                                                                                                                                                                       management organisations. There are also abundant opportunities
   Extra requirements:                                                       Hospitality (Patisserie)                                                                 for graduates, with appropriate experience, to establish their own
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                                                                                                       business in hospitality. Graduates of the Diploma or Advanced
   page 21).                                                                      Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                                Diploma in Hospitality Management can allow advanced standing
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                   66481 (VGF), 66484 (Fee type determined by provider)                                of 33%(Diploma) or 50%(Advanced Diploma) of the subjects.
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                        » Diploma of Hospitality: FT2                                                        Major studies: Contemporary leadership techniques, Customer
   Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                                                                                                           relationship management, Facilities management, Hospitality
   attend an information session on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and                Holmesglen, Waverley                                                                 business law, Hospitality computing applications, Hospitality
   Change of Preference information session on 13 December at                                                                                                          materials control, Hospitality practicum, Hospitality revenue and
                                                                                   61771 (VGF), 61774 (Fee type determined by provider)                                yield management, Human resource management in hospitality,
   6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 6391.
                                                                                  » Diploma of Hospitality: FT2                                                        Organisational behaviour, Principles of financial reporting,
                                                                                  About the course: This qualification provides the skills and                         Principles of hospitality management, Project management in
 Hospitality                                                                     knowledge for an individual to become a qualified cook who                           hospitality, Safety and security practices, Services marketing,
                                                                                  specialises in patisserie. Work would be undertaken in various                       Strategic management.
   Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                          hospitality enterprises where patisserie products are prepared                       Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   66571 (VGF), 66574 (Fee type determined by provider)                           and served, including patisseries, restaurants, hotels, catering                     Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, interview. NONY12: Form,
                                                                                  operations, clubs, pubs, cafes and coffee shops.                                     interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   » Certificate IV in Hospitality: FT1
                                                                                  Students have the opportunity to participate and work in Industry
   » Diploma of Hospitality: FT1.5                                                                                                                                     Extra requirements:
                                                                                  at some of these events and at these locations. The Great Aussie
                                                                                  Pie Competition, State Baking Show and National Awards, La                           NONY12: Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor
   Holmesglen, Waverley                                                           Parisienne Bakery, The Press Club, Langham Melbourne, Crown                          of Hospitality Management Supplementary application form
   61571 (VGF), 61574 (Fee type determined by provider)                           Melbourne, Specialty Artisan Baking, Chocolate or Cake Decorating,                   (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms).
   » Certificate IV in Hospitality: FT1                                           Retail Bakery. This course will give you the experience, skills and                  Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   » Diploma of Hospitality: FT1.5                                                qualifications to become part of this dynamic, fun filled industry.                  telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   About the course: This course prepares students for employment                 Students who successfully complete a Diploma of Hospitality                          Additional information: It is recommended that applicants
   in operational, supervisory and management roles in the                        specialising in Commercial Cookery or Patisserie who wish to                         attend an information session at Waverley on 11 October at
   hospitality industry. Possible Careers in Restaurants, Catering                progress into the Bachelor of Hospitality Management will receive                    6.00pm. Late and Change of Preference information session at
   Operations, Major Hotels and Resorts. Managed Work Placement                   1 year’s credit.                                                                     Waverley on 13 December at 6.00pm. For more information please
   (MWP) is delivered at venues such as The Langham, Grand Hyatt,                 Major studies: Administration, Customer service, Food handling,                      call 9564 6250.
   Park Hyatt, and Hilton on the Park. Holmesglen’s Hemisphere -                  Food safety and regulation, Hot and cold deserts, Leadership,
   Conference Centre and Hotel provides our students with on-the-job              Marketing, Patisserie, Patisserie Fundamentals, Quality control,
   training in functions and events, housekeeping, food and beverage              Quality control, Restaurant operations, Stock control, Supervisory
   service, cookery and kitchen operations. At our student training               skills.
   restaurants, Cilantro and Zest, the students experience a range of             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   service styles, from breakfast, café to fine dining. Students train
   along side some of the best in the business through organised

                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
204 | VTAC Guide 2012                                               KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
n Human Resources                                                            Extra requirements:                                                       system that solves a business problem and supports requirements.
                                                                             Form: All applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor of               This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level
                                                                             Information Technology Application form (www.holmesglen.                  qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                                                                               progress, to the higher qualification levels.
                                                                             edu.au/applicationforms). Information session: Applicants must
   61841 (VGF), 61844 (Fee type determined by provider)                      telephone (03) 9564 1796 for details.                                     Major studies: Databases, Network design, Network
   » Certificate IV in Human Resources: FT0.5                                Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                 management and network systems, Network security,
   » Diploma of Human Resources Management: FT1                              attend the information session at the Chadstone Campus on 19              Network technology, Networking, Networks, Networks and
   » Advanced Diploma of Management (Human Resources):                       August at 6.00 pm.                                                        data communications, Project management, Risk analysis and
     FT1.5                                                                                                                                             management, Systems design and development, Systems
   About the course: This nationally recognised course will benefit                                                                                    software.
                                                                          n Information Technology (Multimedia)
   individuals seeking to pursue opportunities in the field of Human                                                                                   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Resources. This course will develop generic business and human                                                                                      Selection mode: Information session. See Extra requirements
   resource specific knowledge and skills. The Advanced Diploma              Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                     for specifics.
   incorporates the Certificate IV and Diploma.                              66391 (VGF), 66394 (Fee type determined by provider)                      Extra requirements:
   Delivery is over 3 to 4 days per week and is via classroom delivery       » Certificate IV in Information Technology (Websites): FT1                Information session: Applicants must telephone (03) 9564 1796
   and on-line research in a supportive learning environment.                » Diploma of Information Technology (Multimedia): FT1.5                   for details.
   Graduates from the Diploma/Advanced Diploma are guaranteed                About the course: Facilitation takes place, with students learning
   direct entry, with up to one year/1.5 years (respectively) advanced       the tools and techniques required to use state-of-the-art web
   standing into Holmesglen business degrees: Bachelor of Business           and multimedia applications including; Adobe Photoshop, Adobe
                                                                                                                                                    n Information Technology (Software
   Administration, Bachelor of Business (Executive Administration)           Illustrator, Adobe Dreamweaver, Adobe Flash, WordPress, Autodesk         Development)
   and Bachelor of Business (Marketing Management).                          Maya, Adobe Premier and Adobe After Effects.
   This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level       Cutting edge technology is explained, with students learning to           Holmesglen, Chadstone
   qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic         design and develop a range of multimedia applications including:          61251 (VGF), 61254 (Fee type determined by provider)
   progress, to the higher qualification levels.                             • Custom built mobile phone applications                                  » Certificate IV in Information Technology (General): FT1
   Major studies: Change management, Employment law, Finance,                • High end 3D models and complex rigs for character animation               to FT1.5
   Human resource management, Industrial relations, Mediation,
                                                                             • Industry standard content management systems                            » Diploma of Information Technology (Software
   Occupational health and safety, Organisational design and
                                                                             Students work in a team environment with a ‘real’ client on a               Development): FT1.5 to FT2
   development, Performance management, Recruitment and
   selection, Strategic planning, Training, Workforce planning.              live project, producing and implementing a functioning industry           About the course: This course has been developed with industry
                                                                             standard product.                                                         assistance to provide skills in computer programming and software
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                   development. It gives students the skills to determine client needs,
                                                                             The course is studied full time, 3 days a week for 18 months.
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                                                                                    develop programs and provide complete solutions for clients.
                                                                             Graduates will receive a Diploma of IT (Multimedia) and a
   Extra requirements:                                                       Certificate IV in IT (Websites).                                          Students will develop practical skills in a number of languages
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                                                                                       including html, CSS, PHP, Java, VB and SQL. Students also learn
                                                                             Students will take with them marketable, industry-ready skills that       and practice the skills required to work in a small-medium sized
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                   will enable them to get set for their working life.                       business supporting their information processing requirements.
                                                                             Major studies: Animation (2D), Animation (3D), Digital imaging,           The course culminates in an industry-based project where students
n Information Technology (Degree)                                            Interactive media, Interface design, Mobile computing and                 develop and implement a piece of software for a client. Students
                                                                             applications, Project management, Video production.                       participate in a team environment, document progress using
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                     Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                         appropriate tools, and implement a functioning system that solves
   61612 (DFP)                                                               Selection mode: Information session. See Extra requirements               a business problem and supports requirements. This is a Pathway
                                                                             for specifics.                                                            Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level qualification and
   » Bachelor of Information Technology (Programmer/                                                                                                   will progress, subject to satisfactory academic progress, to the
     Analyst): FT2 – CANCELLED                                               Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                       higher qualification levels.
   About the course: The degree equips students with an                      Information session: Applicants must telephone (03) 9209 5690
                                                                                                                                                       Major studies: Databases, Networking, Object oriented
   understanding of IT business functions, including programming,            for details.
                                                                                                                                                       development, Programming, Project management, Software
   database management, and systems analysis. A feature is that
                                                                                                                                                       applications, Software development, Software engineering,
   the program is built around SAP enterprise software, widely used       n Information Technology (Networking)                                        Software systems, System analysis and design, Systems process
   in large enterprises globally. An industry placement in a SAP
                                                                                                                                                       improvement, Systems software, Systems testing, Web application
   environment enables students to integrate multiple disciplines
   during Year 3. Students gain vocational skills, with an emphasis          Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                     development, Web development.
   on professionalism. Many subject areas require students to work           61191 (VGF), 61194 (Fee type determined by provider)                      Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   in teams, to develop ‘soft skills’ crucial in business dealings, and      » Certificate IV in Information Technology (General): FT1                 Selection mode: Information session. See Extra requirements
   project work. A pre-requisite is the Diploma of IT (Software                to 1.5                                                                  for specifics.
   Development). Upon successful completion, students articulate                                                                                       Extra requirements:
                                                                             » Diploma of Information Technology (Networking): FT1.5
   into Semester 4, Year 2 subjects of the Bachelor. Depending upon
                                                                               to 2                                                                    Information session: Applicants must telephone (03) 9564 1796
   the units studied at Diploma level, bridging subjects may be                                                                                        for details.
                                                                             About the course: This course has been developed with
   required to be completed. This is a Pathway Program. Students
                                                                             industry assistance to provide skills in managing, configuring and
   enrol in the lowest level qualification and progress, subject to
                                                                             administering LANs and WANs. It provides a strong networking
   satisfactory academic progress, to higher qualification levels.
                                                                             base covering the topics of Network Design, Management, Security
   Major studies: Business practice, Database design and                     and Operating Systems. Students design LANs and implement
   management, Enterprise systems, Programming (business),                   them using supplied devices. Students also install a number of
   Project management, Quality assurance, Resource management,               operating systems (OS), implementing business and security
   Software development, Software engineering, Systems analysis              policies, much of the work undertaken with OS’s is done in a Virtual
   and design.                                                               environment. The course culminates in an industry-based project
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                         where students develop and implement a networking project for
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, form, information session. NONY12:            a client. Students participate in a group environment, document
   Form, information session. See Extra requirements for specifics.          progress using appropriate tools, and implement a functioning

                                                                                                                                                                                    Holmesglen | 205
n Higher Education qualification                           n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               n Other Graduates

n Interactive Digital Media                                                 n International Business                                                                   Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                                       Form: All applicants must complete and submit a Justice
   Holmesglen, Waverley                                                           Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms).
   61091 (VGF), 61094 (Fee type determined by provider)                            61221 (VGF), 61224 (Fee type determined by provider)                                Interview: Details will be provided by telephone or mail. Applicants
                                                                                                                                                                       must attend in November, December or January.
   » Diploma of Interactive Digital Media: FT1                                    » Certificate IV in International Trade: FT1
                                                                                                                                                                       Additional information: Applicants are strongly advised to
   About the course: The Diploma of Interactive Digital Media is                  » Diploma of International Business: FT1.5                                           attend the information session to be held at the Waverley campus
   an intensive and practical course in which individuals will gain a             About the course: This course encompasses the Certificate                            on 13 October between 6.30-8.30 pm.
   range of skills and knowledge, including web, graphic, animation               III in International Trade. Students work on case studies and
   and games design using industry standard software applications.                assignments that require knowledge of Government, Customs
   The course has been designed with a focus on multimedia                        and Legislative requirements for organising imports and exports.               n Laboratory Technology
   production skills and the development of creative skills in the use            Students will also receive training in high level of computer skills,
   of 2D and 3D imaging and animation, digital, audio and interface               basic accounting and numeracy skills, considerable research                          Holmesglen, Moorabbin
   design. The principles associated with the management and                      and marketing skills and gain a sound knowledge of Australian                        66331 (VGF), 66334 (Fee type determined by provider)
   development of multimedia teams and multimedia projects is also                commercial law.
   a focus.
                                                                                                                                                                       » Diploma of Laboratory Technology (specialising in
                                                                                  In the Diploma of International Business students will acquire                         Biotechnology): FT2
   Major studies: Animation (3D), Animation design and                            deeper skills in the areas of international finance, economics,
   production, Design, Digital audio, Digital media, Digital video,               accounting, marketing, law and management.                                           66381 (VGF), 66384 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Image making, Image processing, Imaging and sound, Marketing,                  Certificate IV and Diploma courses are timetabled for 3–4 days                       » Diploma of Laboratory Technology (specialising in
   Multimedia, Multimedia analysis and design, Multimedia                         attendance per week.                                                                   Pathology Testing): FT2
   authoring, Multimedia communications, Multimedia production                    Graduates from the Diploma are guaranteed direct entry with up                       About the course: This course provides broad based vocational
   and development, Multimedia programming, Multimedia                            to 1.5 years advanced standing credits into Holmesglen Business                      training for technical officers, analysts and other job roles in
   technology, Project management, World Wide Web, Writing                        Degrees.                                                                             biotechnology, pathology testing, biology and environmental
   (media).                                                                                                                                                            testing, medical research and other scientific laboratories.
                                                                                  You will be enrolled in the lowest level qualification and will
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                                   Comprises of core units and selected electives considered relevant
                                                                                  progress, subject to satisfactory academic progress, to the higher
   Selection mode: Form, interview, folio. See Extra requirements                                                                                                      to the specialisation. Students also participate in practical
                                                                                  qualification levels.
   for specifics.                                                                                                                                                      placement.
                                                                                  Major studies: Economics, International business, International
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                 The two streams of Laboratory Technology offered by Holmesglen
                                                                                  finance, International law, International marketing, International
                                                                                                                                                                       have a common first year. In second year students choose one of
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Digital Media                      trade, Management, Transport and logistics.
                                                                                                                                                                       the two streams. Biotechnology focuses on techniques including
   Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms).                     Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    Molecular Biology, Chromatography, Electrophoresis, Tissue Culture
   Applicants can also request the form by telephone (03) 9564 6254.              Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                     and Spectrometric Techniques.
   Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must telephone                    Extra requirements:                                                                  The Pathology Testing stream focuses on techniques in
   (03) 9564 6254 to arrange an interview. Interviews are held in
                                                                                  Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                        Haematology, Histology, Chemical Pathology, Microbiology and
   November and December.
                                                                                  telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              Immunohaematology.
                                                                                                                                                                       Major studies: Aseptic techniques, Biology, Chemistry,
n Interior Design and Decoration                                                                                                                                       Communication skills, Microbiology, Microscopy, Occupational
                                                                            n Justice
                                                                                                                                                                       health and safety, Sustainability.
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                                                                                               Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                  Holmesglen, Waverley
   61051 (VGF), 61054 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                                Selection mode: ATAR, interview. See extra requirements for
                                                                                   61671 (VGF), 61674 (Fee type determined by provider)
   » Certificate IV in Interior Decoration: FT1                                                                                                                        specifics.
                                                                                  » Certificate IV in Justice: FT1                                                     Extra requirements:
   » Diploma of Interior Design and Decoration: FT1.5
                                                                                  » Diploma of Justice: FT1 to 1.5
   » Advanced Diploma of Interior Design: FT2                                                                                                                          Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
                                                                                  » Advanced Diploma of Justice: FT2                                                   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend. Interviews
   About the course: The Advanced Diploma of Interior Design is
   project based. Students learn design analysis, problem solving, and            About the course: Provides the major vocational education                            will be held in December.
   research skills that are applied to space planning, and detailing for          and training pathway needed by persons wishing to enter,
   residential commercial and institutional design projects. Design               develop additional skills or pursue a long-term career within
                                                                                  the community justice industry and its related areas. This will                n Legal Practice
   disciplines are taught with special emphasis on professional
   presentation and documentation of ideas. Manual drawing skills                 include the police, both state and federal, customs services, sheriff
   and CAD are taught as foundation skills along with underpinning                department, local government authorities, correctional services,                     Holmesglen, Chadstone
   knowledge of colour application, furniture design, interior fitting            courts, juvenile justice, community corrections, non-government                      61071 (VGF), 61074 (Fee type determined by provider)
   and fixtures, construction, lighting and soft furnishings. This                bodies and support agencies. 12 units are offered in Year 1 and
                                                                                                                                                                       » Advanced Diploma of Legal Practice: FT2
   is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level                 13 units are offered in Year 2. There are approx 18 contact hours
                                                                                  per week. Electives are offered according to perceived industry                      About the course: This course provides specific vocational
   qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic                                                                                                   education and pathway for people wishing to pursue a career as
   progress, to the higher qualification levels.                                  applicability. Study focus: Year 1 provides an overview of the
                                                                                  Criminal Justice system. Year 2 allows for a in-depth focus on                       a law clerk or para professional staff in legal practice or related
   Major studies: Computer-aided design (CAD), Construction,                      specific justice areas. Delivery modes include a mix of classroom,                   areas, including the courts, legal aid, financial institutions and
   Furnishings, Interior design, Lighting.                                        fieldwork, off-campus and on-line. Our highly motivated and                          government departments.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                              qualified staff are here to share their extensive experience with                    The course delivers a number of specialised law units delivered
   Selection mode: Form. See Extra requirements for specifics.                    learners in a learner focused environment on a modern campus.                        by qualified legal professionals. Students have opportunities to
                                                                                  Major studies: Community Studies, Criminal Law, Criminology,                         participate in excursions to legal environments and undertake a
   Extra requirements:
                                                                                  Justice Administration, Justice and law enforcement, Legal studies,                  semester in a simulated legal office to experience managing client
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit an Interior Design and                                                                                                    files and the workload in a legal firm.
   Decoration Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.                     Police studies, Psychology, Sociology, Written communication.
                                                                                  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    The course is delivered over 3-4 days.
   edu.au/applicationforms) by 24 November. Applicants can also
   request the form by telephone (03) 9564 1851. Late and Change of               Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
   Preference applicants must return the form by 21 December.                     specifics.

                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
206 | VTAC Guide 2012                                               KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Graduates from this Advanced Diploma are guaranteed direct                Arts. This course is aimed at mature aged students wishing to             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   entry, with up to 1.5 years advanced standing into Holmesglen             return to study or year 12 leavers seeking to improve their skills        Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   business degrees: Bachelor of Business Administration, Bachelor           before undertaking further arts or education studies. Students
                                                                                                                                                       Extra requirements:
   of Business (Executive Administration) and Bachelor of Business           will develop high level computing, research and presentation
   (Marketing Management).                                                   skills through a combination of classroom based work, field trips         Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9564 1602 to book, by
                                                                             and excursions and self directed tasks. Assessment will be a              22 October (Late applicants by 12 November). Applicants must
   Major studies: Communications, Computer software, Law
                                                                             combination of discussions, written assignments, project work and         attend in late November-early December. Advisory letters will be
   (administrative), Law (commercial), Law (consumer), Law
                                                                             oral presentations.                                                       sent to applicants by 10 December.
   (contract), Law (conveyancing), Law (criminal), Law (evidence),
   Law (family), Law (probate), Law (property), Law (torts), Legal           Major studies: Australian society, Cultural studies, History,
   practice, Word processing.                                                Research methods, Social sciences.                                      n Management
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                         Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.          Selection mode: ATAR, form. See Extra requirements for specifics.         Holmesglen, Chadstone
   Extra requirements:                                                       Extra requirements:                                                        61331 (VGF), 61334 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by             Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Liberal Arts                  » Certificate IV in Frontline Management: FT0.5
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                   Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/                    » Diploma of Management: FT1
                                                                             applicationforms) by 23 December.                                         » Advanced Diploma of Management: FT1.5
n Legal Practice/Business Administration                                                                                                               About the course: A generalist management course with a
                                                                          n Library and Information Services                                           concentration on developing people skills and equips graduates for
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                                                                               frontline and strategic management, supervisory responsibilities
                                                                             Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                     and team leadership. The Advanced Diploma incorporates the
   61321 (VGF), 61324 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                Certificate IV and Diploma. Delivery is over 3 to 4 days per week
   » Advanced Diploma of Legal Practice/Diploma of Business                  66231 (VGF), 66234 (Fee type determined by provider)                      and is via classroom delivery and on-line research in a supportive
     Administration: FT1.5 to FT2                                            » Certificate IV in Library/Information Services:                         learning environment.
   About the course: This dual award program provides students                 FT1 PT2 - CANCELLED                                                     Graduates from the Diploma are guaranteed direct entry, with up
   with vocational skills and knowledge in Legal Practice and                About the course: This course is designed for people who are              to one year advanced standing into Holmesglen business degrees:
   Business Administration. The knowledge gained in the course               currently working or wish to work in the library information              Bachelor of Business Administration, (Bachelor of Business
   equips graduates to fulfil an industry need for legally informed          sector. The practical focus of this course enhances students’ skills      (Executive Administration) and Bachelor of Business (Marketing
   support staff with superior administration skills. This course            in cataloguing and IT. The Certificate IV prepares students for           Management).
   provides specific vocational education and pathway for people             employment as a Library Assistant.                                        Graduates from the Advanced Diploma courses are guaranteed
   wishing to pursue a career as a law clerk or para professional staff      Major studies: Administration, Communication and professional             direct entry, with up to 1.5 years advanced standing into the above
   in legal practice or related areas, including the courts, legal aid,      practice, Database management, Electronic systems, Information            business degrees.
   financial institutions and government departments. The course             management, Library (information services), Library studies,              This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level
   delivers a number of specialised law units delivered by qualified         Planning and administration, Research methods, Software                   qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic
   legal professionals. Students have opportunities to be involved           applications.                                                             progress, to the higher qualification levels.
   in live community projects and conference presentations related
                                                                             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                         Major studies: Business (administration), Business
   to relevant areas of study. Students undertake a semester in a
   simulated legal office to experience managing client files and the        Selection mode: Form, interview. See extra requirements for               (management), Business (operations), Business practice, Customer
   workload in a legal firm. Each qualification comprises core units         specifics.                                                                service, Human resource management, Industrial relations,
   and competencies and a selection of electives. There are approx. 21       Extra requirements:                                                       Leadership, Management, Management (finance), Management
   contact hours per week, delivered over 3-4 days. Graduates from           Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Library/Information           information systems, Occupational health and safety, Resource/
   the Diploma and the Advanced Diploma are guaranteed direct                Services Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.              environmental management, Risk analysis and management,
   entry into Holmesglen degrees: the Bachelor of Business (Executive        au/applicationforms) by 22 October. Applicants can also request           Strategic planning.
   Administration), the Bachelor of Business (Accounting), Bachelor          form by telephone (03) 9209 5802. Interview (some applicants              Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   of Business Marketing Management, or Bachelor of Administration           only): Applicants required to attend an interview will be contacted       Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   degrees with up to 1.5 years of advanced standing.                        by telephone or mail.                                                     Extra requirements:
   Major studies: Administration, Communication studies,
                                                                                                                                                       Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   Computer software, Law (administrative), Law (commercial), Law         n Live Production, Theatre and Events                                        telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   (consumer), Law (contract), Law (conveyancing), Law (criminal),
   Law (evidence), Law (family), Law (probate), Law (property), Law
   (torts), Legal practice, Software applications, Word processing.          Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                   n Management/Human Resources
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                         61151 (VGF), 61154 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.          » Certificate IV in Live Production, Theatre and Events                   Holmesglen, Chadstone
   Extra requirements:
                                                                               (Technical Operations): FT1                                              61271 (VGF), 61274 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                             About the course: Prepares students to work as technical
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                                                                                       » Certificate IV in Frontline Management/Certificate IV in
                                                                             operators in specialist areas in a range of live entertainment fields
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                                                                                               Human Resources: FT1
                                                                             such as theatre, corporate and major events. This course focuses on
                                                                             stage/production management and technical operations. Students            » Diploma of Management/Diploma of Human Resources
n Liberal Arts                                                               work on a variety of professional theatre productions, festivals and        Management: FT2
                                                                             events including The Melbourne International Comedy Festival              About the course: This dual award program provides students
                                                                             and a season of One Act Plays in a Melbourne professional theatre         with vocational skills in the related fields of management and
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                                                                               human resources. Derived from the Business Services National
                                                                             venue. The practical focus of this course provides students with
   66081 (VGF), 66084 (Fee type determined by provider)                      opportunity to establish industry contacts enabling them future           Training Package the program reflects the role of human resource
   » Certificate IV in Liberal Arts: FT1                                     employment. The students will attend a number of live theatre             practitioners, frontline and middle managers and will benefit
   About the course: Provides the skills and knowledge necessary             productions throughout the year.                                          individuals seeking to pursue opportunities in these fields.
   for successful tertiary study and to enhance employment                                                                                             Students have the opportunity to participate in hands-on projects.
                                                                             Major studies: Lighting, Multimedia, Sound, Sound recording
   prospects. Contains a broad range of units in the Humanities                                                                                        Delivery is over 3 to 4 days per week and is via classroom delivery
                                                                             and production, Stage management, Theatre (theatre technology),
   with pathways and credits to university level studies in the                                                                                        and on-line research in a supportive learning environment .
                                                                             Vision systems.

                                                                                                                                                                                    Holmesglen | 207
 Higher Education qualification                           Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               Other Graduates

   Graduates from Diploma courses are guaranteed direct entry into              Extra requirements:                                                                  The capstone Marketing Management, Strategic Management and
   either the Advanced Diploma of Management or the Advanced                    Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                        Entrepreneurship and New Venture projects in the final semester
   Diploma of Management [Human Resources] which may be                         telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              integrate multiple disciplines, expose students to the need for
   completed in an additional six months full time study. Graduates                                                                                                  innovation and change management and ensure that a students
   from the Diploma are also guaranteed direct entry, with up to                                                                                                     work is grounded in practical application to produce work ready
   one year advanced standing into Holmesglen business degrees:            Marketing                                                                                marketing graduates.
   Bachelor of Business (Executive Administration), Bachelor of                                                                                                      Major studies: Business (accounting), Business (management),
   Business Administration, Bachelor of Business (Accounting) and               Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                Interactive marketing, International business, Marketing,
   Bachelor of Business(Marketing Management) Graduates from the                 61261 (VGF), 61264 (Fee type determined by provider)                                Marketing research, Sales management.
   Advanced Diploma courses are guaranteed direct entry, with up to
   1.5 years advanced. standing into the above business degrees.
                                                                                » Certificate IV in Marketing: FT0.5                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                » Diploma of Marketing: FT1                                                          Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, interview. NONY12: Form,
   Major studies: Business planning, Change management,
                                                                                » Advanced Diploma of Marketing: FT1.5                                               interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   Communication studies, Computer applications, Customer
   service, Employment law, Finance, Human resource management,                                                                                                      Extra requirements:
   Industrial relations, Law, Leadership, Management, Marketing,                Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                                NONY12: Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor
   Office administration, Performance management, Recruitment and                66271 (VGF), 66274 (Fee type determined by provider)                                of Business Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.
   selection, Risk assessment, Strategic planning.                              » Certificate IV in Marketing: FT0.5                                                 edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can also request the form by
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                                 telephone (03) 9564 1648.
                                                                                » Diploma of Marketing: FT1
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                                                                                                  Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
                                                                                » Advanced Diploma of Marketing: FT1.5 - CANCELLED
                                                                                                                                                                     telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   Extra requirements:                                                          About the course: This course provides students with the
                                                                                knowledge and skills to carry out the duties and tasks of a                          Additional information: Applicants may receive up to eight
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
                                                                                marketing officer and to assist the marketing manager. The                           exemptions for the successful completion of a Diploma and up to
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
                                                                                Advanced Diploma of Marketing consists of the Diploma                                twelve exemptions for the successful completion of an Advanced
                                                                                of Marketing and the Certificate IV in Marketing and at the                          Diploma in a related area of study, or other relevant qualifications
 Management/Marketing                                                          Moorabbin Campus also the Certificate IV in Business (Sales).                        on a case-by-case basis. Applicants may apply for Recognition of
                                                                                Students are given the opportunity to work on genuine projects                       Prior Learning (RPL) on a basis of work or life experience.
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                        with small local business allowing them to develop viable business
   61481 (VGF), 61484 (Fee type determined by provider)                         and marketing and communications plans. Graduates from                          Marketing/Advertising
                                                                                the Diploma are guaranteed direct entry into the Holmesglen
   » Certificate IV in Frontline Management/Certificate IV in
                                                                                Business (Marketing Management) Degree with up to one year                           Holmesglen, Chadstone
     Marketing: FT0.5
                                                                                advanced standing. Graduates from the Advanced Diploma are
   » Diploma of Management/Diploma of Marketing: FT1                            guaranteed direct entry into the Holmesglen Business (Marketing                      66471 (VGF), 66474 (Fee type determined by provider)
   » Advanced Diploma of Management/Advanced Diploma                            Management) Degree with up to 1.5 years advanced standing.                           » Certificate IV in Marketing/Certificate IV in Advertising:
     of Marketing: FT1.5                                                        This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level                    FT0.5
                                                                                qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic                    » Diploma of Marketing/Diploma of Advertising: FT1
   Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                        progress, to the higher qualification levels.                                        » Advanced Diploma of Marketing/Advanced Diploma of
   66131 (VGF), 66134 (Fee type determined by provider)                         Major studies: Advertising, Advertising marketing, Computer                            Advertising: FT1.5
   » Certificate IV in Frontline Management/Certificate IV in                   applications, Distribution and logistics, Finance, International                     About the course: This dual award program provides students
     Marketing: FT0.5                                                           marketing, Law (contract), Law (marketing), Marketing, Marketing                     with skills in the related fields of marketing and advertising. The
   » Diploma of Management/Diploma of Marketing: FT1                            (direct marketing), Marketing (retail), Marketing (small business),                  dual qualification includes Cert IV in Business (Sales), Cert IV in
                                                                                Marketing management, Marketing research, Marketing strategy,                        Marketing, Cert IV in Advertising, Diploma of Marketing and the
   » Advanced Diploma of Management/Advanced Diploma                            Promotions and marketing, Sales marketing, Services marketing,
     of Marketing: FT1.5 - CANCELLED                                                                                                                                 Diploma of Advertising, Advanced Diploma of Business (Marketing)
                                                                                Sustainability.                                                                      and Advanced Diploma of Business (Advertising).. Students are
   About the course: Students will acquire advanced skills,
                                                                                Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    given the opportunity to work on industry projects allowing them
   preparing them for roles involving the management of marketing
                                                                                Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                     to develop practical skills in media plans, advertising campaigns,
   resources, general supervisory tasks, management activities
                                                                                                                                                                     developing business websites and business plans. Graduates
   or front-line management. The Dual qualification includes                    Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                                     from the Advanced Diploma are guaranteed direct entry into
   Certificate IV in Business or Front-line Management, Certificate             Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                        the Holmesglen business degree (Marketing Management) with
   IV in Marketing, Diploma in Marketing, Advanced Diploma in                   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              up to 1.5 years advanced standing. This is a Pathway Program.
   Management and the Advanced Diploma in Marketing. Graduates
                                                                                                                                                                     You will be enrolled in the lowest level qualification and will
   from the Diploma are guaranteed direct entry into the Bachelor of
   Business (Administration) or the Bachelor of Business (Marketing        Marketing Management (Degree)                                                            progress, subject to satisfactory academic progress, to the higher
                                                                                                                                                                     qualification levels.
   Management) with up to one year advanced standing. Graduates
   from the Advanced Diploma are guaranteed direct entry into the               Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                Major studies: Accounting, Advertising, Advertising
   Bachelor of Business (Administration) or the Bachelor of Business                                                                                                 communication, Advertising media planning, Advertising
                                                                                 61632 (DFP)
   (Marketing Management) with up to 1.5 years advanced standing.                                                                                                    production, Advertising research, Computer applications,
   This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level
                                                                                » Bachelor of Business (Marketing Management): FT3                                   Copywriting, Law, Marketing (promotions), Marketing (services),
   qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic            About the course: The Bachelor of Business (Marketing                                Marketing (small business), Marketing management, Marketing
   progress, to the higher qualification levels.                                Management) equips graduates with a balanced view of the total                       research, Marketing strategy, Promotions and marketing, Web
                                                                                role of marketing, enabling them to immediately be functional                        development.
   Major studies: Advertising, Business planning, Employment law,               within the workplace. The inclusion of subjects in professional
   Finance, Law (business), Marketing, Marketing (direct marketing),                                                                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                selling, sales management, advertising and promotions
   Marketing management, Marketing research, Planning and                                                                                                            Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.
                                                                                management, together with an emphasis on the practical
   administration, Project management, Promotions and marketing,                application of theory and concepts throughout the degree provides                    Extra requirements:
   Promotions and sales, Risk assessment, Risk management, Sales                students with a broad based understanding of business and                            Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   and marketing, Strategic management, Strategic marketing,                    marketing management.                                                                telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   Strategic studies, Sustainability.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Selection mode: Interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.

                                                                         CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
208 | VTAC Guide 2012                                              KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
n Massage/Myotherapy                                                           Major studies: Anatomy, Biochemistry, Business skills, Chemistry       Police check: Students must complete a National Police Records
                                                                               (organic), Dietary and nutritional studies, First aid, Health          Check.
                                                                               promotion, Herbal medicine, Homeopathy, Massage, Naturopathy,          WWC check: Students must hold a valid Working With Children
  Holmesglen, Waverley                                                         Nutrition, Pathophysiology, Physiology, Professional practice,         card before undertaking clinical placements.
   61441 (VGF), 61444 (Fee type determined by provider)                        Small business management.
                                                                                                                                                      Health: Students must be prepared to declare their health and
  » Certificate IV in Massage Therapy Practice: FT.5                           Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                      immunisation status.
  » Diploma of Remedial Massage: FT1.5                                         Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
  » Advanced Diploma of Remedial Massage (Myotherapy):                         specifics.                                                          n Nursing (Enrolled Nursing)
    FT2.5                                                                      Extra requirements:
  About the course: As a remedial massage student you will                     Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
  learn how to deliver a remedial massage treatment that seeks                                                                                        Holmesglen, Moorabbin
                                                                               page 21).
  out the source of the patient’s pain and discomfort. You will use                                                                                   66521 (VGF), 66524 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                               Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
  a variety of remedial massage skills which are based upon a                                                                                         » Diploma of Nursing (Enrolled/Division 2 nursing): FT1.5
                                                                               telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
  comprehensive knowledge base of anatomy, physiology, pathology                                                                                      About the course: This course will enable students to interact
  and musculoskeletal assessment. This course will require the                 Additional information: It is recommended that applicants
                                                                                                                                                      competently and professionally with other health professionals
  completion of vocational placement.                                          attend an information session on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and
                                                                                                                                                      within acute and non-acute environments. During the course,
                                                                               Change of Preference information session on 13 December at
  As a Myotherapy student you will learn to administer advanced                                                                                       students will be exposed to different health care environments
                                                                               6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 1699.
  treatments that can be utilised to treat acute and chronic                                                                                          including aged care, mental health care, rehabilitation, paediatric
  conditions, as well as in the area of preventative management and                                                                                   and acute settings. The course incorporates theoretical and clinical
  rehabilitative exercises. A distinguishing feature of Myotherapy          n Nursing (Degree)                                                        learning activities and clinical placement is a key component. On
  is the clinical reasoning used, in which standard methods                                                                                           completion of the course successful students are eligible to apply
  of evaluation are used, such as orthopaedic tests, postural                  Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                  to the Nursing & Midwifery Board of Australia for registration.
  assessment, neurological and functional testing and evaluation.                                                                                     Major studies: Aged care nursing, Community nursing, First aid,
                                                                               66191 (CSP)
  This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level                                                                                 General nursing, Health, Human biology, Indigenous health, Law,
  qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic            » Bachelor of Nursing: FT3                                             Mental health nursing, Occupational health and safety, Paediatrics,
  progress, to the higher qualification levels.                                About the course: This is an innovative and contemporary               Pathology, Pharmacology, Rehabilitation therapies, Society and
                                                                               nursing course designed to produce a graduate with the ability         culture.
  Major studies: Anatomy, Assessment, Biomechanics, Day spa
                                                                               to function competently within a dynamic field of professional
  treatments, First aid, Lymphatic drainage, Lymphatic massage,                                                                                       Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                               practice. The course is underpinned by a philosophy of person-
  Massage, Massage therapy, Nutrition, Pathology, Physiology,                                                                                         Selection mode: Form, Interview and test. See extra
                                                                               centred and holistic care, and focuses on professional nursing
  Practical placement, Professional practice, Remedial massage,                                                                                       requirements for specifics.
                                                                               practice and theory.
  Remedial therapy, Research methods, Sports therapy, Therapeutic
                                                                               Students are prepared for practice through a combination of            Extra requirements:
  massage.
                                                                               on-campus theory, skill laboratories and simulation activities.        Form: Applicants must complete a Nursing (Enrolled)
  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                               Clinical practicum forms an integral component of the degree and       Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/
  Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                  students are exposed to nursing practice early within the course.      applicationforms). Forms can also be obtained on Open Day, 20
  specifics.                                                                   The range of clinical placements offered within the curriculum         August.
  Extra requirements:                                                          reflect the diverse roles of nursing today.                            Interview: Please telephone (03) 9209 5606 to arrange an
  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                On completion of the course successful students are eligible           interview. Interviews will be held in December.
  page 21).                                                                    to apply to the Nursing & Midwifery Board of Australia for             Test: Applicants must complete a VETASSESS Nursing Test by
  Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                registration.                                                          November 2011. Details can be obtained from the VETASSESS
  telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                      Major studies: Aged care, Anatomy and physiology, Community            website (www.vetassess.com.au). All applicants are responsible
  Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                    care, Ethics, Law, Management, Mental health, Microbiology,            for faxing a copy of the “VETASSESS Statement of test scores and
  attend an information session on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and              Nursing, Psychology, Rehabilitation, Sociology.                        outcomes to (03) 9209 5622.
  Change of Preference information session on 13 December at                   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–mathematics (any), and a study            SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
  6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 1699.                          score of at least 25 in English (any).                                 Police check: Students must complete a National Police Records
                                                                               Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, form and interview. NONY12:                Check.
n Naturopathy                                                                  form, interview and STAT (see page 36). See Extra requirements         WWC check: Students must hold a valid Working With Children
                                                                               for specifics.                                                         card before undertaking clinical placements.
  Holmesglen, Waverley                                                         Extra requirements:                                                    Health: Students must be prepared to declare their health and
   61541 (VGF), 61544 (Fee type determined by provider)                        CY12                                                                   immunisation status.
  » Advanced Diploma of Naturopathy/Advanced Diploma                           Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor of Nursing
    in Nutritional Medicine/Advanced Diploma in Western                        application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms) by        n Outdoor Recreation/Sustainability
    Herbal Medicine: FT3                                                       16 December.
  About the course: On completion of this extensive Advanced                   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by          Holmesglen, Waverley
  Diploma program graduates will have gained a variety of                      telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
                                                                                                                                                      61301 (VGF), 61304 (Fee type determined by provider)
  specialised skills in the natural healing sector. Students will learn a      NONY12
  holistic natural approach to helping clients live happier, healthier                                                                                » Diploma of Outdoor Recreation/Diploma of
                                                                               Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Bachelor of Nursing          Sustainability: FT2
  lives. Being highly skilled in both Nutritional medicine and the use         application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms) by
  of herbs graduates will be applying skills generated over hundreds                                                                                  About the course: This course prepares students for the outdoor
                                                                               16 December.
  of years experience to restore health and vitality to the human                                                                                     recreation industry. The course focuses on giving the students a
                                                                               Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by          wide range of outdoor activity training to a high level, as well as
  body. Upon completion graduates will be able to manipulate
                                                                               telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                developing group management and leadership skills. The course
  clients’ diets to prevent disease and improve their quality of life.
  You will understand the impact of vitamins, minerals, and complex            Test: Applicants must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page      content focuses around developing the capabilities required
  herbs on the day to day functioning of the human body.                       36)                                                                    to plan and deliver an outdoor recreation program for a wide
                                                                               SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                  range of clientele. Specific skills developed can be in the areas
                                                                                                                                                      of bush walking, canoeing, rafting, sea kayaking, climbing, cross


                                                                                                                                                                                   Holmesglen | 209
n Higher Education qualification                           n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                              n Other Graduates

   country skiing, risk management, trip planning and navigation.          n Professional Writing & Editing                                                     n Screen and Media (Live Action)
   Students are required to complete a number of vocational practical
   placements. Please note the Outdoor Recreation Training Package
   is undergoing review and the course content may change.
                                                                                 Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                Holmesglen, Waverley
   Whilst studying the Outdoor Recreation program students will
                                                                                  61651 (VGF), 61654 (Fee type determined by provider)                                61291 (VGF), 61294 (Fee type determined by provider)
   complete four (4) additional specialist ‘Sustainability’ units which          » Certificate IV in Professional Writing and Editing: FT1                            » Diploma of Screen and Media: FT1
   are offered through online delivery. Upon successful completion               » Diploma of Professional Writing and Editing: FT2                                   » Advanced Diploma of Screen and Media: FT2
   of these units you will be entitled to the award of Diploma of                About the course: Develops writing, editing and print production                     About the course: The Advanced Diploma of Screen and Media
   Sustainability.                                                               skills in a structured and creative environment for emerging                         focuses on providing a range of industry relevant skills in all stages
   Major studies: Bushwalking, Canoeing, First aid, Guiding,                     writers and editors. This course allows students to choose to                        of pre-production, production and post-production. The course
   Mountain biking, Outdoor leadership and guiding, Outdoor                      specialise in writing for a range of different audiences. Delivery                   offers a blend of film theory, HD video production, documentation
   recreation, Rock climbing and abseiling, Sea kayaking.                        is classroom based, it may include workshopping, individual and                      and planning processes, equipment handling procedures,
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                             group work, production of publications.                                              computer post production skills and special effects. Students are
                                                                                 This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level                  trained in scriptwriting, and guided through the processes of
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
                                                                                 qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic                    developing the script into a screen production. Students work in
   specifics.
                                                                                 progress, to the higher qualification level.                                         groups to produce several video productions over the duration of
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                the course and are given access to a range of professional level HD
                                                                                 Major studies: Editing, Feature writing, Fiction writing,
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                                                                                                      cameras, lighting and audio equipment. The course has industry
                                                                                 Journalism, Non-fiction writing, Performance writing, Poetry,
   page 21).                                                                                                                                                          relevant script writing, theoretical and business units to provide a
                                                                                 Publishing (print), Screenplay, Scriptwriting, Writing (children and
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                                                                                                      well rounded skill-set targeted at employment in the field.
                                                                                 young adults).
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                                                                                                            This is a Pathway Program. You will be enrolled in the lowest level
                                                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                                                                                                          qualification and will progress, subject to satisfactory academic
                                                                                 Selection mode: Form, sample of writing, interview. See Extra                        progress, to the higher qualification level.
   attend an information session on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and
                                                                                 requirements for specifics.
   Change of Preference information session on 13 December at                                                                                                         Major studies: Audio production, Editing, Film and television
   6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 1699.                           Extra requirements:                                                                  (production), Film and video, Lighting, Media, Media studies,
                                                                                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Professional                             Production planning, Production processes, Recording/mixing
                                                                                 Writing and Editing Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.                            processes, Screen and media production, Scriptwriting, Sound
n Printing and Graphic Arts (Digital                                             au/applicationforms) with a sample of writing by 28 October.                         recording and production, Special effects, Television/studio
  Production)                                                                    Applicants can also request the form by telephone, (03) 9564 1602.                   production, Video, Video content creation, Video production.
                                                                                 Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                        Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Holmesglen, Waverley                                                          telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
   61501 (VGF), 61504 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                                               specifics.
   » Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts (Digital                         n Science                                                                                  Extra requirements:
     Production): FT1                                                                                                                                                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Screen and Media
   About the course: This course provides vocational training for                Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                                form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can
   those who currently work or wish to seek employment in the                     61431 (VGF), 61434 (Fee type determined by provider)                                request the form by telephone (03) 9564 6254.
   digital production environment of pre-press as an electronic                                                                                                       Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9564 6254 to arrange
   publisher or in the printing industry as a pre-press operator.                » Certificate IV in Science: FT1
                                                                                                                                                                      an interview. Interviews are held in November or December.
   Students gain a thorough understanding of the design process,                 About the course: Provides general science training for students
   typography, layout and post-press operations.                                 wishing to enter and succeed in a tertiary science course. The
   The course provides practical experience in the application of                Certificate IV in Science is ideal for students requiring science              n Screen and Media (Radio and TV)
   industry standard software to create digital artwork for the print,           subjects they have not previously completed in order to study
   graphic arts and multimedia sector. This qualification may appeal             further tertiary courses, or students returning to study who need                    Holmesglen, Chadstone
   to individuals who have acquired lower level qualification skills in          science subjects for further tertiary studies. The qualification
                                                                                 comprises core competencies and a selection of electives and the
                                                                                                                                                                      61641 (VGF), 61644 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Graphic Prepress, Graphic Design Production or Multimedia.
                                                                                 pathway to the Certificate IV in Science incorporates competencies                   » Diploma of Screen and Media: FT1
   Major studies: Business (operations), Colour management                       from the Certificate III in Science. Contact the institution for                     About the course: The Diploma of Screen and Media (Radio
   (printing), Communications, Customer service, Database                        pathway advice. The course is run four days a week (Monday                           and TV) offers a comprehensive introduction to the industry skills
   management, Digital image processing, Digital imaging, Digital                to Thursday). Classes are conducted in classrooms, chemistry                         required to produce and present radio and television programs.
   imposition (pre-press), Digital media, Digital printing, Estimating,          and biology laboratories and computer rooms. Students learn                          Students engage in practical studies relevant to both mediums
   Occupational health and safety, Pre-press, Printing processes,                researching, communication and job seeking skills, occupational                      such as researching and writing content, conducting interviews,
   Printmedia, Production planning, Quality control, Workplace                   health and safety in addition to the major study areas listed below.                 creating and co-ordinating schedules and rundowns and
   relations.                                                                                                                                                         presenting information on air. Students also study core theoretical
                                                                                 Major studies: Biology, Chemistry, Communications, Computing,
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                             Mathematics, Physics.                                                                content such as media law, establishing networks, managing and
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                                                                                                        promoting projects.
                                                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   specifics.                                                                                                                                                         Students also learn specialist skills for radio by creating and
                                                                                 Selection mode: ATAR, interview, form. See Extra requirements
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                producing regular radio shows and segments - including audio
                                                                                 for specifics.
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Digital Media                                                                                                          production and mixing, panelling and live presentation.
                                                                                 Extra requirements:
   Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms).                                                                                                         As well, students learn specialist skills for television by creating
   Applicants can also request the form by telephone (03) 9564 6254.             Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Science                                  and producing episodes of HIT TV for Channel 31 where they film
                                                                                 Supplementary Application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/                               and edit a wide range content, participate in multi-cam studio
   Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9564 6254 to arrange                applicationforms). Applicants can also request the form by
   an interview. Interviews are held in November and December.                                                                                                        shoots and deliver a broadcast standard online edit to a deadline.
                                                                                 telephone, (03) 95641641.
                                                                                                                                                                      Major studies: Audio production, Broadcasting (radio),
                                                                                 Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                        Broadcasting (television), Editing, Film and television (production),
                                                                                 telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                              Film and video, Media, Media studies, Production planning,
                                                                                                                                                                      Production processes, Radio production, Recording/mixing


                                                                          CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
210 | VTAC Guide 2012                                              KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   processes, Screen and media production, Sound recording and                                                                                             delivery. Underpinning this knowledge is the massage skill base
   production, Television and broadcasting, Television/studio               n Sport (Development)/Sport and                                                which multi skills the successful student and presents broad skill
   production, Video, Video content creation, Video production.               Recreation/Business                                                          options to perspective employers. Travel experiences build on the
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                       competencies delivered, allowing students to apply their skills
                                                                                                                                                           and knowledge within industry. Fares and Ticketing training is
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                 Holmesglen, Moorabbin                                                       conducted within the Simulated Travel Office using Amadeus, a
   specifics.                                                                  66981 (VGF), 66984 (Fee type determined by provider)                        global reservations system for air, car and hotel bookings. There are
   Extra requirements:                                                         » Diploma of Sport (Development)/Diploma of Sport and                       a range of tourism and management specific modules to complete
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Screen and Media                  Recreation/Diploma of Business: FT2                                       over 1.5 years. Modules are presented in varying formats including
   form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can                                                                                           reports, presentations and practical experience in the tourism and
   also request the form by telephone (03) 9564 1602.                          Holmesglen, Waverley                                                        management procedures.
   Interview: Applicants will be contacted by telephone or mail to             61101 (VGF), 61104 (Fee type determined by provider)                        Major studies: Business (accounting), Customer service,
   arrange an interview                                                                                                                                    E-commerce, Ecotourism, Environmental management, Event
                                                                               » Diploma of Sport (Development)/Diploma of Sport and
                                                                                                                                                           management, Human resource management, Marketing, Meetings
                                                                                 Recreation/Diploma of Business: FT2
n Screen Production (Live Action) (Degree)                                                                                                                 and conventions management, Natural resource management,
                                                                               About the course: This course prepares students for employment              Project management, Tourism, Tourism (attractions and theme
                                                                               within the sport and recreation industry. It includes significant skill     parks), Tourism (tour wholesaling), Tourism (visitor information
   Holmesglen, Waverley                                                        development and learning within sports administration, sports               services), Tourism (wine), Tourism management, Travel and
   61552 (DFP)                                                                 coaching, marketing, management and officiating. The course is              tourism management, Travel sales (domestic & international).
                                                                               delivered over two years and allows students to develop extensive
   » Bachelor of Screen Production (Live Action): FT3                          career opportunities within sports administration, sports coaching          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   About the course: The Bachelor of Screen Production (live action)           and management of sports venues and facilities. Additional                  Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
   is a three year course which provides students with the skills              business modules including finance, marketing and management                specifics.
   required for employment in screen production. It offers a blend of          enable students to broaden their career scope and on successful             Extra requirements:
   practical skills and theory, providing opportunities for students to        completion will be eligible for a Diploma of Business. Please note          Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   experience the conditions of the Australian screen industry. The            the Sport Training Package is undergoing review and the course              page 21).
   course covers areas such as the history of film, scripting and pre-         content may change.
   production skills, production techniques and crew roles, industry                                                                                       Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
                                                                               Successful completion may lead to employment in leisure centres,            telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   organisations and legal requirements of the industry, direction
                                                                               aquatic centres, outdoor sporting venues, managing competitions
   of performers, special effects, lighting, audio, computer editing                                                                                       Additional information: It is recommended that applicants
                                                                               or as a sports trainer.
   techniques, and promotion of films. Course content also covers                                                                                          attend an information session at Moorabbin on 12 October at
   the required skills for drama and documentary production and                Major studies: First aid, Management, Marketing, Recreation                 6.00pm or at Waverley on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and Change
   provides training relevant to both film and television. The course          (community recreation), Sport, Sport (development), Sport and               of Preference information session at Waverley campus only on 13
   has an emphasis on practical skills, but also provides substantial          recreation, Sports (coaching).                                              December at 6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 1699.
   tuition in business, theoretical awareness and story writing skills to      Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   enhance the overall range of industry relevant content.                     Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for               n Tourism/Massage
   Major studies: Audio production, Cinema studies, Editing, Film              specifics.
   and television (production), Film and video, Lighting, Production           Extra requirements:
   planning, Production processes, Screen and media production,
                                                                                                                                                           Holmesglen, Waverley
                                                                               Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                61811 (VGF), 61814 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Scriptwriting, Sound recording and production, Special effects,             page 21).
   Video content creation, Video production.                                                                                                               » Diploma of Tourism/Certificate IV in Massage Therapy
                                                                               Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                         Practice: FT1.5 - CANCELLED
                                                                               telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.
   Selection mode: Pre-selection kit, interview. See Extra                                                                                                 About the course: This program provides students with
                                                                               Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                   vocational skills in related fields of tourism and massage which
   requirements for specifics.                                                 attend an information session at Moorabbin on 12 October at                 are desirable for the demands of today’s tourism industry,
   Extra requirements:                                                         6.00pm or at Waverley on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and Change              particularly in the resort, spa and passenger ship sectors. This
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a Pre-selection kit               of Preference information session at Waverley campus only on 13             course will attract individuals interested in understanding a
   (including Screen Production Supplementary Application form)                December at 6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 1699.             broad cross-section of operators and agencies in the tourism
   (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms). Applicants can                                                                                                industry and wishing to work in a range of skill areas. Students
   also request the pre-selection kit by telephone (03) 9564 6254.          n Tourism/Management                                                           progressively complete units which deal with the operational
   Interview: Applicants must telephone (03) 9564 6254 for further                                                                                         elements of trip planning, pricing and booking and service
   information regarding an interview.                                                                                                                     delivery. Underpinning this knowledge is the massage skill base
                                                                               Holmesglen, Moorabbin
                                                                                                                                                           which multi skills the successful student and presents broad skill
                                                                               66211 (VGF), 66214 (Fee type determined by provider)                        options to perspective employers. Travel experiences build on the
                                                                               » Diploma of Tourism/Diploma of Management: FT1.5                           competencies delivered, allowing students to apply their skills
                                                                                                                                                           and knowledge within industry. Fares and Ticketing training is
                                                                               Holmesglen, Waverley                                                        conducted within the Simulated Travel Office using Amadeus, a
                                                                               61511 (VGF), 61514 (Fee type determined by provider)                        global reservations system for air, car and hotel bookings. There are
                                                                                                                                                           a range of tourism and management specific modules to complete
                                                                               » Diploma of Tourism/Diploma of Management: FT1.5
                                                                                                                                                           over 1.5 years. Modules are presented in varying formats including
                                                                               About the course: This program provides students with                       reports, presentations and practical experience in the tourism and
                                                                               vocational skills in related fields of tourism and massage which            management procedures.
                                                                               are desirable for the demands of today’s tourism industry,
                                                                               particularly in the resort, spa and passenger ship sectors. This            Major studies: Anatomy , Basic Assessment , Biomechanics ,
                                                                               course will attract individuals interested in understanding a               Business (accounting), Customer service, Day spa treatments ,
                                                                               broad cross-section of operators and agencies in the tourism                E-commerce, Environmental management, First aid , Human
                                                                               industry and wishing to work in a range of skill areas. Students            resource management, Lymphatic massage , Marketing,
                                                                               progressively complete units which deal with the operational                Massage , Massage therapy , Natural resource management,
                                                                               elements of trip planning, pricing and booking and service                  Nutrition , Pathology , Physiology , Professional practice, Project
                                                                                                                                                           management, Remedial massage , Remedial therapy , Research


                                                                                                                                                                                        Holmesglen | 211
n Higher Education qualification                          n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                              n Other Graduates

   methods, Sports therapy , Therapeutic massage, Tourism                 n Youth Work
   (attractions and theme parks), Tourism (tour wholesaling) ,
   Tourism (visitor information services) , Tourism management ,
   Travel and tourism management , Travel sales (domestic and
                                                                                Holmesglen, Moorabbin
   international).                                                               66001 (VGF), 66004 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                            » Certificate IV in Youth Work: FT1
   Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for                  About the course: This qualification is designed to develop
   specifics.                                                                   competencies in workers who develop and facilitate programs
                                                                                for young people. Students are exposed to a range of youth work
   Extra requirements:
                                                                                areas and are trained to work with a variety of clients in a range
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                of situations. Successful completion of this Certificate IV leads into
   page 21).                                                                    the Diploma of Youth Work. Graduates of the Certificate IV can
   Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by                seek employment in variety of occupations including: Community
   telephone or mail to the applicants required to attend.                      development worker (youth), Residential support worker, Youth
   Additional information: It is recommended that applicants                    case worker or residential care worker.
   attend an information session on 11 October at 6.00pm. Late and              Major studies: Community studies, Occupational health and
   Change of Preference information session on 13 December at                   safety, Written communication, Youth work.
   6.00pm. For more information please call 9564 1699.                          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                Selection mode: Form, interview. See Extra requirements for
n Visual Arts and Contemporary Craft                                            specifics.
                                                                                Extra requirements:
   Holmesglen, Chadstone                                                        Form: All applicants must complete and submit a Youth Work
   61351 (VGF), 61354 (Fee type determined by provider)                         application form (www.holmesglen.edu.au/applicationforms).
   » Certificate IV in Visual Arts and Contemporary Craft: FT1                  Interview: Details will be provided by telephone or mail. Applicants
   About the course: This course provides students with a                       must attend in November, December or January.
   recognized qualification composed of core subjects, which are                Additional information: Applicants are strongly advised to
   designed to develop artistic expression, creativity and competence.          attend the information session to be held at the Moorabbin
   The full-time course is delivered over a year and introduces skills          campus on 11 October between 6.30-8.30 pm.
   in composition, construction techniques, media applications and
   aesthetic appreciation. Students work in a professional studio
   environment with highly experienced and supportive staff. The
   course provides an opportunity for individual development and
   levels of inquiry into artistic processes, creative awareness and
   aptitude. Students will be able to augment their portfolio of work
   for application to higher levels of education.
   Major studies: Art history, Bronze casting, Business skills,
   Ceramics, Digital media, Drawing, Exhibition management,
   Painting, Photography, Photography (art), Photography
   (commercial), Printmaking, Public art, Sculpture, Visual arts.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Selection mode: Interview and presentation of a folio of art
   works. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   Extra requirements:
   Interview and folio presentation: Applicants must telephone (03)
   9564 1602 for details by 5 November. Applicants must attend an
   interview in mid-November to mid-December.




                                                                         CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
212 | VTAC Guide 2012                                             KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
                                                                                                 International College of Hotel Management
                                                              Located in Adelaide and attracting students from over 75 countries,
                                                              ICHM combines over 100 years of Swiss hotel knowledge, with world             Courses available through VTAC
                                                              class education and accommodation facilities, international business
                                                              studies and extensive paid work experience as part of the course.             n International Hotel Management
                                                              ICHM was the first school outside Europe to offer the prestigious and
                                                              internationally recognised Swiss Hotel Association Diploma (accredited           ICHM, Regency Park SA
                                                              as Vocational Graduate Diploma of International Hotel Management
                                                              (Swiss Hotel Association)). Further study leads to the ICHM Bachelor of          93802 (DFP), 93803 (IFP)
                                                              International Hotel Management with articulation to Master degrees               » Bachelor of International Hotel Management: FT4
                                                              around the world. On campus, students cover all aspects of hotel                 » Vocational Graduate Diploma of International Hotel
                                                              operations and management. The course provides many opportunities                  Management (Swiss Hotel Association): FT3
                                                              for students to work in both simulated and real hospitality situations to        About the course: Vocational Graduate Diploma is offered in
                                                              learn skills the industry demands. ICHM requires that internships make           association with the Swiss Hotel Association. The ICHM Bachelor
                                                              up to 50% of the total program. Worldwide internships are possible               degree is available after a further six to twelve months study.
                                                              with locations depending on the student’s preferences, passport and              Combines both practical and hands-on knowledge with academic
                                                              language skills. Specialist Internship Managers ensure quality positions         skills required by modern hotel managers. Each year consists of
                                                              for ICHM students and also provide ongoing career counselling and job            twenty-three weeks academic semester on-campus and a twenty-
                                                              placement assistance. ICHM graduates are working as supervisors and              week industry placement (paid) arranged by the college. Practical
                                                              specialists through to senior and general managers. Their employers              experience is up to 2,100 hours over three years. ICHM has two
                                                              range from boutique establishments to large multinational hotels and             course intakes a year, January and July.
                                                              resorts, casinos, airlines and other hospitality-related organisations also
                                                                                                                                               Major studies: Accounting, Business (management), Food
  Campus location and contacts                                head hunt our graduates. Others have established their own hospitality
                                                                                                                                               and beverage management, Food and beverage production,
                                                              industry businesses and consultancies.
Days Road                                                                                                                                      Food and beverage service, Food handling, Hospitality and
                                                              ICHM students have access to some of the most modern and extensive               tourism, Hospitality sales and marketing, Hotel management,
Regency Park SA 5010                                          facilities in Australia. Teaching facilities include tutorial rooms, public      Hotel operations management, Human resource management,
                                                              restaurant and function centre, simulated hotel front office and guest           Information technology, Marketing.
Admissions Officer                                            rooms, computer labs, wine appreciation labs, fully equipped teaching
Toll free: 1800 246 875                                                                                                                        Prerequisites: A minimum ATAR of 65. Units 3 and 4– a study
                                                              kitchens and bars.
Telephone: 08 8228 3636                                                                                                                        score of at least 30 in English (ESL) and 25 in any other English.
Fax: 08 8228 3684                                             Minimum tertiary entrance requirements                                           Selection mode: Form. See Extra requirements for specifics.
email: admissions@ichm.edu.au                                 See page 7.                                                                      Extra requirements:
www.ichm.edu.au                                                                                                                                Those who lodge their applications late or wish to add this course
                                                              Comparable qualifications                                                        at Change of Preference must first telephone 1800 246 875.
                                                              Applicants may be admitted to the course on the basis of qualifications          Applicants must complete and submit an ICHM form available at
  Open days:                                                  deemed to be the equivalent of VCE. These include qualifications at              www.ichm.edu.au by 9 December.
                                                              either secondary or tertiary level (including TAFE) obtained in Victoria,
7 August (2.00 pm – 4.00 pm)                                  interstate or overseas. Comparable qualifications could include
                                                              satisfactory completion of two university subjects or the satisfactory
  Semester dates:                                             completion of one year of TAFE study at Certificate IV level or higher.

Semester 1: 30 January – 6 July                               Course fees
Semester 2: 16 July – 14 December                             Fees vary in accordance with each course. Please contact the Admissions
                                                              Office or our website for more details.

  Fees:                                                       Student services
                                                              ICHM provides student counsellor services, industry placement managers,
For further information about fees for these courses go to:   an on campus medical clinic and a 24 hour computer suite with email
http://ichm.edu.au/entry/fees-2011/ichm-fees-2011             and internet. In addition to the orientation program, a recreation officer
                                                              organises an extensive program of social activities and excursions each
                                                              semester. The cultural needs of our students are always considered.

                                                              Facilities
                                                              On campus sporting facilities include tennis, basketball and volleyball
                                                              courts and a gym. Off campus there is a public golf course and sports
                                                              field within walking distance. There is a common room which has cable
                                                              television, pool and table tennis tables. There is also a cafeteria, coffee
                                                              shop, bar, and ATM.

                                                              Further Information
                                                              Detailed course information can be obtained from the Admission Office
                                                              or from www.ichm.edu.au
                                                              CRICOS Provider code 02914G ICHM Pty Ltd




                                                                                                                              Institutional and Course Information | 213
JMC Academy
                                                              Established in 1982, the JMC Academy was originally founded to meet          The JMC Academy offers a unique learning environment where
                                                              the demand for qualified professionals in the entertainment industry.        essential critical level thinking and production based experiences is
                                                              Today, the JMC Academy is Australia’s leading private education and          seamlessly combined with professional hands-on training, ensuring
                                                              training provider for the Creative Industries.                               students a sustainable and rewarding career in their chosen field.
                                                              The Creative Industries is one of the world’s fastest growing global
                                                              economic sectors and the demand for skilled professionals and                Minimum tertiary entrance requirements
                                                              content creators in the fields of multimedia, animation, performance,        See page 7.
                                                              film, television, writing and composition is growing, generating new
                                                              career opportunities.                                                        Course Fees
                                                              With campuses in Melbourne, Brisbane and Sydney the JMC Academy              Fees vary between courses. All higher education courses are FEE-HELP
                                                              delivers courses in:                                                         approved. For more information contact Student Recruitment and
                                                                                                                                           Admissions on (03) 9696 4117.
                                                              Digital Television Production, Digital Media and 3D Animation, Music
                                                              and Entertainment Business Management, Audio Engineering and                 Student Services
                                                              Sound Production, Popular Music and Performance.
                                                                                                                                           JMC offers a range of student support including career advice,
                                                              All courses are available at a Diploma, Associate Degree and Bachelor        accommodation information and study support.
                                                              Degree level, enabling students to pursue their interests and talents to
                                                              the highest possible standard. These courses are also eligible for FEE-      Further information
                                                              HELP and are Austudy approved.
                                                                                                                                           Campus Transfers
                                                              The JMC Academy’s course curriculums and exclusive Integration
                                                                                                                                           Students also have the option of enrolling at the Sydney or Brisbane
                                                              Program are structured to reflect the diverse and interrelated networks
  Campus location and contacts                                that underpin these multi-faceted Creative Industries.
                                                                                                                                           campuses, or transferring between campuses during their course.

                                                              The JMC Academy is dedicated to ensuring their students perform
Melbourne campus
171 Bank Street                                               well in their chosen careers. As such, we ensure they are given
South Melbourne VIC 3205                                      unprecedented access to proven academic professionals and to
                                                              comparable industry-standard technology and equipment.
Student Recruitment and Admissions
Telephone: (03) 9696 4117
Fax: (03) 9696 2520                                           Courses available through VTAC
email: melbourne@jmc.edu.au
www.jmcacademy.edu.au                                         n Audio Engineering and Sound Production                                     n Audio Engineering and Sound Production
CRICOS Provider Code: 02386E                                                                                                                 (Associate Degree)
                                                                   JMCA, South Melbourne
  Open days:                                                        95052 (DFP), 95053 (IFP)                                                    JMCA, South Melbourne
Melbourne: 18 August                                               » Diploma of Audio Engineering and Sound Production:                         95372 (DFP), 95373 (IFP)
                                                                     FT1                                                                        » Associate Degree of Audio Engineering and Sound
                                                                   About the course: This course provides in-depth knowledge                      Production: FT2
  Semester dates:                                                  into the operational and technical aspects of the audio production           About the course: Applied studies in audio engineering theory
March Intake: 27 February                                          industry, with particular emphasis on production, editing,                   and contemporary sound production practice including acoustics,
                                                                   recording and mixing. During the course, students undertake                  studio and live recording, format mastering, production and
June Intake: 25 June
                                                                   studies in both analogue and digital recording, studio operation,            post-production audio. Theoretical knowledge is consolidated
                                                                   live PA, electronics, music editing for picture, and midi sequencing.        by practical sessions in professional recording studios and in live
                                                                   Major studies: Audio engineering, Digital audio, Editing,                    environments. Students from all JMC programs collaborate on
  Fees:                                                            Electronics, Music industry, Music production analysis, Music                several projects throughout the course, providing unique learning
                                                                   technology, Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI),                     experiences and networking opportunities. Two years (four
For further information about fees for these courses go to:        Production planning, Production processes, Recording/mixing                  academic semesters).
http://www.jmcacademy.edu.au/fees                                  processes, Signal processing, Sound recording and production.                Major studies: Audio engineering, Business practice, Editing,
                                                                   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                            Electronics, Law (copyright), Management, Music (publishing),
                                                                   Selection mode: Interview and academic record. See Extra                     Music industry, Music production analysis, Music technology, Post-
                                                                   requirements for specifics.                                                  production and production management, Production planning,
                                                                                                                                                Production processes, Sound recording and production.
                                                                   Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                   Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and
                                                                   Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews             Selection mode: Interview and academic record. See Extra
                                                                   will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16                    Requirements for specifics.
                                                                   December.                                                                    Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and
                                                                                                                                                Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews
                                                                                                                                                will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16
                                                                                                                                                December.




214 | VTAC Guide 2012
n Audio Engineering and Sound Production                                 n Digital Animation (Associate Degree)                                  n Digital Television Production
  (Degree)
                                                                            JMCA, South Melbourne                                                   JMCA, South Melbourne
   JMCA, South Melbourne                                                    95502 (DFP), 95503 (IFP)                                                95072 (DFP), 95073 (IFP)
   95352 (DFP), 95353 (IFP)                                                 » Associate Degree of Digital Animation: FT2                            » Diploma of Digital Television Production: FT1
   » Bachelor of Creative Technology (Audio Engineering and                 About the course: Applied studies in digital media and 3D               About the course: This hands-on course provides knowledge and
     Sound Production): FT3                                                 animation production and post-production including the                  the skills necessary to work in a multitude of environments and at
   About the course: This course is a professional audio engineering        fundamentals of 2D and 3D animation, web and graphic design,            all levels of the creative, administrative and technical production
   degree, providing advanced expertise in contemporary sound               principles of interactive design and special FX.It also covers 3D       spectrum.
   production practice and applied research including audio system          modelling, texturing, storyboarding and lighting as well as the         Students learn about the broadcast and studio environment,
   design, sound conservation and restoration, advanced studio              creation and integration of sound and vision for the web, DVD and       reality and live television production, documentary and television
   production techniques, format mastering and post-production              portable devices. Students from all JMC programs collaborate on         series production, electronic news gathering, current affairs
   audio. Theoretical knowledge is consolidated by practical sessions       several projects throughout the course, providing unique learning       production and the modern media landscape, and feature film,
   in professional recording studios and in live environments.              experiences and networking opportunities. Two years (4 academic         music video clip and television commercial production.
   Students from all JMC programs collaborate on several projects           semesters).
                                                                                                                                                    Major studies: Audio and video production, Digital television
   throughout the course, providing unique learning experiences and         Major studies: Animation (2D), Animation (3D), Animation                production, Digital video, Directing (Television), Editing, Film
   networking opportunities. Three years (six academic semesters).          (modelling), Animation design and production, Animation                 and media studies, Film and television, Film and television
   Major studies: Audio engineering, Business practice, Digital             software, Animation techniques, Character modelling, Digital            (production), Lighting, Media and communication, Music video
   technology, Editing, Electronics, Music industry, Music production       media, Digital television production, Professional practice,            production, Post-production and production management,
   analysis, Post-production and production management,                     Rendering, Screenwriting, Storyboard illustration.                      Production processes, Screen studies, Screenwriting, Special
   Production processes, Sound art, Sound recording and production.         Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                       effects, Television and broadcasting, Television/studio production,
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 23 in             Selection mode: Interview and academic record. See Extra                Video technical direction.
   English (any).                                                           Requirements for specifics.                                             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and interview. NONY12: Academic               Extra requirements:                                                     Selection mode: Interview and academic record. See Extra
   record and interview. See Extra Requirements for specifics.              Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and              requirements for specifics.
   Extra requirements:                                                      Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews        Extra requirements:
   Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and               will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16               Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and
   Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews         December.                                                               Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews
   will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16                                                                                        will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16
   December.                                                             n Digital Animation (Degree)                                               December.

n Digital Animation                                                         JMCA, South Melbourne                                                n Digital Television Production (Associate
                                                                            95472 (DFP), 95473 (IFP)                                               Degree)
   JMCA, South Melbourne                                                    » Bachelor of Creative Technology (Digital Animation): FT3
   95062 (DFP), 95063 (IFP)                                                 About the course: This course is a professional digital animation       JMCA, South Melbourne
   » Diploma of Digital Animation: FT1                                      degree providing advanced expertise in concept visualisation and        95442 (DFP), 95443 (IFP)
   About the course: This course provides emphasis on drawing, the          cross-disciplinary applications including story telling, character
                                                                                                                                                    » Associate Degree of Digital Television Production: FT2
   role of hardware, colour, sound and movements as prerequisites           and interface design for interactive games and special FX. It also
                                                                                                                                                    About the course: Applied studies in film and television
   to the animation technique. After building a website and                 covers 3D modelling, texturing, storyboarding and lighting as
                                                                                                                                                    production, including team based pre-production planning,
   merging it with flash created content, creating a graphic novella,       well as the creation and integration of sound and vision for the
                                                                                                                                                    camera operation, editing, lighting and directing on the
   and exploring the fundamentals of 3D animation, the course               web, DVD and portable devices. Students from all JMC programs
                                                                                                                                                    production and post production of practical projects such as news
   culminates in a practical production of an animated character            collaborate on several projects throughout the course, providing
                                                                                                                                                    reports, TV commercials and documentaries. Students from all
   within the context of television commercial.                             unique learning experiences and networking opportunities. Three
                                                                                                                                                    JMC programs collaborate on several projects throughout the
                                                                            years (six academic semesters).
   Major studies: Animation (2D), Animation (3D), Animation                                                                                         course, providing unique learning experiences and networking
   (modelling), Animation design and production, Animation                  Major studies: Animation (2D), Animation (3D), Animation                opportunities. Two years (four academic semesters).
   software, Animation techniques, Character modelling, Digital             (modelling), Animation design and production, Animation
                                                                                                                                                    Major studies: Communications, Digital television production,
   animation (games), Digital art and design, Digital media, Digital        software, Character modelling, Digital animation (games), Digital
                                                                                                                                                    Digital video, Directing (Television), Editing, Film, Film and media
   television production, Film and media studies, Graphic design            art and design, Digital media, Digital television production, Film
                                                                                                                                                    studies, Lighting, Music video production, Screenwriting, Sound
   (3D), Interactive media, Scriptwriting, Special effects, Storyboard      and media studies, Graphic design (3D), Interactive multimedia,
                                                                                                                                                    recording, Video technical direction.
   illustration, Web design.                                                Rendering, Screenwriting, Sound recording and production, Special
                                                                            effects, Storyboard illustration, Web design.                           Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                            Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–art or studio arts, and a study score      Selection mode: Interview and academic record. See Extra
   Selection mode: Interview and academic record. See Extra                                                                                         requirements for specifics.
                                                                            of at least 23 in English (any).
   requirements for specifics.
                                                                            Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and interview. NONY12: Academic              Extra requirements:
   Extra requirements:
                                                                            record and interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.             Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and
   Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and                                                                                       Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews
                                                                            Extra requirements:
   Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews                                                                                 will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16
   will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16                Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and
                                                                                                                                                    December.
   December.                                                                Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews
                                                                            will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 17
                                                                            December.




                                                                                                                                                                             JMC Academy | 215
n Higher Education qualification                            n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                              n Other Graduates

n Digital Television Production (Degree)                                    n Entertainment Business Management                                                  n Popular Music and Performance
                                                                              (Associate Degree)
   JMCA, South Melbourne                                                                                                                                               JMCA, South Melbourne
   95432 (DFP), 95433 (IFP)                                                       JMCA, South Melbourne                                                                95092 (DFP), 95093 (IFP)
   » Bachelor of Creative Technology (Digital Television                           95342 (DFP), 95343 (IFP)                                                            » Diploma of Popular Music and Performance: FT1
     Production): FT3                                                             » Associate Degree of Entertainment Business                                         About the course: This course provides students with the primary
   About the course: This course provides students with the                         Management: FT2                                                                    grounding and the ability to explore their creative talents through,
   key theoretical and practical aspects of the film and television               About the course: Applied studies in entertainment business                          musical arrangement, improvisation and performance for stage,
   industry, covering advanced pre-production, production and                     management specialising in artist, band and event management,                        screen and studio. Students also receive extensive training in their
   post-production management and practice. Throughout their                      merchandising and business practices for the media and                               chosen instrument and benefit from a practical mixture of band
   studies students will also cover filming, editing, lighting,                   entertainment industry, with relevance for running any business.                     sessions, performance training sessions and movement classes.
   scriptwriting and cinematography in creating their own music                   Theoretical knowledge is consolidated by practical application                       Major studies: Bass guitar, Drums, Guitar, Human movement,
   videos, documentaries, news reports, short films, commercials                  throughout the course and students from all JMC programs                             Instrumental teaching, Keyboard musicianship, Music
   as well as in the filming and editing of live events. Students from            collaborate on several projects, providing unique learning                           (composition), Music (new media), Music (publishing), Music
   all JMC programs collaborate on several projects throughout the                experiences and networking opportunities. Two years (four                            (writing and arranging), Music history, Music industry, Music
   course, providing unique learning experiences and networking                   academic semesters).                                                                 language and techniques, Music performance, Musical Instrument
   opportunities. Three years (six academic semesters).                                                                                                                Digital Interface (MIDI), Saxophone, Trombone, Trumpet, Vocal
                                                                                  Major studies: Communications, Distribution and logistics, Event
   Major studies: Audio and video production, Digital television                  management, Financial management, Merchandising, Music video                         teaching, Voice.
   production, Directing (Television), Editing, Film, Film and media              production, Promotions and marketing.                                                Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   studies, Film and television, Film and television (production),
                                                                                  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    Selection mode: Interview, audition and academic record. See
   Lighting, Media and communications, Music video production,
                                                                                  Selection mode: Interview and academic record. See Extra                             Extra requirements for specifics.
   Post-production and production management, Production
   processes, Screen studies, Screenwriting, Special effects, Television          requirements for specifics.                                                          Extra requirements:
   and broadcasting, Television/studio production.                                Extra requirements:                                                                  Interview Audition and interview: Applicants must contact
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 23 in                   Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and                           Student Recruitment & Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange
   English (any).                                                                 Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews                     an audition and interview. Auditions will be held from November
                                                                                  will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16                            1- 30, Monday to Friday 9:30am -7pm.
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and interview. NONY12: Academic
   record and interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                    December.
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                           n Popular Music and Performance (Associate
   Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and               n Entertainment Business Management                                                    Degree)
   Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews           (Degree)
   will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 17                                                                                                           JMCA, South Melbourne
   December.                                                                      JMCA, South Melbourne                                                                95382 (DFP), 95383 (IFP)
                                                                                   95482 (DFP), 95483 (IFP)                                                            » Associate Degree of Popular Music and Performance: FT2
n Entertainment Business Management                                               » Bachelor of Entertainment (Business Management): FT3                               About the course: Applied studies in popular music and
                                                                                  About the course: This course provides applied studies in the                        performance with a focus on group production and music business
   JMCA, South Melbourne                                                          theory, practice and research of contemporary entertainment                          and the development of individual creative talents in song writing
   95082 (DFP), 95083 (IFP)                                                       culture and entrepreneurship with a focus on new media                               and arranging, improvisation and stage performance techniques
                                                                                  applications, global trade and marketing opportunities in digital                    for live showcases, on stage, in the studio and in rehearsal rooms.
   » Diploma of Entertainment Business Management: FT1                                                                                                                 Students from all JMC programs collaborate on several projects
   About the course: This course provides students with a solid                   communications, arts and entertainment. Theoretical knowledge
                                                                                  is consolidated by practical application throughout the course                       throughout the course, providing unique learning experiences and
   grounding in the fundamentals of business, copyright, accounting,                                                                                                   networking opportunities. Two years (four academic semesters).
   economics, marketing and copyright law. Additional modules                     and students from all JMC programs collaborate on several
                                                                                  projects, providing unique learning experiences and networking                       Major studies: Bass guitar, Drums, Guitar, Human movement,
   include artist development, the preparation of press releases
                                                                                  opportunities. Three years (six academic semesters).                                 Instrumental teaching, Keyboard musicianship, Music
   and contracts, and the organisation of rehearsals and recording
                                                                                  Major studies: Consumer behaviour, E-business,                                       (composition), Music (new media), Music (publishing), Music
   schedules. Students are taught the fundamentals of total event
                                                                                  Entrepreneurship, Event management, International marketing,                         (writing and arranging), Music history, Music industry, Music
   management including the coordination of budgets, venue
                                                                                  International trade and export, Research methods, Television/                        language and techniques, Music performance, Musical Instrument
   selection and the development of publicity and booking schedules.
                                                                                  studio production.                                                                   Digital Interface (MIDI), Saxophone, Trombone, Trumpet, Vocal
   Major studies: Communication, Consumer behaviour,                                                                                                                   teaching, Voice.
   Distribution and logistics, E-business, Entrepreneurship, Event                Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 23 in
                                                                                  English (any).                                                                       Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   management, Financial management, International marketing,
   International trade and export, Merchandising, Promotions and                  Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and interview. NONY12: Academic                           Selection mode: Audition, interview and academic record. See
   marketing, Research methods.                                                   record and interview. See Extra requirements for specifics.                          Extra requirements for specifics.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                              Extra requirements:                                                                  Extra requirements:
   Selection mode: Interview and academic record. See Extra                       Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and                           Audition and interview: Applicants must contact Student
   requirements for specifics.                                                    Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews                     Recruitment & Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an
                                                                                  will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16                            audition and interview. Auditions will be held November 1 to 30,
   Extra requirements:
                                                                                  December.                                                                            Monday to Friday 9:30am -7pm.
   Interview: Applicants must contact Student Recruitment and
   Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an interview. Interviews
   will be held between 9:30am-7pm Monday to Friday until 16
   December.




                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
216 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
n Popular Music and Performance (Degree)

   JMCA, South Melbourne
   95402 (DFP), 95403 (IFP)
   » Bachelor of Entertainment (Popular Music and
     Performance): FT3
   About the course: This course provides applied studies in the
   theoretical and practical aspects of the contemporary performance
   industry by developing personal music technique, style and
   improvisation with a focus on business skills, self promotion and
   creative career planning in Australia and overseas. Students from
   all JMC programs collaborate on several projects throughout the
   course, providing unique learning experiences and networking
   opportunities. Three years in total (six academic semesters).
   Major studies: Bass guitar, Drums, Guitar, Human movement,
   Instrumental teaching, Keyboard musicianship, Music
   (composition), Music (new media), Music (publishing), Music
   (writing and arranging), Music history, Music language and
   techniques, Music performance, Music theory, Musical Instrument
   Digital Interface (MIDI), Saxophone, Trombone, Trumpet, Vocal
   teaching, Voice.
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–one of music performance (solo),
   music performance (group), music styles or VET Certificate III in
   Music, and a study score of at least 23 in English (any).
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR, audition and interview. NONY12:
   Academic record, audition and interview. See Extra requirements
   for specifics.
   Extra requirements:
   Audition and interview: Applicants must contact Student
   Recruitment & Admissions on (03) 9696 4117 to arrange an
   audition and interview. Auditions will be held November 1 to 30,
   Monday to Friday 9:30am -7pm.




                                                                       JMC Academy | 217
Kangan Institute
                                                                          Kangan Institute offers an extensive range of accredited vocational           Counselling services
                                                                          education and training courses over eight campuses.                           Once you are enrolled, if you find you are having difficulties with your
                                                                          Located at Broadmeadows, Richmond, Melbourne City, Docklands,                 course, speak to your class teacher in the first instance.
                                                                          Essendon, Moreland, Moonee Ponds and Craigieburn, Kangan Institute            If you are still having difficulty, our educational/personal counsellors
                                                                          is Victoria’s major provider for the automotive, aerospace, polymer           or disability liaison officers may be of assistance. Call 13 TAFE (13 8233)
                                                                          and transport industries and is one of the state’s largest providers of       and ask to speak to our student support department for an appointment
                                                                          traineeship and apprenticeship training.                                      to discuss your concerns. The services are free and confidential.
                                                                          The Institute has opened a number of new training facilities over the
                                                                                                                                                        Employment service
                                                                          past few years including the Centre of Fashion, the Moonee Ponds
                                                                          campus and the award-winning Automotive Centre of Excellence located          Kangan Institute has an in-house employment service that can help you
                                                                          at the Docklands.                                                             find work. Our employment centre assists Kangan Institute students
                                                                                                                                                        and jobseekers in the community. We also provide a comprehensive
                                                                          Kangan Institute’s partnerships with universities mean you can use            recruitment service for organisations by advertising job vacancies,
                                                                          our courses as a direct pathway into a range of degrees and post-             apprenticeships and traineeships on a national database.
                                                                          graduate studies.
                                                                                                                                                        Jobseekers using the service are considered for these positions, as
                                                                          Minimum tertiary entrance requirements                                        well as having access to regular workshops on preparing resumes
                                                                                                                                                        and job applications.
                                                                          See page 7.
                                                                                                                                                        Skills Recognition
                                                                          Student services                                                              Kangan Institute encourages experienced workers to return to education
                                                                          Leading training facilities                                                   and offers recognition of prior learning (RPL) or skills recognition by
  Campus location and contacts                                            Kangan Institute offers well-equipped training facilities that reflect        which credits may be granted towards qualification after assessment of
                                                                          industry needs and practices. We also have several purpose-built state-       the knowledge and skills you have gained through work, training and
Broadmeadows campus                                                       of-the-art training centres at our Broadmeadows campus: the Aviation          life experience.
Pearcedale Parade, Broadmeadows VIC 3047                                  Industry Training Centre; the transport and logistics centre; the polymer
Automotive Centre of Excellence (ACE)                                     engineering centre; the Indigenous Education Centre; and Richards
                                                                                                                                                        Further information
1 Batmans Hill Drive, Docklands VIC 3008                                  Restaurant, our open-to-the-public student training restaurant.               An Institute careers kit is distributed to careers teachers, libraries,
Essendon campus                                                                                                                                         community groups and industries throughout Melbourne. Course
                                                                          The Automotive Centre of Excellence in Melbourne’s Docklands is the
Buckley Street, Essendon VIC 3040                                                                                                                       brochures are sent free of charge to individual enquirers. Contact the
                                                                          largest automotive training facility in the southern hemisphere.
Coburg campus                                                                                                                                           customer service centre on 13 TAFE (13 8233).
Dawson Street, Coburg North VIC 3058                                      Support services                                                              Part-time courses
City campus                                                               Personal counselling; career counselling; learning support including
                                                                                                                                                        Applicants are not able to apply for part-time courses through VTAC.
Flinders Lane, Melbourne 3000                                             individual study skills and workshops; advocacy; financial counselling;
                                                                                                                                                        To find out more about these courses and the application process go to
Moreland campus                                                           childcare; language support; disability support; student association,
                                                                                                                                                        www.kangan.edu.au
Cnr The Grove and De Carle Streets,                                       which runs social, sporting and recreation activities for all students;
Moreland VIC 3058                                                         employment services; flexible learning assistance; and literacy and           Mid year courses
                                                                          numeracy assessment.                                                          Mid year application is available at Kangan Institute via direct entry only.
Craigieburn campus
87-91 Grand Boulevard, Craigieburn VIC 3064                               Student facilities
Richmond campus
                                                                          Childcare centre; library and learning centres; flexible learning centres;
Cremorne Street, Richmond VIC 3121
                                                                          computer/internet access; canteens and student lounges; prayer rooms;
Customer Service Centre: 13 TAFE (8233)                                   bookshop; printing and copying service.
www.kangan.edu.au
                                                                          We also have several ‘live’ student training facilities, which are open to
Postal address all campuses:
                                                                          the public and our students at very reasonable prices, including Richards
Private Bag 299 Somerton VIC 3062                                         Restaurant at our Broadmeadows campus and the massage clinic at our
                                                                          Richmond campus.
  Open days:                                                              Students experiencing difficulties paying course fees or purchasing course
                                                                          books or materials can apply for assistance from the student loan fund.
Every day is open day at Kangan Institute. Just call 13 TAFE (13 8233).
                                                                          Our staff members are available to discuss financial difficulties affecting
Centre of Fashion @ Richmond - Sunday August 14
                                                                          your ability to enrol in or successfully complete your course. Call 13 TAFE
                                                                          (13 8233) to make an appointment.
  Open Evenings:
                                                                          Full-time students may qualify for Youth Allowance, Austudy, or
Centre of Fashion @ Richmond - Wednesday August 31                        ABSTUDY income support from Centrelink.
                                                                          For further information visit www.centrelink.gov.au or call Centrelink
  Semester dates:                                                         on 132 490.
                                                                          For further information about our Centre of Fashion @ Richmond Open
March Intake: 28 February                                                 Day call 03 9425 5763.
June Intake: 27 June

  Fees:
For further information about fees for these courses go to:
http://www.kangan.edu.au




218 | VTAC Guide 2012
Courses available through VTAC

n Accounting                                                                    Major studies: Accounting (MYOB), Business Technology                    Occupational health and safety, Occupational Health and Safety,
                                                                                (Microsoft Office), Communication, Management, Occupational              Occupational health and safety risk management, Project
   Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                         Health and Safety, Structured Workplace Learning, Workplace              management, Quality systems, Structural principles.
                                                                                Skills.                                                                  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   53321 (VGF), 53324 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                        Selection mode: ATAR, test. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   » Certificate IV in Financial Services (Accounting): FT1
                                                                                Selection mode: ATAR.                                                    Extra requirements:
   » Diploma of Accounting: FT1.5
   » Advanced Diploma of Accounting: FT2                                                                                                                 NON Y12 Test: Applicants must complete a literacy and numeracy
   About the course: This course is designed to help prepare
                                                                             n Auslan                                                                    test between 12 December and 16 December. Details will be
   individuals for job roles in a range of accounting, bookkeeping                                                                                       provided to applicants by mail.
   and/or clerical functions. The pathway to the advanced diploma               Kangan, Richmond
   will incorporate competencies from each of the certificate III,              53191 (VGF), 53194 (Fee type determined by provider)                  n Building and Construction/Sustainability
   certificate IV and diploma qualifications. The Certificate IV in             » Diploma of Auslan: FT2
   Accounting reflects job roles of individuals who supervise the               About the course: Provides a comprehensive study of Auslan,              Kangan, Broadmeadows
   operation of a computerised accounting system, compile budget                the language of the Australian Deaf community, encompassing an           53331 (VGF), 53334 (Fee type determined by provider)
   information, process business transactions and extract financial             appreciation of Auslan linguistics, Deaf culture and its history.
   and other reports, including job costing reports and Business                                                                                         » Diploma of Building and Construction (Building)/
   Activity Statements (BAS). The Diploma of Accounting reflects the
                                                                                Major studies: Auslan, Deaf culture, Deaf history, Interpreting,           Diploma of Sustainability: FT2
                                                                                Linguistics.                                                             About the course: Students undertaking the Diploma in Building
   job roles of individuals who implement and maintain controls over
   accounting information systems, prepare financial statements                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                        and Construction course will have the option of taking up the
   and performance reports for management, and prepare income                   Selection mode: Interview, test. See Extra requirements for              dual diploma in sustainability, giving the course participant
   tax returns. The Advanced Diploma of Accounting reflects job roles           specifics.                                                               the opportunity of attaining employment not only in Building
   of individuals working in the accounting industry and seeking                                                                                         and construction fields, but also the chance to have additional
                                                                                Extra requirements:
   alignment with the requirements of professional bodies.                                                                                               specialized skills and qualifications. Kangan Institute’s Diploma of
                                                                                Interview and test: Applicants must telephone the Auslan and Deaf        Sustainability offers the opportunity to combine existing training
   Major studies: Accounting, Accounting (small business),                      Studies Centre on 03 9425 5777 to book by 4 November. Details            with specialist training in sustainability, leading to a range of
   Accounting and finance, Accounting information systems,                      will be sent to applicants by 25 November. Applicants must attend        additional employment opportunities.
   Auditing, Auditing and taxation, Banking and finance,                        an interview between 8 December and 14 December. Applicants
   Bookkeeping, Budgeting, Business (accounting), Business                                                                                               Major studies: Building, Building (construction methods),
                                                                                must demonstrate comprehension of the nature of the course
   (administration), Business (management), Business (marketing),                                                                                        Building (estimating), Building (law), Building (surveying),
                                                                                and any previous experience in the field, good visual memory and
   Business Activity Statement (BAS), Business practice, Business                                                                                        Building (technology), Building regulations, Contracts and Tender,
                                                                                manual dexterity, their ability to work in small groups and their
   statistics, Communication skills, Company accounting, Corporate                                                                                       Occupational Health and Safety, Sustainability, Sustainability
                                                                                interest in working with the Deaf community.
   accountability, Corporate governance, Economics, Financial                                                                                            concepts, Sustainable business practices, Sustainable
   accounting, Financial management, Financial planning, Financial                                                                                       development, Sustainable production and consumption.
                                                                             n Building and Construction                                                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   reports, Management (finance), Management (financial),
   Management accounting, Spreadsheets and databases, Taxation,                                                                                          Selection mode: ATAR, test. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   Taxation and auditing, Word processing, Workplace safety.                    Kangan, Broadmeadows
                                                                                                                                                         Extra requirements:
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                            53051 (VGF), 53054 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                                                                                         NON Y12
   Selection mode: Form. See Extra requirements for specifics.                  » Diploma of Building and Construction (Building): FT2
                                                                                                                                                         Test: Applicants must complete a literacy and numeracy test
                                                                                About the course: This course aims to provide students with
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                   between 12 December and 16 December. Details will be provided
                                                                                the technical knowledge to monitor and to oversee all the quality
   Form: Applicants will be required to complete and submit a                                                                                            to applicant by mail.
                                                                                aspects related to the construction of domestic, industrial and
   supplementary form by 5 November. Applicants must request a                  commercial buildings of medium rise to a maximum height
   form by phoning the accounting administrator on (03) 9279 2470               of three stories. The first year of study includes training in site   n Children’s Services
   or email to accounting@kangan.edu.au. Late applicants must                   levelling and surveying, construction methods for domestic,
   phone the accounting administrator.                                          medium, and high-rise buildings, structural principles and               Kangan, Broadmeadows
                                                                                simple sketches and drawing. The second year of study includes           53081 (VGF), 53084 (Fee type determined by provider)
n Administration                                                                identifying services and construction faults, building surveying
                                                                                                                                                         » Diploma of Children’s Services: FT2
                                                                                and legal obligations of building contracts. Upon completion of
                                                                                                                                                         About the course: This course develops the skills and knowledge
   Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                         this course students could apply for employment opportunities as
                                                                                                                                                         required to provide programs for infants, toddlers and pre-
   53021 (VGF), 53024 (Fee type determined by provider)                         a building estimator, building advisor, building manager, building
                                                                                contract administrator, building teacher, building consultant,           schoolers in children’s services settings. Qualified early childhood
   » Certificate IV in Business Administration: FT1 to FT1.5                    registered builder/domestic/commercial, building site supervisor,        professionals are responsible for developing, evaluating and
   » Diploma of Business Administration: FT1.5 to FT2                           project manager, building inspector or an occupational health and        implementing the program and have responsibility for the
   About the course: This course is designed to develop the                     safety officer.                                                          supervision of other staff and volunteers. Students participate in a
   required skills and knowledge to work effectively in an office                                                                                        range of practical workplace experience. The Diploma of Children’s
                                                                                Major studies: Building, Building (construction methods),                Services (Early Childhood Education and Care) incorporates the
   environment, either in an administrative or management position.             Building (estimating), Building (law), Building (management),
   Each qualification comprises core competencies and a selection                                                                                        core competencies of the Certificate III in Children’s Services.
                                                                                Building (surveying), Building (technology), Building codes and          Students may be required to enrol in the certificate III to prior to
   of electives including electives from the Medical, Legal and                 standards (low rise), Building codes and standards (medium
   Purchasing areas. The pathway to the Diploma will incorporate the                                                                                     commencing the next level.
                                                                                rise), Building contract administration, Building law and
   Certificates III & IV (or competencies from the certificates III & IV).      building practice, Building regulations, Contracts and tenders,
                                                                                Environmental sustainability management, Estimating, Law,


                                                                                                                                                                            Kangan Institute | 219
n Higher Education qualification                             n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                             n Other Graduates

   Major studies: Behaviour guidance, Child and family studies,             n Engineering–Aircraft Maintenance                                                         Extra requirements:
   Childhood development, Cultural diversity, Curriculum studies,                                                                                                      Form: Applicants must complete and submit a supplementary form
   Family and diversity, First aid, Health and safety, Health studies,            Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                                 www.kangan.edu.au/departments/hospitality-travel-tourism by
   Interaction and communication, Play and curriculum studies,                                                                                                         24 November. Applicants can also request the form by telephone,
   Professional practice, Program planning.
                                                                                   53231 (VGF), 53234 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                                                                                                       13 TAFE (13 8233). Information session: Applicants must attend an
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                              About the course: This course provides students with an                              information session at the Broadmeadows campus, auditorium at
                                                                                  underpinning theoretical knowledge, basic skills and maintenance                     6pm on Wednesday 23 November. Applicants must telephone (03)
   Selection mode: ATAR, Information pack, information session,
                                                                                  training to become an aircraft maintenance engineer. The                             9279 2285 to book by 21 November. Interview: Applicants must
   interview, test. See Extra requirements for specifics.
                                                                                  diploma provides students with the knowledge and skills to                           book an interview time at the information session. Late applicants
   Extra requirements:                                                            achieve a practical, focused high-level qualification in the aviation                must forward the supplementary form to Kangan Institute as soon
   Information Pack: Applicants must download a pack, inclusive of                maintenance industry. The course allows students to gain an                          as possible and may phone (03) 9279 2285 for further information.
   the children’s services supplementary form, from http://www.                   understanding of the mechanical stream and the avionics stream
   kangan.edu.au/departments/centre-for-better-living or phone 13                 whichever pathway is chosen. Students will receive practical
   TAFE (13 8233) to request the children’s services information pack.            opportunities and hands-on assessments throughout the course                   n Events/Hospitality
   Forms must be completed and submitted to the Institute by 30                   working on live aircrafts in both avionics and mechanical areas.
   September (late applicants by 12 November).                                    Mechanical study areas include theory of flight, aerodynamics, gas                   Kangan, Broadmeadows
   Information Session and Interview: Details will be sent to                     turbine engines and aircraft structure. Avionic study areas include                  53251 (VGF), 53254 (Fee type determined by provider)
   applicants in the information pack. Applicants should attend one               aircraft structure and study of avionics of aircraft which includes                  » Diploma of Events/Diploma of Hospitality: FT2
   information session in either September or November. Applicants                digital, analogue, gyro and radio modules. Upon completion of
                                                                                                                                                                       About the course: This course provides students with the skills
   must attend an interview in November or December. Late                         the diploma students can find employment opportunities in the
                                                                                                                                                                       and knowledge to work in the events and hospitality industry. Dual
   applicants (after 12 November) must telephone 9279 2451.                       aircraft industry as a trainee aircraft maintenance engineer.
                                                                                                                                                                       studies mean students will be qualified to work in the hospitality
   Test: Applicants not receiving an ATAR in 2011 must sit a literacy/            Major studies: Aerodynamics, Aircraft electrics, Aircraft general                    industry in a food and beverage environment or in the events
   numeracy test. Details will be provided by mail to the applicants              maintenance, Aircraft systems, Aviation legislation, Electronic                      industry across a range of sectors. The course concentrates on the
   required to attend.                                                            fundamentals, First Aid (Basic), Occupational Health and Safety,                     skills required in the organisation of events, giving students many
                                                                                  Physics, Propeller systems.                                                          practical opportunities to run both on and off-campus events. It
n Computer Systems Engineering                                                    Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    prepares students to be event organisers or managers, responsible
                                                                                  Selection mode: Test. See Extra requirments for specifics.                           for the overall coordination and management of conferences,
                                                                                                                                                                       meetings, festivals and events, or to run their own business as an
   Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                           Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                                       event or meeting consultant/manager. Additionally it qualifies
   53151 (VGF), 53154 (Fee type determined by provider)                           Test: Applicants will be required to sit an English literacy and                     students to work in a restaurant in a food and beverage role after
   » Advanced Diploma of Computer Systems Engineering:                            numeracy test in December. Applicants must register for the test                     undertaking classes in the first year at the campus restaurant.
     FT2                                                                          by 24 October (late applicants by 28 November) on 03 9279 2670.                      During their studies, students design and run their own major
   About the course: This course provides students with high-level                                                                                                     event off campus and, in the second year, students will design
   training in the management of computer systems, computer                 n Events                                                                                   their own event, event company, or hospitality business. Each
   networks, internet and intranet infrastructure, design and                                                                                                          qualification comprises core and elective competencies and the
   development, programming and maintenance. It provides                          Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                                 pathway to the advanced diploma will incorporate competencies
   students with the technical skills to design, install/validate/                 53211 (VGF), 53214 (Fee type determined by provider)                                from certificate III qualifications (or competencies from the
   evaluate/administer computer networks and systems, manage                                                                                                           certificate III).
   risk, estimate and manage projects and provide technical advice/
                                                                                  » Diploma of Events: FT1.5
                                                                                                                                                                       Major studies: Administration, Bar management, Business
   sales. The main emphasis of the course is on the hardware                      » Advanced Diploma of Events: FT2
                                                                                                                                                                       (accounting), Communications, Conventions and exhibitions,
   platforms and engineering aspects of computer systems and                      About the course: This course provides students with the skills                      Cookery, Customer service, Environmental management, Event
   networks, operating systems (Microsoft and UNIX), programming                  and knowledge to work in the events industry across a range                          management, Event management (festivals), Food and beverage
   (Java), computer maintenance and computer repair. Students                     of sectors including tourism, music, hospitality, arts, sports                       management, Food and beverage production, Food and beverage
   study CCNA content which has a major focus on the configuration                and recreation. The course concentrates on the skills required                       service, Food handling, Food safety and regulation, Hospitality
   of networking equipment at the technician level. This course may               in the organisation of events and gives students many practical                      management, Hospitality sales and marketing, Leadership,
   lead to employment opportunities as a system support officer,                  opportunities to run both on-campus and off-campus events. It                        Management, Marketing, Meeting and event management,
   software engineer, network engineer, network analyst, systems                  prepares students to be event organisers or managers, responsible                    Meetings and conventions management, Restaurant operations,
   engineer or computer systems engineering associate.                            for the overall coordination and management of conferences,                          Tourism.
                                                                                  meetings, festivals and events within a venue such as a convention
   Major studies: Computer and network security, Computer                                                                                                              Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                  centre or a sporting venue, or to run their own business as an event
   applications, Computer architecture, Computer engineering,                                                                                                          Selection mode: Form, information session, interview. See Extra
                                                                                  or meeting consultant/manager. The certificate III and the diploma
   Computer hardware, Computer networks, Computer operating                                                                                                            requirements for specifics.
                                                                                  are completed in the first 18 months. The Advanced Diploma of
   systems, Computing, Computing (management), Computing
                                                                                  Events will be completed in the second semester in the second                        Extra requirements:
   (skills), Engineering (computer systems), LAN installation and
                                                                                  year. In the second year students will design their own event                        Form: Applicants must complete and submit a supplementary form
   management, Local area networks, Microsoft MCSE, Network
                                                                                  company or event and write an accompanying business plan.                            www.kangan.edu.au/departments/hospitality-travel-tourism by
   management and network systems, Programming (C),
   Programming (C++), Programming (Internet), Programming                         Major studies: Administration, Business (accounting),                                24 November. Applicants can also request the form by telephone,
   (Java), Programming (Visual Basic), Web design, Web                            Communications, Conventions and exhibitions, Environmental                           13 TAFE (13 8233). Information session: Applicants must attend
   development, Wide area networks.                                               management, Event management, Event management (festivals),                          an information session at the Broadmeadows campus auditorium
                                                                                  Leadership, Management, Marketing, Meeting and event                                 from 6pm on Wednesday 23 November. Applicants must telephone
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                  management, Meetings and conventions management, Tourism.                            (03) 9279 2285 to book, by 21 November. Interview: Applicants
   Selection mode: ATAR.                                                                                                                                               may be required to book an interview time at the information
                                                                                  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                                                                                                                       session. Late applicants should forward the form to Kangan
                                                                                  Selection mode: Form, information session, interview. See Extra
                                                                                                                                                                       Institute as soon as possible and may phone (03) 9279 2285 for
                                                                                  requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                                       further information.



                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
220 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
n Fashion and Textiles Merchandising                                       this course may include a combination of classroom/workshop,               Extra requirements:
                                                                           industry placement and/or workplace and work-based training                Form: Applicants must complete and submit a supplementary
   Kangan, Richmond                                                        and assessment. Each qualification comprises core competencies             form from www.kangan.edu.au/departments/centre-for-better-
                                                                           and a selection of electives and the pathway to the diploma                living by 4 November. Late applicants must phone the department
   53061 (VGF), 53064 (Fee type determined by provider)                    will incorporate the certificate III (or competencies from these           on (03) 9425 5635 for further information by 23 December.
   » Diploma of Fashion and Textiles Merchandising: FT2                    qualification).
                                                                                                                                                      Additional information: Information session: Applicants
   About the course: The Diploma of Fashion and Textiles                   Major studies: Computer-aided design (CAD), Fabric and                     are encouraged to attend an information session either on 13
   Merchandising covers occupations such as those involved in the          fibre technology, Fabric technology, Fashion, Fashion (design              September or 13 December at 6.30 pm, Richmond campus,
   development and implementation of products, fashion buying,             concepts), Fashion (design), Fashion (illustration), Fashion (pattern      Building G. Applicants must phone (03) 9425 5635 to register their
   marketing and merchandising and supply chain strategies within          grading), Garment construction techniques, Marketing research,             attendance at the information session.
   the fashion and textiles industries. This is an entry-level program     Marketing strategy, Networking, Pattern-making, Pattern-making
   with 34 core and specialist units. Delivery of this course may          (computer), Quality assurance, Quality control.
   include a combination of classroom/workshop, industry placement                                                                                 n Horticulture (Ornamental)
                                                                           Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   and/or workplace and work-based training and assessment.
                                                                           Selection mode: Interview, resume, folio presentation, test. See           Kangan, Broadmeadows
   Major studies: Cost estimation, Design influences and
                                                                           Extra Requirements for specific details.
   concepts (textiles), Fabric and fibre technology, Human resource                                                                                   53141 (VGF), 53144 (Fee type determined by provider)
   management, International trade, Management, Marketing                  Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                      » Diploma of Ornamental Horticulture: FT2
   (promotions), Marketing research, Marketing strategy,                   CY12
                                                                                                                                                      About the course: The Diploma of Ornamental Horticulture
   Merchandising (TCF), Networking, Product development (TCF),             Interview: Applicants must register at www.kangan.edu.au/                  designed for the horticulturist with a deep passion for plants.
   Purchasing, Quality control, Risk analysis and management, Sales        departments/centre-of-fashion/vtacinterview for an interview               The focus is on plant care and culture where a high level of skills
   and marketing, Supply chain management, Warehousing and                 time by 29 October (late applicants by 26 November).                       and knowledge is required to undertake the research and study
   distribution.                                                           Resume: Applicants must submit a copy of their resume at the               with an emphasis on plant science, botany and plant physiology.
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                       interview.                                                                 Planning, preparation and presentation of reports in the areas of
   Selection mode: Interview, resume, folio presentation, test. See        Folio and samples of work: Applicants must bring a design folio            plant health, pruning, propagation, trees, lawns, plant selection,
   Extra requirements for specifics.                                       and three samples of work they have produced to the interview.             environmental sustainability, heritage landscapes and staff
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                supervision are also key characteristics of this course. A garden/
                                                                           NONY12
                                                                                                                                                      landscape design and maintenance unit provides students with
   CY12                                                                    Interview: Applicants must register at www.kangan.edu.au/                  an opportunity to transform their horticulture knowledge and
   Interview: Applicants must register at www.kangan.edu.au/               departments/centre-of-fashion/vtacinterview for an interview               skills into an artistic form. Each qualification comprises core and
   departments/centre-of-fashion/vtacinterview for an interview            time by 29 October (late applicants by 26 November).                       elective competencies and the pathway to the advanced diploma
   time by 29 October (late applicants by 26 November).                    Resume: Applicants must submit a copy of their resume at the               will incorporate competencies from Certificates II, III or IV in
   Resume: Applicants must submit a copy of their resume at the            interview.                                                                 Horticulture qualifications (or competencies from the certificates
   interview.                                                              Folio and samples of work: Applicants must bring a design folio            II, III or IV).
   Folio and samples of work: Applicants must bring a design folio         and three samples of work they have produced to the interview.             Major studies: Cell biology, Cell physiology, Environmental
   and three samples of work they have produced to the interview.          Test: Applicants will be required to sit an English literacy and           sustainability, Field botany, Garden design, Horticulture,
   NONY12                                                                  numeracy test at the interview.                                            Horticulture (nursery), Horticulture (plant nutrition), Landscape
                                                                                                                                                      design and planning, Landscape horticulture, Landscape
   Interview: Applicants must register at www.kangan.edu.au/
                                                                         n Fitness                                                                    management, Plant and soil science, Plant ecology, Plant sciences.
   departments/centre-of-fashion/vtacinterview for an interview
   time by 29 October (late applicants by 26 November).                                                                                               Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   Resume: Applicants must submit a copy of their resume at the            Kangan, Richmond                                                           Selection mode: ATAR, Interview, test. See extra requirements
   interview.                                                               53241 (VGF), 53244 (Fee type determined by provider)                      for specifics.
   Folio and samples of work: Applicants must bring a design folio                                                                                    Extra requirements:
                                                                           » Certificate IV in Fitness: FT1
   and three samples of work they have produced to the interview.          About the course: This combined Certificate III and IV in Fitness          Interview: Applicants must register for an interview by 25
   Test: Applicants will be required to sit an english literacy and        course is designed to qualify students as gym instructors and              November on 03 9279 2539. Applicants must attend the interview
   numeracy test at the interview.                                         personal trainers. It develops instructional and fitness-specific          in December.
                                                                           skills and knowledge to create fitness programs for a variety              Test: Applicants must register for an English literacy and numeracy
n Fashion Design                                                           of clients. Course outcomes include: gym instruction, personal             test by 25 November on 03 9279 2539. Applicants must complete
                                                                           training, community-based fitness leadership, group fitness                the test in December.
   Kangan, Richmond                                                        training and fitness-based rehabilitation training. Upon successful
                                                                           completion of this program students will be eligible to register
   53201 (VGF), 53204 (Fee type determined by provider)                    with key industry bodies - Fitness Australia and Kinect Australia.
   » Diploma of Applied Fashion Design and Technology: FT2                 This is a requirement for insurance purposes. Graduates may seek
   » Advanced Diploma of Applied Fashion Design and                        employment opportunities in private and community fitness
     Technology: FT3                                                       facilities, personal training studios and group training businesses
   About the course: The Diploma of Applied Fashion Design and             or work privately.
   Technology has been developed to provide employment skills in           Major studies: Anatomy and physiology, Exercise physiology,
   fashion design and advanced pattern-making, production and              Exercise rehabilitation, Exercise science, First aid, Fitness, Gym
   quality control and global operations. The Advanced Diploma of          instruction, Nutrition, Personal training.
   Applied Fashion Design and Technology is designed to provide            Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   high-level skills in fashion design and also provides options for
   expert skills in specialist pattern-making, managing design and         Selection mode: ATAR, form. See Extra requirements for specifics.
   product development processes, and management of fashion
   design systems. Both qualifications are entry-level programs
   with 34 and 44 core and elective units respectively. Delivery of


                                                                                                                                                                         Kangan Institute | 221
 Higher Education qualification                              Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               Other Graduates

 Horticulture (Ornamental) / Sustainability                                       placement is a compulsory unit in the course and students are                   Interactive Digital Media
                                                                                   expected to find four weeks (20 days/ service periods) of work
   Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                            experience in industry as part of the course.                                        Kangan, Broadmeadows
   53351 (VGF), 53354 (Fee type determined by provider)                            Major studies: Accommodation management, Administration,                             53171 (VGF), 53174 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                   Bar management, Business (accounting), Communications,
   » Diploma of Ornamental Horticulture/Diploma of                                 Cookery, Customer service, Food and beverage management,                             » Certificate IV in Interactive Digital Media: FT1
     Sustainability: FT2                                                           Food and beverage production, Food and beverage service, Food                        » Diploma of Interactive Digital Media: FT2
   About the course: The Dual Diploma of Ornamental Horticulture                   handling, Food safety and regulation, Hospitality management,
   and Sustainability is designed for the budding horticulturist with              Hospitality sales and marketing, Housekeeping, Leadership,                           Kangan, Essendon
   a deep passion for plants. The focus is on plant care and culture               Marketing, Restaurant operations.                                                    52071 (VGF), 52074 (Fee type determined by provider)-
   where a high level of skill and knowledge is required to undertake                                                                                                   CANCELLED
                                                                                   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   the research and study with an emphasis on plant science, botany
   and plant physiology. Planning, preparation and presentation of                 Selection mode: Form, information session, interview. See extra                      » Certificate IV in Interactive Digital Media: FT1
   reports in the areas of plant health, pruning, propagation, trees,              requirements for specific details.                                                   » Diploma of Interactive Digital Media: FT2
   lawns, plant selection, environmental sustainability, heritage                  Extra requirements:                                                                  » Advanced Diploma of Screen and Media: FT2.5
   landscapes and staff supervision are also key characteristics of this           Form: Applicants must complete and submit a supplementary form                       About the course: This course is for students wishing to acquire
   course. A garden/ landscape design and maintenance unit provides                www.kangan.edu.au/departments/hospitality-travel-tourism by                          skills in concept development and media creation for computer
   students with an opportunity to transform their horticulture                    24 November. Applicants can also request the form by telephone,                      games products. Drawing, digital photography, video and 3D
   knowledge and skills into an artistic form. Combined with four                  13 TAFE (13 8233). Information session: Applicants must attend                       modelling are taught in integrated projects that allow students to
   units from the Diploma in Sustainability it adds the advantages                 an information session at the Broadmeadows campus auditorium                         develop strong visual portfolios. Instruction is in classrooms where
   edge to the course, and is designed for those with a deep interest              from 6pm on Wednesday 23 November. Applicants must telephone                         there is significant hands-on time spent using design software
   in sustainable living. Theses units are studied alongside the                   (03) 9279 2285 to book by 21 November. Interview: Applicants                         and producing original content. Software used includes Adobe:
   ornamental horticulture units over the two years full-time study.               must book an interview time at the information session. Late                         Photoshop, Bridge, Premiere, After Effects, Flash and 3D Studio Max
   Each qualification comprises core and elective competencies                     applicants must forward the form to Kangan Institute as soon as                      Maya, motion builder, Sketchbook Pro, mudbox, unity and Unreal
   and the pathway to the advanced diploma will incorporate                        possible and may phone (03) 9279 2285 for further information.                       Developer Kit 3. The first year reflects the role of individuals who use
   competencies from Certificates II, III or IV in Horticulture                                                                                                         well-developed skills and a broad knowledge base in a wide variety
   qualifications (or competencies from the certificates II, III or IV).                                                                                                of contexts in the digital content industry. The second year reflects
                                                                              Information Technology (Network Security)                                                the role of individuals who use a range of specialised, technical or
   Major studies: Cell Biology, Cell Physiology, Enviromental
   Sustainability, Field Botany, Garden Design, Horticulture,                                                                                                           managerial competencies to plan, carry out and evaluate the work of
                                                                                   Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                                 self and/or team in the film, television and digital media industries.
   Horticulture (plant nutrition), Landscape design and planning,
   Landscape hortculture, Landscape management, Plant and soil                      53281 (VGF), 53284 (Fee type determined by provider)                                Major studies: 3D Animation, 3D Animation, 3D Animation, 3D
   science, Plant ecology, Plant sciences, Sustainability, Sustainability          » Certificate IV in Information Technology (Networking):                             Animation, 3D Modelling, 3D Modelling, Concept design, Concept
   concepts, Sustainable Business Practises, Sustainable                             FT1                                                                                Designs, Environment Design, Environment Design, Environment
   Development, Sustainable Production and Consumption.                            » Advanced Diploma of Information Technology (Network                                Design, Game Engine Integration, Game Engine Integration, Game
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                 Security): FT2                                                                     Engine Integration, Texturing, Texturing, Texturing.
   Selection mode: ATAR, interview, test. See extra requirements                   About the course: These qualifications have been developed                           Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   for specifics.                                                                  with industry assistance to provide skills in managing network                       Selection mode: ATAR
                                                                                   security. The qualifications provide high-level ICT, e-security and
   Extra requirements:                                                             business skills and knowledge to enable graduates to be effective
   Interview: Applicants must register for an interview by 25                      in senior security roles within organisations. Students will study              Justice
   November on 03 9279 2539. Applicants must attend the interview                  towards a number of industry recognised and highly valued vendor
   in December.                                                                    certifications such as CompTIA A+, CISCO (CCNA), Server 2008                         Kangan, Broadmeadows
   Test: Applicants must register for an English literacy and numeracy             Administrator and Linux (LPIC). This course focuses on security                      53111 (VGF), 53114 (Fee type determined by provider)
   test by 25 November on 03 9279 2539. Applicants must complete                   design, management and evaluation of networking systems in                           » Advanced Diploma of Justice: FT2
   the test in December.                                                           businesses, VoIP, RFID and other NGN technologies. Students learn
                                                                                   to configure and troubleshoot hardware, network, operating                           Kangan, Essendon
 Hospitality                                                                      systems, services and protocols, provide risk management and                         52101 (VGF), 52104 (Fee type determined by provider)
                                                                                   control, backups and disaster recovery.This course may lead to
                                                                                   employment opportunities as a database security expert, lead                         » Advanced Diploma of Justice: FT2
   Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                            security analyst, ICT security specialist, network and systems                       About the course: The Advanced Diploma of Justice provides
   53571 (VGF), 53574 (Fee type determined by provider)                            manager, or security engineer.                                                       the major vocational education and training pathway for students
   » Certificate IV in Hospitality: FT1                                                                                                                                 wishing to enter, develop additional skills or pursue a long-term
                                                                                   Major studies: Computer and network security, E-business,
   » Advanced Diploma of Hospitality: FT2                                                                                                                               career within the justice sector and related areas. This may include
                                                                                   E-business solutions, Encryption technologies, Internetworking,
                                                                                                                                                                        the police (both state and federal), customs, sheriff’s department,
   About the course: This course prepares students for a career in                 Network administration, Network design, Network management
                                                                                                                                                                        local government, correctional services, courts, youth justice
   hospitality in an operational or management position. Operational               and network systems, Network protocols, Network security,
                                                                                                                                                                        and community corrections. Students will also participate in a
   skills in both food and beverage and accommodation services                     Network technology, Networking, Networks, Networks and data
                                                                                                                                                                        crime scene investigation camp as part of their practical learning
   are covered in the first year of the course, while the second year              communications, Operating systems, Project management, Risk
                                                                                                                                                                        component. Each qualification comprises core competencies and
   concentrates on management skills appropriate for working in                    analysis and management, Security and management, Software
                                                                                                                                                                        a selection of electives and the pathway to the Advanced Diploma
   the industry, or for those who wish to open their own hospitality               systems, System security and controls, Systems design and
                                                                                                                                                                        will incorporate the Certificates IV in Justice and Diploma of
   business. Students will undertake some of their classes in the                  development, Voice Over Internet Protocol, Wireless network
                                                                                                                                                                        Justice. Also students will be admitted into the Advanced Diploma
   on-campus working restaurant. In the second year students                       security, Wireless technologies.
                                                                                                                                                                        of Justice and may be able to exit with a lower level qualification
   are required to design their own hospitality business and write                 Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    once they have completed the required units.
   a business plan as part of their management studies. Work
                                                                                   Selection mode: ATAR                                                                 Major studies: Corrections management, Crime prevention,
                                                                                                                                                                        Criminal justice administration, Criminology, Cultural diversity,
                                                                                                                                                                        Customs, Government structures and influences, Justice, Justice

                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
222 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   communications, Juvenile justice, Law (court processes), Law              n Management/Human Resources                                             Students have the option of working in this varied area or
   (criminal), Law (evidence), Police administration, Police studies,                                                                                 furthering their studies at University. The Dual Advanced Diploma
   Psychology, Sociology.                                                      Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                   is strongly recognised by many Universities and has guaranteed
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                  direct entry into the University of Ballarat’s Bachelor of Applied
                                                                                53071 (VGF), 53074 (Fee type determined by provider)                  Management delivered at Kangan Institute. Employment
   Selection mode: ATAR.
                                                                               » Certificate IV in Frontline Management/Certificate IV in             opportunities can include a wide range of frontline management
                                                                                 Human Resources: FT.75                                               positions and assistant marketing/management positions. Due to
n Legal Services                                                               » Diploma of Management/Diploma of Human Resources                     many sectors within industry requiring these skill sets, graduates
                                                                                 Management: FT1.5                                                    would have a wide range of options to choose from.
   Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                        » Advanced Diploma of Management/Advanced Diploma                      Major studies: Business planning, Employee relations,
   53341 (VGF), 53344 (Fee type determined by provider)                          of Management (Human Resources): FT2                                 Employment law, Finance, Knowledge management, Leadership,
   » Certificate IV in Legal Services: FT.5                                    About the course: This dual award program provides students            Marketing, Marketing research, Organisational design and
                                                                               with vocational skills in the related fields of management and         development, People management, Planning and administration,
   Kangan, Essendon                                                            human resource management.                                             Project management, Risk assessment, Strategic management,
   52111 (VGF), 52114 (Fee type determined by provider)                        Each qualification comprises core competencies and a selection         Strategic studies.
                                                                               of electives and the pathway to the Advanced Diplomas will             Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   » Certificate IV in Legal Services: FT.5
                                                                               incorporate the Certificate IV in Frontline Management, the            Selection mode: ATAR.
   About the course: This course will provide you with the skills              Certificate IV in Human Resources, the Diploma and Advanced
   required to provide support in a range of legal settings. Potential         Diploma of Management and the Diploma and Advanced Diploma
   job roles include legal assistant, legal secretary, legal support           of Human Resources. Applicants may be required to complete           n Management/Sustainability
   officer and assistant paralegal.                                            additional subjects to a normal study load in the second year of
   Major studies: Contract Law, Identify and apply the legal                   the course.                                                            Kangan, Broadmeadows
   framework, Law of torts, Produce complex legal documents.                   Students have the option of working in this varied area or              53361 (VGF), 53364 (Fee type determined by provider)
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                           furthering their studies at University. The dual advanced diploma      » Diploma of Management/Diploma of Sustainability:
   Selection mode: ATAR                                                        is strongly recognised by many universities and has guaranteed           FT1.5
                                                                               direct entry into the University of Ballarat’s Bachelor of Applied     About the course: This dual award program provides students
n Liberal Arts                                                                 Management delivered at Kangan Institute. Employment                   with vocational skills in the related fields of management and
                                                                               opportunities can include a wide range of frontline management         business sustainability with a strong focus on environmental ethics
                                                                               positions, assistant manager in human resources, recruitment or        and principles.
   Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                        organisational development. Due to many sectors within industry
   53311 (VGF), 53314 (Fee type determined by provider)                                                                                               Each qualification comprises core competencies and a selection
                                                                               requiring these skill sets, graduates would have a wide range of       of electives through Certificate IV in Frontline Management to
   » Certificate IV in Liberal Arts: FT1                                       options to choose from.                                                the Diploma of Management and the Diploma of Sustainability.
   » Diploma of Liberal Arts: FT2                                              Major studies: Accounting, Budgeting, Business planning,               Students may elect to continue their studies to the Advanced
   About the course: Provides the skills and knowledge necessary               Change management, Communication studies, Computer                     Diploma of Management. Applicants may be required to complete
   for successful tertiary study and to enhance employment                     applications, Customer service, Employee relations, Employment         additional subjects to a normal study load in the second year of
   prospects. This course contains a broad range of units in the               law, Finance, Human resource management, Human resources               the course.
   humanities with pathways and credits to university level studies            (performance management), Industrial relations, Law,                   The course with its dual qualification will give students a sound
   in the arts. The pathway to the Diploma of Liberal Arts includes            Leadership and management, Marketing, Office administration,           vocational education in Management skills and puts them at
   competencies from the Certificate IV in Liberal Arts. This course is        Organisational change, Organisational design and development,          the forefront of qualified and skilled graduates as business
   recommended for mature age applicants who wish to return to                 Performance management, Recruitment and selection, Risk                sustainability becomes the new age of Australian business.
   tertiary study and post VCE students seeking to improve their study         assessment, Strategic planning, Training.                              Students have the option of working in these disciplines or of
   skills and develop a pathway to tertiary education.                         Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                      furthering their studies at university. The dual advanced diploma
   Major studies: Academic and Research Skills, Cultural studies,              Selection mode: ATAR                                                   is strongly recognised by many universities and has guaranteed
   Cultural studies, Cultural studies, History, Literary studies, Literary                                                                            direct entry into the University of Ballarat’s Bachelor of Applied
   studies, Sociology.                                                                                                                                Management delivered at Kangan Institute. Areas of work within
                                                                             n Management/Marketing
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                                                                                  industry would include a wide range of frontline management
   Selection mode: ATAR, form. See Extra requirements for specifics                                                                                   positions, many of which may have a sustainability focus. This may
                                                                               Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                   be in such areas as sustainable development, regulatory control,
   Extra requirements:                                                          53031 (VGF), 53034 (Fee type determined by provider)                  or environmental protection compliance. Due to this being a rising
   Form: All applicants must phone (03) 9279 2350 to request a                 » Certificate IV in Frontline Management/Certificate IV in             area of employment opportunity, graduates would have a wide
   Liberal Arts supplementary application form. Form must be                     Marketing: FT.75                                                     range of options to choose from.
   submitted by 23 December.                                                   » Diploma of Management/Diploma of Marketing: FT1.5                    Major studies:
                                                                               » Advanced Diploma of Management/Advanced Diploma                      As for Management and Sustainability.
                                                                                 of Marketing: FT2
                                                                                                                                                      Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
                                                                               About the course: This dual award program provides students
                                                                               with vocational skills in the related fields of management and         Selection mode: ATAR
                                                                               marketing.
                                                                               Each qualification comprises core competencies and a selection
                                                                               of electives and the pathway to the advanced diplomas will
                                                                               incorporate the Certificate IV in Frontline Management, the
                                                                               Certificate IV in Marketing, the Diploma and Advanced Diploma
                                                                               of Management and the Diploma and Advanced Diploma of
                                                                               Marketing. Applicants may be required to complete additional
                                                                               subjects to a normal study load in the second year of the course.


                                                                                                                                                                         Kangan Institute | 223
 Higher Education qualification                            Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                                Other Graduates

 Massage and Myotherapy                                                     Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia)                                              Sport

   Kangan, Richmond                                                               Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                                 Kangan, Richmond
   53101 (VGF), 53104 (Fee type determined by provider)                            53001 (VGF), 53004 (Fee type determined by provider)                                53461 (VGF), 53464 (Fee type determined by provider)
   » Certificate IV in Massage Therapy Practice: FT 0.5-1                         » Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia):                          » Certificate IV in Sport (Development): FT1
   » Diploma of Remedial Massage: FT2                                               FT1                                                                                » Diploma of Sport (Development): FT2
   » Advanced Diploma of Remedial Massage (Myotherapy):                           » Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia): FT2                             53491 (VGF), 53494 (Fee type determined by provider)
     FT 2.5-3
                                                                                  Kangan, Essendon                                                                     » Certificate IV in Sport and Recreation: FT1
   About the course: The massage course (Incorporating cert. IV,
                                                                                   52061 (VGF), 52064 (Fee type determined by provider)                                » Diploma of Sport and Recreation: FT2
   diploma and advanced diploma) provides theoretical and practical
   training in planning, applying and assessing massage treatment in              - CANCELLED                                                                          About the course: The Sport and Recreation and Sport
   the spa, aged care, health care and soft tissue treatment industries.                                                                                               (Development) courses prepare students for employment in the
                                                                                  » Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia):                          sport and recreation industry in sports administration, events
   The Certificate IV in Massage Therapy Practice focuses on delivering             FT1
   theoretical background knowledge while developing student’s                                                                                                         management, coaching, activity coordination and leadership,
                                                                                  » Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia): FT2                             officiating and skill development. The course focuses on delivering
   tactile skills and techniques in relaxation massage (1st year). The
                                                                                  About the course: This course is for people who wish to seek                         sport and recreation industry skills through theory- based delivery
   Diploma of Remedial Massage focuses on more advanced skills to
                                                                                  employment in the printing industry as an electronic publisher,                      and practical environments. A number of the practical experiences
   treat clients using sports massage, postural analysis, trigger point
                                                                                  graphic designer, multimedia developer, website developer,                           and activities are carried out with community sporting and
   therapy, lymphatic massage and other therapeutic and remedial
                                                                                  content developer or web publisher. This course comprises the                        educational organisations and provide students with opportunities
   techniques (2nd year). The Advanced Diploma of Remedial
                                                                                  core and elective units (including animation) required to prepare                    to strengthen knowledge and skills in practical settings. The
   Massage (Myotherapy) focuses on advanced remedial and
                                                                                  information and images for a range of media outputs such as print,                   practical experience program enhances students’ exposure to the
   rehabilitation techniques and industry leadership (3rd year). These
                                                                                  websites and CD-ROM. The pathway to attaining the Certificate IV                     wider variety of career opportunities and provides pathways for
   courses have a strong focus on participation in external practical
                                                                                  may also incorporate the Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts                 networking in the sport and recreation industry. Within this course
   placement and simulated workplace learning where students treat
                                                                                  (Desktop Publishing). Students will acquire skills in graphic design                 opportunities exist to obtain a number of additional qualifications
   public clients under supervision.
                                                                                  and publication creation for the print industry. Drawing, digital                    and industry certificates.
   Major studies: Anatomy, Biomechanics, Communication, Dry                       photography and page layout are taught in integrated projects
   Needling, Massage, Massage Therapy, Myofascial techniques,                                                                                                          Major studies: Anatomy, Anatomy and kinesiology, Anatomy
                                                                                  that allow students to develop strong visual portfolios. Instruction                 and physiology, Event management, Exercise physiology,
   Myotherapy, Nutrition, Pathology, Physiology, Professional                     is in classrooms where there is significant hands-on time spent
   Practice, Rehabilitation techniques, Remedial Massage, Remedial                                                                                                     Exercise rehabilitation, Exercise science, First aid, Fitness, Health,
                                                                                  using design software and producing original content. Software                       Health and human movement, Health and physical education,
   Therapy, Spa Therapy, Sports Therapy, Therapeutic Massage.                     used includes, Adobe: InDesign, PhotoShop, Illustrator, Bridge,                      Leadership, Nutrition, Nutrition and exercise, Physical education,
   Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                              DreamWeaver and After Effects.                                                       Physical education and health, Physiology, Recreation, Recreation
   Selection mode: ATAR, form, interview. See Extra requirements                  Major studies: Colour theory, Colour theory, Colour theory,                          (Community Recreation), Sport, Sport (development), Sport
   for specifics.                                                                 Design, Design, Digitial imaging, Digitial imaging, Digitial imaging,                (leisure management), Sport (Science), Sport and recreation,
   Extra requirements:                                                            Photography, Photography, Principles of Design, Principles of                        Sport and recreation management, Sports (coaching), Sports
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a supplementary                      Design, Principles of Design, Print media, Print media, Typography,                  (management), Volunteer Management.
   form from www.kangan.edu.au/departments/centre-for-better-                     Typography, Typography, Web layout, Web layout, Web layout.                          Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
   living by 4 November (early round offer) or 16 December (rounds                Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                                    Selection mode: ATAR, form. See Extra Requirements for
   1 and 2). Applicants must indicate whether they have completed                 Selection mode: ATAR.                                                                specifics.
   an Introduction to Massage Short Course (highly recommended)
                                                                                                                                                                       Extra requirements:
   or equivalent. Applicants must attach certified evidence of course
   completion (if applicable).                                                                                                                                         Form: Applicants must complete and submit a supplementary
                                                                                                                                                                       form from www.kangan.edu.au/departments/centre-for-better-
   Interview (some applicants only): Applicants must attend an
                                                                                                                                                                       living by 4 November. Late applicants must phone the department
   interview. Details will be provided by telephone or mail.
                                                                                                                                                                       on (03) 9425 5635 for further information by 23 December.
   Late applicants must phone the department on (03) 9425 5635 for
                                                                                                                                                                       Additional information: Information sessions: Applicants are
   further information by 23 December.
                                                                                                                                                                       encouraged to attend either on 13 September or 13 December at
   Additional information: Information session: Applicants are                                                                                                         6.30 pm, Richmond campus, Building G. Applicants must phone
   encouraged to attend either on 15 September or 15 December at                                                                                                       (03) 9425 5635 to register their attendance at the information
   6.30 pm, Richmond campus, Building G. Applicants must phone                                                                                                         session.
   (03) 9425 5635 to register their attendance at the information
   session.




                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
224 | VTAC Guide 2012                                               KEY    CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
n Tourism                                                                   n Visual Merchandising

  Kangan, Broadmeadows                                                         Kangan, Richmond
   53591 (VGF), 53594 (Fee type determined by provider)                        53131 (VGF), 53134 (Fee type determined by provider)
  » Certificate IV in Tourism: FT1                                             » Diploma of Visual Merchandising: FT1.5
  » Advanced Diploma of Tourism: FT2                                           About the course: Equips students with the skills and knowledge
  About the course: The course provides students with the skills               necessary to establish a career in the visual merchandising and
  and knowledge to work in a range of careers in the tourism                   retail display industries. Students will have access to a VM studio
  industry; the Certificate IV in Tourism will be completed in the first       environment and gain practical and theoretical skills in visual
  year and this equips students with operational skills in retail travel,      merchandising, display, creating a theme, styling, design, colour
  meeting and events, and visitor information services. Subject areas          theory, illustration and multi media. A strong emphasis is placed
  in the first year include marketing, destination studies, airline            on “hands-on” experience and industry standards. Industry
  fares and ticketing, travel operations, Galileo airline reservations,        placement is a key component of the course commencing in the
  visitor information services, meetings and events, and Summit Pro.           first year.
  Hands-on activities will be incorporated throughout the course.              Major studies: Design, Digital art and design, Drafting, Drawing
  The second year of the course equips students to perform in a                and illustration, Graphic design, History (design), Illustration,
  supervisory or management role, or in running their own tourism              Marketing, Merchandising, Multimedia, Occupational health and
  business. The advanced diploma includes a specialist stream in               safety, Photo styling, Professional practice, Visual merchandising.
  marketing studies. In the second year students are required to               Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.
  design their own tourism business and write a business plan as
                                                                               Selection mode: Interview, folio presentation. See Extra
  part of their management and marketing studies.
                                                                               Requirements for specifics.
  Major studies: Australian Destinations, Business planning,
                                                                               Extra requirements:
  Customer service, E-commerce, Environmental management,
  Event management, Finance, Galileo, Human resource                           CY12
  management, International Destinations, Management,                          Interview: Applicants must register at www.kangan.edu.au/
  Marketing, Meetings and conventions management, Outdoor                      departments/centre-of-fashion/vtacinterview for an interview by
  leadership and guiding, Sustainability, Sustainability, Sustainable          29 October (late applicants by 26 November).
  business practises.                                                          Resume: Applicants must submit a copy of their resume at the
  Prerequisites: There are no prerequisite studies.                            interview.
  Selection mode: Form, information session, interview. See Extra              Folio presentation: Applicants must present a folio of their own
  requirements for specifics.                                                  work at the interview.
  Extra requirements:                                                          NONY12
  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a supplementary form               Interview: Applicants must register at www.kangan.edu.au/
  www.kangan.edu.au/departments/hospitality-travel-tourism by                  departments/centre-of-fashion/vtacinterview for an interview
  24 November. Applicants can also request the form by telephone,              time by 29 October (late applicants by 26 November).
  13 TAFE (13 8233). Information session: Applicants must attend               Resume: Applicants must submit a copy of their resume at the
  an information session at the Broadmeadows campus, Auditorium                interview.
  from 6pm on Wednesday 23 November. Applicants must telephone                 Folio and samples of work: Applicants must bring a design folio
  (03) 9279 2285 to book by 21 November.                                       and three samples of work they have produced to the interview.
  Interview: Applicants must book an interview time at the                     Test: Applicants will be required to sit an English literacy and
  information session. Late applicants must forward the form to the            numeracy test at the interview.
  Institute as soon as possible and may phone (03) 9279 2285 for
  further information.




                                                                                                                                                     Kangan Institute | 225
La Trobe University
                                                                      La Trobe University is one of Australia’s leading teaching and research          under Extra requirements in this guide. If you have not completed
                                                                      universities, with an international reputation for academic excellence.          prerequisite studies (or equivalent), please contact the relevant faculty
                                                                      Our aim is to create infinite possibilities for students, staff and our          for further advice. For further information contact 1300 135 045.
                                                                      communities through education and research.
                                                                                                                                                       General Achievement Test (GAT)
                                                                      The University offers over 400 undergraduate and postgraduate courses            Year 12 applicants may receive some middle-band consideration for GAT
                                                                      and hosts more than 30,000 students, including over 6000 international           results. For more information, see www.latrobe.edu.au/access
                                                                      students, from more than 100 countries.
                                                                      La Trobe’s main campus is in the Melbourne suburb of Bundoora,                   Grade Point Average (GPA)
                                                                      approximately 14 km from the CBD; the University also has regional teaching      Courses which list Grade Point Average (GPA) in the selection mode for
                                                                      campuses in Bendigo, Albury-Wodonga, Mildura and Shepparton.                     Non-Year 12 applicants, consider GPAs in combination with the other
                                                                                                                                                       selection criteria listed in the course entry. For more information see:
                                                                      Various accommodation options are available to students at La Trobe’s
                                                                                                                                                       www.latrobe.edu.au/study
                                                                      campuses, including residential colleges and self-contained units; and
                                                                      the University provides information and advice to help students find             Guaranteed Entry
                                                                      off-campus accommodation.                                                        La Trobe University will guarantee entry into CSP undergraduate places
                                                                      La Trobe prides itself on the quality of its teaching and student support        in selected courses in 2012 for all current Year 12 students who achieve
                                                                      services. Each campus offers a range of services to give students the            the required ATAR and meet any prerequisites and special requirements.
                                                                      best possible support while they study, including access to world-class          Applicants who do not achieve an ATAR that guarantees them entry
                                                                      libraries, academic skills support, careers and IT services, and diverse         into a course are considered through normal selection processes. See
                                                                      sporting, cultural and social activities.                                        individual course entries.
  Campus location and contacts                                        Recent additions to La Trobe’s facilities include extensive renovations to add   Overseas qualifications
                                                                      hundreds of new study spaces to the Borchardt Library on our Melbourne           Applicants who hold overseas qualifications will meet minimum
Melbourne campus                      Postal address: PO Box 4095     campus, and a new $10 million campus building in Shepparton.                     tertiary entrance requirements if these are assessed by VTAC as
(Bundoora)                            Mildura VIC 3502                La Trobe is one of Australia’s leading research universities. It is a member     comparable to the required Victorian qualifications. A list of overseas
Plenty Road Bundoora VIC 3086         www.latrobe.edu.au/mildura      of Innovative Research Universities Australia – a network that attracts          qualifications that meet minimum tertiary entrance requirements is
Telephone: (03) 9479 1111             Shepparton campus               more than $340 million in funding per year.                                      available on the VTAC website.
Postal address: La Trobe University   210 Fryers Street Shepparton    The University is significantly expanding its research capacity. In June 2009,   Assessments are based on information from organisations including the
VIC 3086                              VIC 3630                        as part of a $288 million joint venture with the Victorian Government, La        National Office of Overseas Skills Recognition (NOOSR), the Victorian
www.latrobe.edu.au                    Telephone: (03) 5820 8600       Trobe commenced construction of the Centre for AgriBioscience (AgriBio).         Curriculum and Assessment Authority (VCAA) and other tertiary
Bendigo campus                        Postal address: PO Box 6044     To be operational in 2012, AgriBio is set to be a world-leading centre for       admissions bodies.
Edwards Road Flora Hill VIC 3550                                      agricultural bioscience research and development.                                VTAC will advise the institutions to which you have applied whether
                                      Shepparton VIC 3632
Telephone: (03) 5444 7222             www.latrobe.edu.au/             La Trobe has recently started construction of the $94 million La Trobe           the minimum requirement has been met. If you have also undertaken
Postal address: PO Box 199            shepparton                      Institute for Molecular Science (LIMS). The new LIMS complex will be             other/additional overseas studies (complete or incomplete), VTAC will
Bendigo VIC 3552                      Course enquiries:               a modern research hub designed to facilitate collaboration between               advise institutions of the level of the award in terms of the Australian
www.latrobe.edu.au/bendigo            Future Students Centre          leading scientists, and an important training centre providing students          Qualifications Framework according to NOOSR guidelines. The individual
Albury-Wodonga campus                                                 with access to the latest research equipment and exposure to high                course authorities will then gauge whether your particular level of
                                      Telephone: 1300 135 045
University Drive (off Moorefield                                      impact research projects.                                                        achievement is suitable for entry into that course.
                                      Fax: 03) 9479 5153
Park Drive) Wodonga VIC 3690                                          La Trobe is committed to internationalisation. It is a founding member           Internal Course Transfers
                                      Enquire online:
Telephone: (02) 6024 9790                                             of the International Network of Universities and has student exchange            La Trobe University students who wish to transfer to another course
                                      www.latrobe.edu.au/ask
Postal address: PO Box 821                                            links with more than 100 partner institutions in over 30 countries,              within the University prior to the completion of their current course
                                      Indigenous Student
                                                                      research links with more than 80 universities around the world, and              should refer to www.latrobe.edu/study/apply
Wodonga VIC 3689                      Recruitment Officer:
                                                                      partnerships with leading organisations worldwide, including Microsoft,
www.latrobe.edu.au/aw                 email: indigenous_enquiries@                                                                                     Interviews, folios and additional information
                                                                      DuPont, NEC Corporation and Amgen.
Mildura campus                        latrobe.edu.au
                                                                                                                                                       Applicants who are required to attend an interview or supply any
Benetook Avenue Mildura VIC 3500      www.latrobe.edu.au/             Minimum tertiary entrance requirements                                           additional information will need to demonstrate a range of attributes,
Telephone: (03) 5051 4000             indigenous                                                                                                       e.g. personal motivation, relevant experience or previous study and/or an
                                                                      See page 7.
                                                                                                                                                       understanding of the course and potential employment opportunities.
  Open days:                                                          Principles of selection                                                          Applicants required to submit a folio should note that work should be
                                                                      Current Year 12                                                                  representative of their ideas and abilities, show originality, innovation,
Information on all open day activities - www.latrobe.edu.au/openday                                                                                    imagination, experimentation and competence in the basic skills for the
Bendigo: Sunday 28 August (10.00am – 4.00pm)                          Applicants to La Trobe courses are usually selected on the basis of their
                                                                                                                                                       course to which they are applying.
Shepparton: Friday12 August (12.00pm – 7.00pm)                        academic performance in Year 12 including the completion of pre-requisite
                                                                      studies. Some courses specify other special entry requirements which also        Contact the Future Students Centre on 1300 135 045 for further information.
Mildura: Sunday 14 August (10.00am- 2.30pm)
Albury-Wodonga: Sunday 21 August (10.00am – 3.00pm)                   inform selection. These are listed under course entries in this guide.
                                                                                                                                                       Course fees
Melbourne: Sunday 7 August (10.00am – 4.00pm)                         Non-Year 12
Mildura (Roadshow): 18 July – 9 September                                                                                                              The cost of a subject and the indicative minimum student contribution
                                                                      Non-year 12 applicants are selected primarily on academic merit as               for a course is available from the following website: www.latrobe.edu.
(contact campus for times)                                            indicated by the applicant’s previous academic record. This may have             au/students/fees/
                                                                      been obtained via VCE (or equivalent), TAFE study (based on Cert IV or
  Semester dates:                                                     higher, partial or complete) or university study (partial or complete).          Further information
                                                                      Some applicants, who have not completed VCE or further study, may
Semester 1: 27 February – 1 June                                                                                                                       Clinical and professional placements
                                                                      apply through Category 1 of the Special Entry Access Schemes (SEAS).
Semester 2: 23 July – 26 October                                      For information on this scheme see the SEAS booklet or visit www.                Some courses require students to undertake clinical and professional
                                                                      latrobe.edu.au/matureage                                                         placements. In courses where students are required to undertake such
                                                                                                                                                       placements, students may come into contact with vulnerable people.
  Fees:                                                               Non-year 12 applicants may be required to complete and submit the                Agencies and venues hosting placements require students to provide
                                                                      VTAC Pi form, satisfy the relevant prerequisite studies (or equivalent)
For further information about fees for these courses go to:           and complete other specific course entry requirements. These are listed
http://www.latrobe.edu.au/students/fees/

226 | VTAC Guide 2012
a National Police Security Check and a Working With Children (WWC)            Course information sessions                                                A free airport or railway reception service
Check. Students who have concerns about undertaking such checks               Course information sessions for courses are not compulsory but             A Welcome Festival Orientation program and an Arrival Guide
should consult the relevant course selection officer prior to application.    attendance is recommended. Information on all courses is available at      Staff who offer advice and support on personal, financial or cultural
Furthermore, many health sciences courses require students to                 Open Day and other events for future students. For information on dates    issues, transition to life in Australia and study at La Trobe University
undertake placements in hospitals. Most hospital settings require             and times, contact the Future Students Centre on 1300 135 045.
                                                                                                                                                         Specialised information for sponsored students and students with families
students to be immunised against a variety of diseases. It is therefore
strongly recommended that successful applicants in courses requiring
                                                                              Going to uni in 2012                                                       Social activities and programs varying from campus to campus e.g. day trips,
hospital placements seek immunisation against diseases including              The Australian Government has introduced reforms to create an              a Weekend Homestay and a language and cultural exchange program
hepatitis, rubella, measles, mumps, influenza, diphtheria, pertussis          integrated policy framework based on the principles of sustainability,
                                                                                                                                                         A Returning Home program to ease your transition to returning home.
(whooping cough), tetanus, varicella (chicken pox) and a mantoux test         quality, equity and diversity. The reforms place a renewed emphasis on
                                                                              learning and teaching outcomes and greater recognition on the role of      For further information, visit: www.latrobe.edu.au/international/life/
prior to commencing their course. Evidence of such immunisations will
                                                                              regional campuses and providers. Information for applicants is available   supportservices
be required post enrolment. Further information may be obtained from
the relevant course selection officer.                                        from the following website: www.goingtouni.gov.au                          Students with disabilities, mental health issues or ongoing medical
                                                                                                                                                         conditions
Course information                                                            Student services                                                           La Trobe welcomes students with a disability. The Equality and Diversity
Find information on all La Trobe University courses online, at www.latrobe.   Indigenous Student services                                                Centre can provide information and support to people with a disability,
edu.au/coursefinder You can also find summary information in our 2012                                                                                    mental health issue or ongoing medical condition. Future students
                                                                              Future Indigenous students are welcome to contact Indigenous Student
Undergraduate Course Guide, available at all La Trobe campuses and online                                                                                are encouraged to contact the relevant Disability Liaison Officer at the
                                                                              Services for advice about courses, application procedures, scholarships
at www.latrobe.edu.au/study; please call the Future Students Centre on                                                                                   campus where they intend to study in order to discuss their needs.
                                                                              and other aspects of studying at La Trobe University.
1300 135 045 if you’d like to order a copy by phone. You may also like to                                                                                Melbourne: (03) 9479 2900/TTY (03) 9479 2309; Bendigo: (03) 5444
check our FAQs, at: www.latrobe.edu.au/ask                                    For more information, send an email to
                                                                                                                                                         7941; Albury-Wodonga: (02) 6024 9628; Mildura: (03) 5022 3629;
If you are an international student visit: www.latrobe.edu.au/                indigenous_enquiries@latrobe.edu.au                                        Shepparton: (03) 5821 8450.
international You can also call us on (+61 3) 9627 4805 or ( free call        International student services                                             For more information visit www.latrobe.edu.au/equality/disability
within Australia): 1800 619 768; Fax (+61 3) 9479 3660; or Email:
                                                                              La Trobe University provides many specialised support services to help     Accessible accommodation for people with disabilities is available at
international@latrobe.edu.au
                                                                              international students adjust to living in Australia. We understand the    Menzies College and Glenn College, Melbourne (Bundoora) campus.
La Trobe University is a registered provider under the Commonwealth           difficulties international students might face in adjusting to a new       Telephone (03) 9479 1071 or (03) 9479 5100.
Register of Institutions and Courses for Overseas Students (CRICOS).          culture and landscape, making new friends and studying successfully, all
CRICOS Provider Number 00115M.                                                                                                                           NOTE: Applicants with a disability should ensure that they are aware of
                                                                              at the same time. Our staff will ensure that you don’t have to cope with   the physical components and location requirements of all courses for
                                                                              this all on your own. Services provided include:                           which they wish to apply. If an applicant has concerns about issues tha
                                                                              Assistance with visa, health insurance and temporary accommodation         may affect their potential participation, they should contact the relevant
                                                                              arrangements and pre-departure information                                 School to discuss any possible course modifications.



  Courses available through VTAC

n Accounting                                                                       Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in          n Accounting
                                                                                   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.
     La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                       Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                      La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga
                                                                                   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
      21821 (CSP), 21823 (IFP)                                                     GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                                                                                                               20251 (CSP)
     » Bachelor of Accounting: FT3, PTA                                            requirements for specifics.                                                » Bachelor of Business (Accounting): FT3, PTA
       21821            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers   Total offers        Middle-band: Re-ranking based on performance in prerequisite
                                                                                   studies and criteria associated with the La Trobe University               La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
       Jan 2011          70.15       13.46          52             81              Rural and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS) and to SEAS                24641 (CSP)
       Feb 2011          68.50       12.07          65            111              applicants.                                                                » Bachelor of Business (Accounting): FT3, PTA
                                                                                   Extra requirements:
     About the course: This professional accounting qualification
     offers learning in career-specific areas including accounting,                NONY12                                                                     La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
     auditing, finance, business law and taxation, and is the only                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see               22541 (CSP)
     accounting course in Australia offering subjects in forensic                  page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during            » Bachelor of Business (Accounting): FT3, PTA
     accounting and public sector accounting. It fulfils requirements              the selection process. This may include information such as work
     for membership of CPA Australia and the Institute of Chartered                experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide          La Trobe Uni, Mildura
     Accountants in Australia, and allows students to select advanced              other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
                                                                                                                                                               25261 (CSP)
     subjects in management, marketing, finance and economics.                     Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
     Students can take advantage of overseas study opportunities,                  Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                                                                                                              » Bachelor of Business (Accounting): FT3, PTA
     including an International Accounting Study Tour Program visiting             36).
     major international business organisations.                                                                                                              La Trobe Uni, Shepparton
     First year comprises studies that span accounting, economics,                                                                                             25271 (CSP)
     management, information systems, law, and business statistics.                                                                                           » Bachelor of Business (Accounting): FT3, PTA
     All students graduate with an accounting major; the course also                                                                                          About the course: This business degree provides an accounting
     allows for an additional optional eight-subject major or four-                                                                                           specialization in a broader business context and offers learning in
     subject minor.                                                                                                                                           career-specific areas including accounting, auditing, business law,
     Major studies: Melbourne: Accounting, Business, Business                                                                                                 finance, forensic accounting, public sector accounting and taxation.
     economics, Finance, Financial management, Financial planning,                                                                                            In addition to fulfilling requirements for membership of CPA
     Human resource management, International Management,                                                                                                     Australia and the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia,
     Macroeconomics, Management information systems, Marketing.                                                                                               students can select advanced subjects in management, marketing,


                                                                                                                                                                             La Trobe University | 227
n Higher Education qualification                             n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                              n Other Graduates

   finance and economics. Students can take advantage of overseas                  Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                Extra requirements:
   study opportunities, including an International Accounting Study                a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                              NONY12
   Tour Program visiting major international business organisations.               GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                                                                                                                        Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   First year comprises eight compulsory subjects, spanning                        requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                                        page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   accounting, economics, management, information systems, law,                    Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =                              the selection process. This may include information such as work
   and business statistics. All students graduate with an accounting               an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to                       experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   major; the course also allows for an additional optional eight-                 performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS applicants..                         other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   subject major or four-subject minor. Major areas of study other
                                                                                   Extra requirements:                                                                  Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   than accounting vary by campus.
                                                                                   NONY12                                                                               Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Major studies: Accounting, Business, Business Economics,
                                                                                   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                        36).
   Business Law, Financial Management, Financial Planning, Human
   Resource Management, International Business, International                      page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Management, Logistics, Macroeconomics, Management,                              the selection process. This may include information such as work               n Accounting/Finance
   Management Information Systems, Marketing.                                      experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
                                                                                   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in                                                                                                         La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.                                       Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                                   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                                                                                                                        21211 (CSP), 21213 (IFP)
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                                                                                                » Bachelor of Accounting/Bachelor of Finance: FT4, PTA
                                                                                   36).
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                                                                                                           21211             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers

   requirements for specifics.                                               n Accounting/Economics                                                                      Jan 2011           72.05        4.17           25              29
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on performance in prerequisite
                                                                                                                                                                         Feb 2011           72.05        4.17           27              40
   studies and criteria associated with the La Trobe University Rural and          La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS) and to SEAS applicants.                   21001 (CSP), 21003 (IFP)                                                            About the course: This degree allows students to undertake
   Extra requirements:                                                             » Bachelor of Accounting/Bachelor of Economics: FT4, PTA                             complementary studies from accounting and finance. The
   NONY12                                                                                                                                                               accounting component offers students subjects from career-
                                                                                     21001            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers             specific areas including accounting, auditing, business law
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                     Jan 2011          76.00         8.33           12             13                   and taxation while attaining professional accreditation as an
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                                                                                                                        accountant. The finance component is specifically designed to
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                  Feb 2011          76.00         8.33           12             15                   meet academic and vocational requirements for a career in the
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
                                                                                                                                                                        finance industry. This course is structured to meet the accreditation
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).              About the course: This double degree allows students to
                                                                                                                                                                        requirements of CPA Australia. In order to meet the accreditation
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                  complement a professional accounting qualification with the study
                                                                                                                                                                        requirements of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                  of economic theory and practice. The accounting qualification
                                                                                                                                                                        (ICAA), Taxation and Auditing must be completed.
   36).                                                                            covers various career-specific areas, including accounting, auditing,
                                                                                   finance, business law and taxation. Students also study core areas                   Major studies: Accounting, Auditing, Auditing and taxation,
                                                                                   of economics, and its application to particular areas and policy                     Banking and finance, Business, Business (accounting), Business
n Accounting and Finance                                                           issues. Students undertake majors in accounting and economics,                       (finance), Business statistics, Economics, Finance, Financial
                                                                                   with the option of a third major or a minor. This course is                          accounting, Financial management, Financial planning, Forensic
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                         structured to meet the accreditation requirements of CPA Australia.                  accounting, Human resource management, International finance,
                                                                                   In order to meet the accreditation requirements of the Institute of                  International trade, Investments and portfolio management,
   22551 (CSP)                                                                                                                                                          Law (commercial), Macroeconomics, Management accounting,
                                                                                   Chartered Accountants in Australia (ICAA), Taxation and Auditing
   » Bachelor of Business (Accounting and Finance): FT3, PTA                       must be completed. By completing approved subjects, graduates                        Management information systems, Microeconomics, Public sector
   About the course: This accredited degree provides students                      may satisfy the educational requirements of the Financial Services                   management, Statistics, Taxation and auditing.
   with foundation knowledge and skills required to practice both                  Institute of Australasia (FINSIA).                                                   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   finance and accounting and is accredited by both CPA Australia                                                                                                       English (ESL) or 20 in any other English, and a study score of at
                                                                                   Major studies: Accounting, Auditing, Business, Econometrics,
   and the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia. The first                                                                                                   least 20 in mathematics (any).
                                                                                   Economics, Finance, Financial accounting, Financial
   year provides students with an introduction to accounting, finance,
                                                                                   management, Financial planning, Forensic accounting, Human                           Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   economics, statistics and information systems. Students would
                                                                                   resource management, Industrial relations, International                             a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   also have the opportunity to take a broad range of electives in
                                                                                   trade, Macroeconomics, Management accounting,                                        GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   finance and/or accounting, commencing in the second year. The
                                                                                   Management information systems, Microeconomics, Statistics,                          requirements for specifics.
   degree contains a six-subject specialisation in accounting, and a
                                                                                   Taxation and auditing.                                                               Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =
   five-subject specialisation in finance. Students can take advantage
   of overseas study opportunities, including an International                     Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in                         an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to
   Accounting Study Tour Program visiting major international                      English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and a study score of at least               performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS applicants.
   business organizations. The course provides students with the                   20 in mathematics (any).                                                             Extra requirements:
   flexibility to transfer into the Bachelor of Business degree, taking            Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                NONY12
   any major, or any Bachelor of Finance Degree prior to commencing                a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
                                                                                                                                                                        Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   the second year.                                                                GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                                                                                                                        page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Major studies: Advanced Financial Accounting, Auditing,                         requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                                        the selection process. This may include information such as work
   Business Law, Business Statistics, Corporate Finance, Economics,                Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =                              experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   Finance, Financial Instruments, Foundations of Management,                      an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to                       other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   Investment Portfolio Management, Management Accounting and                      performance in prerequisite studies, business studies (any) and to
                                                                                                                                                                        Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Control, Management Information Systems, Taxation.                              SEAS applicants.
                                                                                                                                                                        Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in                                                                                                         36).
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and a study score of at least
   20 in mathematics (any).




                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
228 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                 KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
n Accounting/Information Technology                                         or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants               a maximum of 3 points. Performance in prerequisite studies will
                                                                            may wish to provide other documentation in support of their               be considered and criteria associated with the La Trobe University
                                                                            application (see page 21).                                                Rural and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS).
   La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
                                                                            Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions            Extra requirements:
   24411 (CSP), 24413 (IFP)                                                 Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page            NONY12
   » Bachelor of Accounting/Bachelor of Information                         36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit
                                                                                                                                                      Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
     Technology: FT4                                                        the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).
                                                                                                                                                      (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered
    24411           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers                                                                                during the selection process. This may include information such
    Jan 2011          n/a           -           0              2
                                                                         n Agricultural Science                                                       as work experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish
                                                                                                                                                      to provide other documentation in support of their application
    Feb 2011          n/a           -           0              2            La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga                                              (see page 21).
   About the course: This double-degree program combines                    20221 (CSP), 20223 (IFP)                                                  Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   the Bachelor of Accounting with the Bachelor of Information                                                                                        Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                            » Bachelor of Agricultural Science: FT4, PTA                              36). Applicants described in the Admissions Tests section must sit
   Technology and is designed to meet the needs of industry by
   providing graduates with professional accreditation in Accounting                                                                                  the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).
                                                                            La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   and Information Technology. Students will have vocational
                                                                            21201 (CSP), 21203 (IFP)
   choices in both discipline areas as well as options that require                                                                                n Agricultural Science/Business
   expertise in both areas. Guaranteed Entry: Year 12 applicants            » Bachelor of Agricultural Science: FT4, PTA
   only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be offered a
   Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is
                                                                             21201            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers      La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   below will be considered through normal selection processes. The          Jan 2011          52.55        9.09         44             48            21481 (CSP), 21483 (IFP)
   Accounting component of the course is made up of seven core               Feb 2011          52.55       13.33         46             57            » Bachelor of Agricultural Science/Bachelor of Business:
   business subjects, eight specialist commerce subjects and three                                                                                      FT5, PTA
   elective School of Business subjects. The Information Technology         About the course: The four-year program concentrates on
   component is made up of nine core IT subjects, seven elective            sciences that underpin soil productivity, sustainable plant and            21481            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers    Total offers

   IT subjects and two elective subjects from IT or other discipline.       animal production, management and marketing of products                    Jan 2011          76.50       33.33          6               6
   The curriculum fulfils the requirements for membership in CPA            through supply chains and environmental management. Case
                                                                                                                                                       Feb 2011          73.50       42.86          7               9
   Australia and the Institute of Chartered Accountants.                    studies involving problem-solving analyses of real-life farm/
   Major studies: Accounting, Auditing, Financial accounting,               industry problems integrate knowledge of the production system.           About the course: Combines the practical career orientated
   Information systems, Information systems management,                     A research project (off-campus possible) is completed in the final        science of the Bachelor of Agricultural Science with the business
   Information technology, Management, Object-oriented                      semester. Twelve weeks of approved work experience is spread              and management skills of the Bachelor of Business. This 5-year
   development, Programming.                                                over three different agricultural enterprises. First year of the          630 credit point program includes science units that focus on soil
                                                                            course is available at the Albury-Wodonga campus, with students           productivity and sustainable plant and animal production. Case
   Prerequisites: Minimum ATAR of 70.00. Units 3 and 4– English
                                                                            transferring to Melbourne to complete their degree.                       studies involving problem-solving analyses of real-life agricultural
   (any) and mathematics (any).
                                                                            Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR        businesses integrate disciplinary knowledge for different
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
                                                                            of 65 or more will be offered a Commonwealth Supported Place.             production systems. The business units studied involve specialist
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
                                                                            Applicants whose ATAR is below 65 will be considered through              studies in marketing, management, financial management
   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                            normal selection processes.                                               or business economics.Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants
   requirements for specifics..
                                                                            Major studies: Agribusiness, Agricultural biotechnology,                  only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be offered a
   Middle-band: Re-ranking is based on study scores achieved                                                                                          Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below
                                                                            Agricultural marketing, Agricultural science, Agriculture, Animal
   in prerequisite studies and business studies (any) and criteria                                                                                    80 will be considered through normal selection processes.
                                                                            and plant biology, Plant and animal production, Soil science.
   associated with the La Trobe University Rural and Regional Student
                                                                            Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any).                               Major studies: Agricultural economics, Agricultural science,
   Access Scheme (RRSAS).
                                                                                                                                                      Agriculture, Animal and plant biology, Business, Business
   Extra requirements:                                                      Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                     (economics), Economics, Finance, Management, Management
                                                                            a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                   (financial), Marketing, Plant and animal production, Soil science.
   NONY12
                                                                            GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see            requirements for specifics.                                               Prerequisites: Units 1 and 2–general mathematics or
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                                                                                    mathematical methods (CAS). Units 3 and 4–a study score of at
                                                                            Middle-band: Completing any of agriculture and horticulture,              least 30 in English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.
   the selection process. This may include information such as work
                                                                            biology, chemistry, mathematical methods (CAS), physics or
                                                                            specialist mathematics = 1 aggregate point higher per study to




                                                                                                                                                                   La Trobe University | 229
n Higher Education qualification                           n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               n Other Graduates

   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                          Extra requirements:                                                            n Archaeology
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                        NONY12
   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra
   requirements for specifics.
                                                                                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                        La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
                                                                                  page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                      21841 (CSP), 21843 (IFP)
   Middle-band: Completing any of agriculture and horticulture,                   the selection process. This may include information such as work
   biology, chemistry, mathematical methods (CAS), physics,                       or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                          » Bachelor of Archaeology: FT3, PTA
   specialist mathematics = 1 aggregate point higher per study, to a              may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                           21841             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
   maximum 3 points.                                                              application (see page 21).
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                  Jan 2011           74.55        36.11          36              55
                                                                                  Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   NONY12                                                                         Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                        Feb 2011           74.55        45.00          42              70
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                  36).
                                                                                                                                                                       About the course: Provides a global perspective on human
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                                                                                                     history from our earliest ancestors in Africa through the key
   the selection process. This may include information such as work         n Animal and Veterinary Biosciences                                                        developments of farming and city life to the modern world. The
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                                                                                                         course includes core archaeology subjects and subjects from
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   application (see page 21).
                                                                                  La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              a list of archaeology electives. Students may choose subjects
                                                                                                                                                                       from one of the three following streams: Australian, Civilisations
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                                   21531 (CSP), 21533 (IFP)
                                                                                                                                                                       or Palaeolithic (Hunter-Gatherer). Guaranteed entry: Year 12
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                 » Bachelor of Animal and Veterinary Bioscience: FT3, PTA                             applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be
   36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit                21531            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers             offered a Commonwealth supported place. Applicants whose ATAR
   the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).                                                                                                         is below 80 will be considered through normal selection processes.
                                                                                    Jan 2011          70.35        16.13           93            118                   Major studies: Archaeology.
n Agricultural Science/International                                                Feb 2011          70.15        18.09           97            166                   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in
  Development                                                                                                                                                          English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.
                                                                                  About the course: Provides a general education in animal
                                                                                  science designed to equip graduates for further study in                             Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                        veterinary sciences or employment in animal research, animal                         a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
                                                                                  care and welfare, and the animal health, agricultural or                             GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   21271 (CSP), 21273 (IFP)                                                                                                                                            requirements for specifics.
                                                                                  biotechnology industries. The first year provides a foundation
   » Bachelor of Agricultural Science/Bachelor of                                 in chemistry, physics, biology and training in animal handling                       Middle-band: Performance in English (any), humanities (any),
     International Development: FT5, PTA                                          and behaviour. Later years allow for specialisations in animal                       LOTE (any), drama, theatre studies, legal studies and psychology.
    21271            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers           ecology or physiology, animal genetics, animal health or                             Consideration given to SEAS applicants.
                                                                                  animal biotechnology. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants                           Extra requirements:
    Jan 2011          83.00          -           4              4                 only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be offered a
                                                                                                                                                                       NONY12
    Feb 2011          83.00          -           4              6                 Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below
                                                                                  80 will be considered through normal selection processes.                            Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
   About the course: Combines the scientific understanding                                                                                                             (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered
                                                                                  Major studies: Animal and plant biology, Animal breeding,
   of sustainable soil, plant and animal production, with an                                                                                                           during the selection process. This may include information such as
                                                                                  Animal health, Biochemistry, Biology, Genetics, Microbiology,
   understanding of programs for social and economic change,                                                                                                           work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
                                                                                  Molecular and cell biology, Nutrition and feed production, Plant
   instituted by government and non-government organisations, in                                                                                                       may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
                                                                                  and animal production, Zoology.
   developing areas of Africa, Latin America and Asia. This 5-year,                                                                                                    application (see page 21).
   630 credit point program includes science units that focus on soil             Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any).
                                                                                                                                                                       Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   productivity and sustainable plant and animal production systems.              Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Case studies involving problem-solving analysis of real-life                   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                              36).
   problems integrate knowledge of the production system. The                     GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   non-science units are from the disciplines of anthropology, history,           requirements for specifics.
   politics and sociology. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants                   Middle-band: Completing any of biology, chemistry,
   only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be offered a                  mathematical methods (CAS), physics or specialist mathematics
   Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below                   = 1.5 aggregate points higher per study, to a maximum 3 points.
   80 will be considered through normal selection processes.                      Performance in prerequisite studies will be considered.
   Major studies: Agricultural science, Agriculture, Anthropology,                Extra requirements:
   Development studies, International agribusiness, International                 NONY12
   development, Plant and animal production, Politics, Sociology,
   Soil science.                                                                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                  page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                   the selection process. This may include information such as work
   English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.                                      or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and a two-stage process with                        may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                          application (see page 21).
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                    Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   requirements for specifics.                                                    Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Middle-band: Completing any of agriculture and horticulture,                   36).
   biology, chemistry, mathematical methods (CAS), physics or
   specialist mathematics = 1 aggregate point higher per study,
   Maximum 3 points.




                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
230 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
n Arts                                                                        Extra requirements:                                                         Extra requirements:
                                                                              NONY12                                                                      NONY12
  La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga                                                Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form                Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
   20101 (CSP), 20103 (IFP)                                                   (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered               (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered
                                                                              during the selection process. This may include information such as          during the selection process. This may include information such as
  » Bachelor of Arts: FT3, PTA                                                work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants            work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
   20101            Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers   Total offers      may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                 may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
                                                                              application (see page 21).                                                  application (see page 21).
   Jan 2011          50.55        14.29          15             21
                                                                              Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions              Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Feb 2011            n/a          -            16             25            Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page              Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                              36).                                                                        36).
  La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
   24571 (CSP), 24573 (IFP)                                                 n Arts                                                                     n Arts/Accounting
  » Bachelor of Arts: FT3, PTA
                                                                              La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                     La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   24571            Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                               21711 (CSP), 21713 (IFP)                                                   21011 (CSP), 21013 (IFP)
   Jan 2011          50.65        20.00          45             53            » Bachelor of Arts: FT3, PTA                                                » Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Accounting: FT4, PTA
   Feb 2011          50.65        42.31          57             95
                                                                               21711            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers   Total offers        21011            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers   Total offers

                                                                               Jan 2011          70.15       15.93          273           428              Jan 2011          72.20          -            7              8
  La Trobe Uni, Mildura
                                                                               Feb 2011          99.05       70.00          454           732              Feb 2011          72.20          -            7              9
   25571 (CSP), 25573 (IFP)
  » Bachelor of Arts: FT3, PTA                                                About the course: The Bachelor of Arts is a flexible degree which           About the course: This double degree allows students to
                                                                              allows students to create a course that suits their own needs.              undertake complementary studies from humanities, social
   25571            Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                              Subjects are selected based on your interests and with over 30              sciences and accounting. The professionally-accredited accounting
   Jan 2011          51.75        25.00           8             11            disciplines and areas of study, you can create a course to meet your        component offers subjects from career-specific areas including
                                                                              career goals.                                                               financial and management accounting, auditing, finance, business
   Feb 2011          51.75        54.55          12             20
                                                                              In 2012 the Faculty of Humanities and Social Sciences will be               law and taxation. The arts component allows students to pursue
                                                                              offering a Work Ready Bachelor of Arts for the first time. The Work         an area of intellectual interest, such as a language, politics, or
  La Trobe Uni, Shepparton                                                    Ready Bachelor of Arts will build on the traditional flexibility            the social context in which students may choose to practise as an
   25481 (CSP), 25483 (IFP)                                                   of the Bachelor of Arts and prepare you for the workforce by                accountant Students must complete the compulsory and elective
                                                                              offering additional specific career development subjects and work           subjects required for each degree, including at least one arts major,
  » Bachelor of Arts: FT3, PTA                                                                                                                            comprising 30 credit points in first year, 40 credit points in second
                                                                              placements. By providing a full portfolio of skills and experiences,
   25481            Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers   Total offers      the degree is designed to transition you from university to work.           year and 60 credit points in third year. This course is structured to
                                                                                                                                                          meet the accreditation requirements of CPA Australia. In order to
   Jan 2011          52.85        33.33           6             13            Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR
                                                                                                                                                          meet the accreditation requirements of the Institute of Chartered
                                                                              of 75 or more will be offered a Commonwealth supported place.
   Feb 2011          52.85        55.56          10             21                                                                                        Accountants in Australia (ICAA), Taxation and Auditing must be
                                                                              Applicants whose ATAR is below 75 will be considered through
                                                                                                                                                          completed.
  About the course: Allows students to create a course that suits             normal selection processes.
                                                                                                                                                          Major studies: Aboriginal studies, Accounting, Anthropology,
  their own interests and needs. In addition to the wide range of             Major studies: Aboriginal studies, Anthropology, Archaeology,
                                                                                                                                                          Archaeology, Art history, Asian languages, Asian studies, Auditing,
  studies in humanities and social sciences, students can include             Art history, Asian languages, Asian studies, Chinese, Cinema
                                                                                                                                                          Australian studies, Business, Chinese, Cinema studies, Creative
  studies from other areas (provided all relevant selection criteria          studies, Creative writing, Drama, English, European studies, French,
                                                                                                                                                          writing, Drama, English, European studies, Finance, Financial
  are satisfied). Students can choose a major in one discipline or            Gender studies, Greek studies (ancient and modern Greek), Hindi,
                                                                                                                                                          accounting, Financial management, Financial planning, Forensic
  complete a double major in two different disciplines. Students              History, Indonesian, International development, Italian studies,
                                                                                                                                                          accounting, French, Gender studies, Hindi, History, Human resource
  undertake subjects in at least three disciplines in their first year of     Japanese, Latin, Latin American studies, Legal studies, Linguistics,
                                                                                                                                                          management, Indonesian, International trade, Italian studies,
  study. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with           Media studies, Mediterranean, Photojournalism, Politics,
                                                                                                                                                          Japanese, Latin American studies, Legal studies, Linguistics,
  an ATAR of 60 or more will be offered a Commonwealth supported              Psychology, Religious studies, Sociology, Spanish, Theatre studies.
                                                                                                                                                          Macroeconomics, Management accounting, Management
  place. Applicants whose ATAR is below 60 will be considered                 Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                information systems, Media studies, Philosophy, Photojournalism,
  through normal selection processes.                                         English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.                                   Politics, Religious studies, Sociology, Spanish, Taxation and
  Major studies: Albury-Wodonga: English, History, Politics,                  Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                       auditing, Theatre studies.
  Psychology, Social sciences, Sociology. Bendigo: English,                   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                     Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in
  History, Indonesian, Planning, Politics, Psychology, Religious              GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                 English (ESL) or 25 in any other English and a study score of at least
  and Spirituality Studies, Sociology. Mildura: English, History,             requirements for specifics.                                                 20 in mathematics (any).
  Psychology, Social sciences. Shepparton: English, History, Politics,        Middle-band: Completing classical societies and cultures,
  Psychology, Sociology.                                                                                                                                  Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
                                                                              contemporary Australian society, English language, history (any),           a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
  Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in                international politics: international studies, literature, LOTE (any),      GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
  English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.                                   philosophy, international politics: national politics, religion and         requirements for specifics.
  Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                       society, texts and traditions = an aggregate 1 point higher per
                                                                                                                                                          Middle-band: Re-ranking based on performance in prerequisite
  a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                     study, to a maximum 3 points. Re-ranking based on English (ESL),
                                                                                                                                                          studies. Consideration will be given to SEAS applicants.
  GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                 Literature, English, humanities (any), LOTE (any), drama, theatre
  requirements for specifics.                                                 studies, legal studies and psychology. Consideration given to SEAS
  Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), humanities                  applicants.
  (any), LOTE (any), drama, theatre studies, legal studies and
  psychology. Consideration given to the La Trobe University Rural
  and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS) and SEAS applicants.



                                                                                                                                                                        La Trobe University | 231
n Higher Education qualification                          n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               n Other Graduates

   Extra requirements:                                                     n Arts/Economics                                                                     n Arts/Health Sciences
   NONY12
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                 La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                21651 (CSP), 21653 (IFP)                                                            21161 (CSP), 21163 (IFP)
   the selection process. This may include information such as work
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide             » Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Economics: FT4, PTA                                   » Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Health Sciences: FT4, PTA
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).              21651            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers              21161             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers

   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                  Jan 2011          72.20        12.50           8              11                    Jan 2011           75.25        50.00          12              21
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   36).                                                                            Feb 2011          72.20        12.50           9              13                    Feb 2011           75.75        60.00          17              31
                                                                                 About the course: This degree offers complementary studies                           About the course: For Health Sciences subjects students will
n Arts/Arts Education                                                            from humanities, social sciences and economics, developing                           undertake an interdisciplinary first year in which they will enrol
                                                                                 the knowledge and skills students need in order to analyse and                       in subjects with peers across the Faculty of Health Sciences.
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                       solve business problems, and providing training in core areas of                     The focus is on basic human biosciences and factors influencing
                                                                                 economics and their application to particular areas and policy                       health and on developing an understanding of the roles of health
   21921 (CSP), 21923 (IFP)
                                                                                 issues. Students can design a course that suits their interests                      professionals in the health and welfare sectors. In the second
   » Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Arts Education: FT4, PTA                       or enhances other studies. For example, they might combine                           year, students are required to select a major from one of the
    21921           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers           business, economics or international trade and finance with an                       following areas: Human Physiology and Anatomy; Public Health;
                                                                                 Asian language, politics or sociology. Economics specialisations                     Rehabilitation Counselling; Ergonomics, Safety and Health (subject
    Jan 2011         80.35          -          20             25                 include macroeconomics and microeconomics analysis and                               to enrolment numbers). This flexible course provides students with
    Feb 2011         80.35          -          21             32                 policy, business economics, international trade and finance,                         the opportunity to develop a broad understanding of the field of
                                                                                 business models and forecasting, and resource and environmental                      health sciences including human biosciences, occupational health
   About the course: This double degree course enables students                  economics. Students must complete compulsory and elective                            or public health domains and combine with studies of humanities
   to complete both an arts degree and a qualification for secondary             subjects required for each degree, including at least one major in                   and social sciences. Possible study combinations of health science
   teaching concurrently. Students complete sequences in two                     an arts discipline, comprising 30 credit points in first year, 40 credit             subjects and humanities subjects include: health promotion and
   separate arts disciplines which link to specific teaching methods             points in second year, and 60 credit points in third year.                           gender studies, Aboriginal studies and public health, philosophy
   (drama, English, TESOL, history, LOTE, media studies (includes                Major studies: Aboriginal studies, Anthropology, Archaeology,                        and the experience of health and illness, public health and Asian
   cinema studies) or Humanities as part of their arts degree, and               Art history, Asian languages, Asian studies, Australian studies,                     studies/languages, health and behaviour, sociology, politics and
   take teaching methods and theory subjects as well as practical                Business, Chinese, Cinema studies, Creative writing, Development                     public health, human biosciences and philosophy of science.
   teaching placements as part of their education studies beginning              studies, Drama, Econometrics, Economics, English, European                           Major studies: Aboriginal studies, Anthropology, Archaeology,
   in the second year of the course.                                             studies, Gender studies, Hindi, History, Indonesian, Italian studies,                Art history, Asian languages, Asian studies, Chinese, Cinema
   Major studies: Aboriginal studies, Anthropology, Archaeology,                 Japanese, Latin American studies, Legal studies, Linguistics,                        studies, Creative writing, Drama, English, Environmental health,
   Art history, Asian languages, Asian studies, Chinese, Cinema                  Macroeconomics, Media studies, Microeconomics, North American                        Ergonomics, European studies, French, Gender studies, Greek
   studies, Creative writing, Drama, Education, English, European                studies, Peace studies, Philosophy, Photojournalism, Politics,                       studies, Health and safety, Hindi, History, Indonesian, International
   studies, French, Gender studies, Greek studies, Hindi, History,               Religious studies, Sociology, Spanish, Statistics, Theatre studies.                  development, Italian studies, Japanese, Latin, Latin American
   Indonesian, Italian studies, Japanese, Latin, Latin American                  Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                         studies, Legal studies, Linguistics, Media studies, Mediterranean,
   studies, Legal studies, Linguistics, Media studies, Mediterranean,            English (ESL) or 25 in any other English and a study score of at least               Photojournalism, Psychology, Public health, Religious studies,
   Photojournalism, Psychology, Religious studies, Sociology,                    20 in mathematics (any).                                                             Sociology, Spanish, Theatre studies.
   Spanish, Teaching (secondary), Theatre studies.                                                                                                                    Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in
                                                                                 Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   Prerequisites: Units 1 and 2–two units (any study combination)                a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                              English (ESL) or 25 in any other English and a study score of at
   from general mathematics or mathematical methods (CAS). Units                 GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                          least 20 in one of biology, chemistry, mathematics (any), physics or
   3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in English (ESL) or 25 in any            requirements for specifics.                                                          physical education.
   other English.                                                                                                                                                     Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a
                                                                                 Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                         an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to                       middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                       performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS applicants.                          form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                                                                                                        requirements for specifics.
                                                                                 Extra requirements:
   requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                                        Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), humanities
                                                                                 NONY12
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), humanities                                                                                                         (any), LOTE (any), drama, theatre studies, legal studies and
   (any), LOTE (any), drama, theatre studies, legal studies and                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                        psychology. Relevant work experience considered. Consideration
   psychology. Consideration given to SEAS applicants.                           page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                      given to SEAS applicants.
                                                                                 the selection process. This may include information such as work
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                Extra requirements:
                                                                                 experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   NONY12                                                                        other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).                   CY12
   Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form                  Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                       Form (some applicants only): Applicants with work experience
   (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered                 Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                       must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see page 21).
   during the selection process. This may include information such as            36).                                                                                 NONY12
   work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
                                                                                                                                                                      Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
                                                                                                                                                                      (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered
   application (see page 21).
                                                                                                                                                                      during the selection process. This may include information such as
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                                                                                                     work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                                                                                                     may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   36).                                                                                                                                                               application (see page 21).
   SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                                                                                                              Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   WWC Check: Students must hold a valid Working With Children                                                                                                        Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   card before undertaking teaching placements.                                                                                                                       36).



                                                                          CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
232 | VTAC Guide 2012                                               KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                 n Banking                                                                      and chemistry. In later years, students choose two major areas of
   Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional                                                                                      study from biochemistry, botany, genetics, microbiology, zoology,
   Placements policy (see institutional page).                                                                                                          ecology, human biology or cell and molecular biology. Albury-
                                                                            La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                     Wodonga applicants should note that only the first year of this
                                                                            22471 (CSP)                                                                 course is available at the Albury-Wodonga campus.Guaranteed
n Arts/Science                                                              » Bachelor of Finance (Banking): FT3, PTA                                   entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 65 or
                                                                            About the course: This course is designed to meet academic and              more will be offered a Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                  vocational requirements for a career in banking. Students study             whose ATAR is below 65 will be considered through normal
   21381 (CSP), 21383 (IFP)                                                 financial investments, financial planning, corporate finance, and           selection processes.
   » Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Science: FT4, PTA                         portfolio management. Students also elect to study four subjects            Major studies: Biochemistry, Biological sciences, Biology,
                                                                            in banking. Students take seven compulsory subjects and one                 Biotechnology, Botany, Cell biology, Chemistry, Ecological studies,
    21381           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                            elective subject in first year and five compulsory subjects and three       Genetics, Human biology, Microbiology, Molecular biology,
    Jan 2011         73.45       14.29          14            14            elective subjects in second year, up to the end of which students           Physiology, Zoology.
                                                                            may transfer to any of a range of Bachelor of Finance courses,              Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any).
    Feb 2011         73.45       14.29          15            19            specialising in investments, wealth management, financial risk
                                                                                                                                                        Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   About the course: Provides students with the opportunity of              management, corporate finance, banking and international
                                                                                                                                                        a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   combining units from an extensive range of both science and              banking and finance. In the third year students take three
                                                                                                                                                        GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   arts disciplines. Students complete a minimum of 540 credit              compulsory subjects and five electives, including a compulsory
                                                                                                                                                        requirements for specifics.
   points (equivalent to 4.5 years of full time study) which must           work-integrated-learning capstone subject, which offers students
                                                                            the opportunity to apply the knowledge and skills developed                 Middle-band: Completing any of biology, chemistry,
   include a minimum of one major in an arts discipline, combined                                                                                       mathematical methods (CAS), physics or specialist mathematics
   with units from any science degree offered by the Faculty of             through the degree to solving a practical work-relevant problem.
                                                                                                                                                        = 1.5 aggregate points higher per study, to a maximum 3 points.
   Science, Technology and Engineering, subject to meeting certain          Major studies: Banking, Finance.
                                                                                                                                                        Performance in prerequisite studies will be considered. In addition,
   Faculty prerequisites. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants              Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in                re-ranking is also based on criteria associated with the La Trobe
   only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be offered a            English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and a study score of at least      University Rural and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS).
   Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below             20 in mathematics (any).
                                                                                                                                                        Extra requirements:
   80 will be considered through normal selection processes.                Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
                                                                                                                                                        NONY12
   Major studies: Aboriginal studies, Anthropology, Archaeology,            a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   Art history, Asian languages, Asian studies, Australian studies,         GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   Biochemistry, Botany, Chemistry, Chinese, Cinema studies,                requirements for specifics.                                                 page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Computer science, Creative writing, Drama, Electronics, English,                                                                                     the selection process. This may include information such as work
                                                                            Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =
   Environmental science, European studies, French, Gender studies,                                                                                     or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
                                                                            an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to
   Genetics, Hindi, History, Indonesian, International development,                                                                                     may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
                                                                            performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS applicants.
   Italian studies, Japanese, Latin American studies, Legal studies,                                                                                    application (see page 21).
                                                                            Extra requirements:
   Linguistics, Mathematics, Media studies, Microbiology, Philosophy,                                                                                   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Photojournalism, Physics, Politics, Psychology, Religious studies,       NONY12                                                                      Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Science, Sociology, Space science, Spanish, Statistics, Theatre          Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see               36).
   studies, Zoology.                                                        page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–one of mathematical methods                 the selection process. This may include information such as work         n Biological Sciences (Advanced Science)
   (CAS) or specialist mathematics and a study score of at least 25 in      experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.                                other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
                                                                            Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                                                                                                        La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                  Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page              21671 (CSP)
   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra             36).                                                                        » Bachelor of Biological Sciences (Advanced Science): FT3,
   requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                            PTA
   Middle-band: Completing any of chemistry, physics or specialist       n Biological Sciences                                                           21671            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
   mathematics = 1.5 aggregate points higher per study, to a
   maximum 3 points. Performance in prerequisite studies will also                                                                                       Jan 2011          85.00          -           6              7
                                                                            La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga
   be considered.                                                                                                                                        Feb 2011          85.00          -           6             10
                                                                            20401 (CSP), 20403 (IFP)
   Extra requirements:
                                                                            » Bachelor of Biological Sciences: FT3, PTA                                 About the course: Provides training in biology for those students
   NONY12                                                                                                                                               wishing to pursue a career in biological research. Students are
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see             20401            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                                                                                        involved in laboratory and field research under the supervision
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during           Jan 2011          61.75       53.33          17              17            of leading researchers in all years of the course. The first year
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                                                                                     includes introductory biology and chemistry. In later years,
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants               Feb 2011          61.75       53.33          19              21            students choose two major areas of study from biochemistry,
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                                                                                          botany, genetics, microbiology, zoology, ecology, human biology
   application (see page 21).                                               La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                     or cell and molecular biology.Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions           21851 (CSP), 21853 (IFP)                                                    only. Applicants with an ATAR of 90 or more will be offered a
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                                                                                       Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below
                                                                            » Bachelor of Biological Sciences: FT3, PTA                                 90 will be considered through normal selection processes.
   36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit
   the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).               21851            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers    Total offers      Major studies: Biochemistry, Biological sciences, Biology,
                                                                                                                                                        Biotechnology, Botany, Cell biology, Chemistry, Ecological studies,
                                                                             Jan 2011          51.20       16.74          218            235
                                                                                                                                                        Genetics, Human biology, Microbiology, Molecular biology,
                                                                             Feb 2011          50.40       15.56          247            314            Physiology, Zoology.
                                                                            About the course: Provides foundation studies in the basic                  Prerequisites: A minimum ATAR of 85.00. Units 3 and 4–English
                                                                            principles of biology through the study of plants, animals and              (any).
                                                                            micro-organisms. The first year includes introductory biology


                                                                                                                                                                     La Trobe University | 233
n Higher Education qualification                            n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               n Other Graduates

   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                     n Biotechnology and Cell Biology                                                           La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
                                                                                                                                                                        24301 (CSP), 24303 (IFP)
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   requirements for specifics.
                                                                                   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              » Bachelor of Business: FT3, PTA
   Middle-band: Completing one or more of biology, chemistry,
                                                                                    21901 (CSP), 21903 (IFP)
                                                                                                                                                                         24301             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
   mathematical methods (CAS), physics or specialist mathematics                   » Bachelor of Biotechnology and Cell Biology: FT3, PTA
                                                                                                                                                                         Jan 2011           53.35        26.42          53              55
   = 1.5 aggregate points higher per study, to a maximum 3 points.
                                                                                     21901            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers
   Performance in prerequisite studies will be considered.                                                                                                               Feb 2011           53.35        30.19          54              75
   Extra requirements:                                                               Jan 2011          72.00        28.57           7               9
   NONY12                                                                            Feb 2011          72.00        28.57           7              14                   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                   About the course: Provides students with a multidisciplinary                         21101 (CSP), 21103 (IFP)
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                 education in biotechnology and cell biology based on the core                        » Bachelor of Business: FT3, PTA
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                units of biochemistry, botany, chemistry, genetics, microbiology
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                     and zoology. The first year provides a foundation in biology and                      21101             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers

   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                     chemistry. In second year students complete a full year in at                         Jan 2011           60.25        8.47           121            160
   application (see page 21).                                                      least two disciplines from biochemistry, chemistry, genetics and
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                  microbiology, with the option of including botany and ecology                         Feb 2011           60.35        23.73          133            216
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                  units. This provides students with maximum flexibility at third-
   36).                                                                            year level. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants                    La Trobe Uni, Mildura
                                                                                   with an ATAR of 80 or more will be offered a Commonwealth                            25301 (CSP), 25303 (IFP)
n Biomedical Science                                                               Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below 80 will be
                                                                                   considered through normal selection processes.                                       » Bachelor of Business: FT3, PTA
                                                                                   Major studies: Biochemistry, Biosciences, Biotechnology,                              25301             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                         Chemistry, Microbiology, Molecular and human genetics,
   21721 (CSP), 21723 (IFP)                                                                                                                                              Jan 2011           54.85        25.00           8               8
                                                                                   Molecular biology, Zoology.
   » Bachelor of Biomedical Science: FT3, PTA                                      Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any).                                           Feb 2011           54.85        37.50           8              13

    21721            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers   Total offers           Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
                                                                                   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                              La Trobe Uni, Shepparton
    Jan 2011          76.00       16.39          62             71                 GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                          25001 (CSP), 25003 (IFP)
    Feb 2011          75.50       17.19          69            105                 requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                                        » Bachelor of Business: FT3, PTA
                                                                                   Middle-band: Completing one or more of biology, chemistry,
   About the course: Provides training in medical science and is
                                                                                   mathematical methods (CAS), physics or specialist mathematics                         25001             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
   suitable for graduate entry into medicine or postgraduate studies
                                                                                   = 1.5 aggregate points higher per study, to a maximum 3 points.                       Jan 2011           53.70        30.77          13              15
   in the medical sciences. First year: chemistry, biology and electives
                                                                                   Performance in prerequisite studies will be considered.
   after which students follow their chosen combination of the major                                                                                                     Feb 2011           53.70        30.77          13              16
   medical science units. Electives from a list of recommended areas               Extra requirements:
   may be taken in each year.Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants                  NONY12                                                                               About the course: This course helps students build the
   only. Applicants with an ATAR of 85 or more will be offered a                   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                        knowledge and skills necessary for careers in a wide range of areas
   Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below                    page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                      within the private and public sectors. It adopts a problem-focused
   85 will be considered through normal selection processes.                       the selection process. This may include information such as work                     approach that helps students develop the important problem-
   Major studies: Anatomy, Biochemistry, Biomedical science,                       or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                          solving and decision-making skills relevant in any business.
   Biosciences, Genetics, Medical research, Medical science,                       may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                          Students complete a core of ten foundation subjects, providing
   Microbiology, Molecular and cell biology, Molecular and human                   application (see page 21).                                                           fundamental skills and knowledge in accounting, macroeconomics,
   genetics, Physiology.                                                                                                                                                microeconomics, management, information systems, commercial
                                                                                   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                                                                                                                        law, sustainability in global business or climate, sustainability
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                    Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                                                                                                                        and society, business statistics, finance and marketing. They also
   English (ESL) or 25 in any other English and a study score of 25 in             36).
                                                                                                                                                                        complete at least one major or two minors in business, and further
   chemistry.
                                                                                                                                                                        subjects in additional majors, minors or elective areas. Outside
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                     n Business                                                                                 majors may include a language or other pre-approved sequences.
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                                                                                                              Students have access to four international study tours - marketing,
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   requirements for specifics.
                                                                                   La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga                                                         international business, human resource management and
                                                                                                                                                                        international accounting.
   Middle-band: Completing any of mathematical methods (CAS),
                                                                                    20001 (CSP), 20003 (IFP)
                                                                                                                                                                        Major studies: Albury-Wodonga: Business, Logistics,
   physics or specialist mathematics = 1.5 aggregate points higher                 » Bachelor of Business: FT3, PTA                                                     Management, Marketing. Bendigo: Business, Business (law),
   per study, to a maximum 3 points.                                                                                                                                    Economics, Human resource management, Information
                                                                                     20001            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                  technology, International business, Marketing. Melbourne:
                                                                                     Jan 2011          53.90        22.22           9              10                   Business, Development studies, Economics, Employee relations,
   NONY12
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                     Feb 2011          53.90        33.33           9              14                   Environmental and resource management, Finance, Financial
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                                                                                                      management, Financial planning, Financial services, Human
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                                                                                                     resource management, Industrial relations, International business,
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                                                                                                          International trade, Macroeconomics, Management, Management
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                                                                                                          information systems, Marketing, Microeconomics. Mildura:
   application (see page 21).                                                                                                                                           Business, Management. Shepparton: Business, Human resource
                                                                                                                                                                        management, Management, Marketing.
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                                                                                                       Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   36).                                                                                                                                                                 English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.


                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
234 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                 KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions            industry-based learning. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                 Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page            only. Applicants with an ATAR of 75 or more will be offered a
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra             36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit         Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below
   requirements for specifics.                                             the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).               75 will be considered through normal selection processes.
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing business                                                                                              Major studies: Building (construction methods), Building
   management, accounting and/or economics = an aggregate of 1          n Business/Information Technology                                            (design), Building (technology), Construction, Construction
   point higher per study to a maximum of 2 points. Consideration                                                                                    management, Engineering, Engineering (civil), Environmental
   will be given to performance in prerequisite studies, business                                                                                    engineering management, Hydraulics and hydrology,
   studies (any) and criteria associated with the La Trobe University
                                                                           La Trobe Uni, Bendigo                                                     Sustainability.
   Rural and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS) and to SEAS            24351 (CSP), 24353 (IFP)                                                  Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any), mathematical
   applicants.                                                             » Bachelor of Business/Bachelor of Information                            methods (CAS) and either specialist mathematics or physics.
   Extra requirements:                                                       Technology: FT4                                                         Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   NONY12                                                                   24351            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers      a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                                                                                     GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                            Jan 2011          84.15       50.00          2              2            requirements for specifics.
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   the selection process. This may include information such as work         Feb 2011          84.15       50.00          2              2            Middle-band: Re-ranking is based on English (any),
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide                                                                                 mathematical methods (CAS), specialist mathematics, physics and
                                                                           About the course: Combines a degree in Business specialising
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).                                                                                criteria associated with the La Trobe University Rural and Regional
                                                                           in economics, marketing or management, with a degree in
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                                                                                    Student Access Scheme (RRSAS).
                                                                           Information Technology. The Information Technology degree also
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page          features an optional industry-based scholarship component.                Extra requirements:
   36).                                                                    Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR        NONY12
                                                                           of 80 or more will be offered a Commonwealth Supported Place.             Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
n Business Information Systems                                             Applicants whose ATAR is below 80 will be considered through              page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                           normal selection processes                                                the selection process. This may include information such as work
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                 Major studies: Business (management), Computer applications,              or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
                                                                           Computer networks, Database programming, Database systems,                may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   22371 (CSP), 22373 (IFP)                                                Economics, Finance, Human resource management, Industrial                 application (see page 21).
   » Bachelor of Business Information Systems: FT3, PTA                    collaboration and experience, Information systems, Information            Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   About the course: This course develops skills in the design of          systems management, Marketing, Object-oriented development,               Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Business Information Systems (BIS) and provides an understanding        Web development.                                                          36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit
   of its applications in managing business organisations, as well         Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4– a study score of at least 25 in             the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).
   as developing professional business management skills. It gives         English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.
   students a comprehensive understanding of IS and IS tools,
                                                                           Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                  n Civil Engineering/Business
   and the opportunity to be trained in financial management,
                                                                           a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   accounting, management, and marketing.
                                                                           GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR      requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                     La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
   of 65 or more will be offered a Commonwealth Supported Place.
                                                                           Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), business (any)
                                                                                                                                                     24031 (CSP), 24033 (IFP)
   Applicants whose ATAR is below 65 will be considered through                                                                                      » Bachelor of Civil Engineering/Bachelor of Business: FT5,
                                                                           and criteria associated with the La Trobe University Rural and
   normal selection processes.                                                                                                                         PTA
                                                                           Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS).
   Major studies: Accounting, Database systems, E-business,
                                                                           Extra requirements:                                                        24031            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers   Total offers
   Finance, Information Systems Development, Law, Management,
   Marketing, Object-oriented development, Organisational                  NONY12                                                                     Jan 2011          84.05       70.00           8              8
   behaviour, System analysis and design.                                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                           page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during            Feb 2011          84.05       70.00           8              8
   Prerequisites: Units 1 and 2–two units (any study combination)
   from general mathematics or mathematical methods (CAS). Units           the selection process. This may include information such as work          About the course: Provides professional education in civil
   3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in English (ESL) or 20 in any      or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants               engineering, together with a selected business major, leading to
   other English.                                                          may wish to provide other documentation in support of their               professional qualifications in both areas. Students select five units
                                                                           application (see page 21).                                                per semester in the first three years and then four per semester for
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                 Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions            years four and five. Practical experience: either twenty weeks or
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra             Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page            one year of paid industry-based learning.Guaranteed entry: Year
   requirements for specifics                                              36).                                                                      12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be
                                                                                                                                                     offered a Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR
   Middle-band: Completing mathematics (any), business (any)
                                                                        n Civil Engineering                                                          is below 80 will be considered through normal selection processes.
   and information technology (any) = 1 aggregate points higher per
   study to a maximum of 3 points.                                                                                                                   Major studies: Building (construction methods), Building
                                                                                                                                                     (design), Building (technology), Business, Construction,
   Extra requirements:                                                     La Trobe Uni, Bendigo                                                     Construction management, Economics, Engineering, Engineering
   NONY12                                                                  24071 (CSP), 24073 (IFP)                                                  (civil), Environmental engineering management, Human resource
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see           » Bachelor of Civil Engineering: FT4, PTA                                 management, Hydraulics and hydrology, Sustainability.
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                                                                                   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4– English (any), mathematical
   the selection process. This may include information such as work         24071            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                                                                                                     methods (CAS) and one of specialist mathematics or physics.
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants              Jan 2011          64.80       24.00         25             28            Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
                                                                            Feb 2011          64.80       24.00         26             37            a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   application (see page 21).
                                                                                                                                                     GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                           About the course: Provides professional education in civil                requirements for specifics.
                                                                           engineering analysis, design, management and practice.
                                                                           Practical experience: either twenty weeks or one year of paid


                                                                                                                                                                   La Trobe University | 235
n Higher Education qualification                          n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                                n Other Graduates

   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), business (any),          n Clinical Prosthetics and Orthotics                                                       initiatives. Professional work experience is an option in the final
   mathematical methods (CAS), specialist mathematics, physics and                                                                                                     year of the degree. Guaranteed entry: CY12 applicants only, with
   criteria associated with the La Trobe University Rural and Regional
                                                                              (Masters)                                                                                an ATAR of 75 or more will be offered a CSP. Applicants whose ATAR
   Student Access Scheme (RRSAS).                                                                                                                                      is below 75 will be considered through normal selection processes.
   Extra requirements:                                                            La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              Major studies: Community Development, Community Services,
   NONY12                                                                          22341 (CSP), 22342 (DFP)                                                            Community Studies, Development Studies, Planning and Design,
                                                                                  » Master of Clinical Prosthetics and Orthotics: FT2                                  Politics, Sociology, Urban Environments, Urban Planning.
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                About the course: The Master of Clinical Prosthetics and                             Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in
   the selection process. This may include information such as work               Orthotics is a two-year, full time program that will enable the                      English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                    students with a relevant first degree to obtain a professional                       Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                    qualification in prosthetics and orthotics. The prosthetist-orthotist                a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   application (see page 21).                                                     is responsible for the provision of prostheses (artificial limbs) to                 GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                 people with amputations, and orthoses (supportive devices) to                        requirements for specifics.
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                 people with musculoskeletal disabilities. The responsibilities of the                Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), humanities
   36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit              prosthetist-orthotist include: assessment of the client, the design,                 (any), legal studies, psychology and business management.
   the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).                    fabrication, fitting and alignment of prostheses and orthoses, and                   Consideration given to the La Trobe University Rural and Regional
                                                                                  the monitoring and review of the devices used by their clients.                      Student Access Scheme (RRSAS) and SEAS applicants.
                                                                                  The prosthetist-orthotist is an integral member of the health care
n Civil Engineering/Science                                                       team with a clinical, technical, advisory and educational role. The                  Extra requirements:
                                                                                  prosthetist-orthotist aims to maximise the function and comfort of                   NONY12
   La Trobe Uni, Bendigo                                                          the client by providing the most appropriate prosthetic or orthotic                  Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
   24051 (CSP), 24053 (IFP)                                                       treatment. A two year deferral is not available for this course.                     (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered
                                                                                  Major studies: Prosthetics and Orthotics.                                            during the selection process. This may include information such as
   » Bachelor of Civil Engineering/Bachelor of Science: FT5,                                                                                                           work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
     PTA                                                                          Prerequisites: Successful completion of a Bachelor degree
                                                                                  with highly recommended studies in anatomy and physiology                            may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
    24051            Clearly-in   % below   CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                  including regional muskulo-skeletal anatomy awarded within                           application (see page 21).
    Jan 2011          80.75       50.00         4               4                 the last 7-years. Consideration will also be given to studies                        Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                                  in biomechanics, clinical assessment, psychology, pathology,                         Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
    Feb 2011          80.75       50.00         4               4                 materials technology, evidence-based practice, research methods                      36).
   About the course: Designed to provide professional education                   or statistics and human movement.
   in civil engineering and science. Students are encouraged to                   Selection mode: Form, GPA. See Extra requirements for specifics.               n Community Development (Health
   undertake five units in each semester in the first year, and four              Extra requirements:                                                              Promotion and Planning)
   units in each semester in later years. Practical experience: either            Form: Applicants must download the Supplementary Information
   twenty weeks or one year of paid industry-based learning.
   Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR
                                                                                  form from: http://www.latrobe.edu.au/health and complete it                          La Trobe Uni, Mildura
                                                                                  outlining relevant work experience (eg: health professional paid
   of 80 or more will be offered a Commonwealth Supported Place.                                                                                                       25251 (CSP)
                                                                                  work, health or fitness industry paid work, other relevant paid
   Applicants whose ATAR is below 80 will be considered through                   work or volunteer work) and submit it along with subject outlines                    » Bachelor of Community Development (Health Promotion
   normal selection processes.                                                    of relevant completed studies as part of their VTAC application.                       and Planning): FT3, PTA
   Major studies: Biomedical science, Biotechnology, Building                     Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                        About the course: This course is designed for students who
   (construction methods), Building (design), Building (technology),              page 21).                                                                            want a career in the growing fields of health promotion,
   Chemistry, Construction, Construction management, Engineering,                                                                                                      health planning, and community health research. Graduates
   Engineering (civil), Environmental engineering management,                     Additional information: Commonwealth supported places (CSP)
                                                                                                                                                                       will be suitable for work in a variety of health and community
   Hydraulics and hydrology, Information technology, Mathematics/                 are limited. All applicants are advised to apply for both CSP and
                                                                                                                                                                       organisations responsible for community development,
   statistics, Psychology, Science, Statistics, Sustainability.                   domestic fee paying (DFP) places. Successful applicants may be
                                                                                                                                                                       health, community service and care. This innovative course
                                                                                  required to undertake bridging studies (short ‘Summer’ course of
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any), mathematical                                                                                                            provides unique cross faculty approaches to problems in health
                                                                                  one week duration prior to the start of Semester 1), depending on
   methods (CAS) and either specialist mathematics or physics.                                                                                                         and community by combining studies in Social Sciences and
                                                                                  the content of their previous degree. See our website for current
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                                                                                               Public Health. Students will gain key skills in understanding:
                                                                                  information: http://www.latrobe.edu.au/health
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                                                                                                             regional communities, the social, cultural, and communal
   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra                                                                                                        issues that impact health outcomes, the burden of disease,
   requirements for specifics.                                              n Community Development                                                                    social determinants of health, empirical research skills, project
                                                                                                                                                                       management skills, and knowledge of the Australian health
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), mathematical                                                                                                        system including regional and rural problems. Theory is combined
   methods (CAS), specialist mathematics, physics and criteria                    La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
                                                                                                                                                                       with practical field experience through a placement and/
   associated with the La Trobe University Rural and Regional Student              24601 (CSP)                                                                         or industry project. Graduates can work in government, with
   Access Scheme (RRSAS).                                                         » Bachelor of Community Development: FT3, PTA                                        community health providers and other related organisations.
   Extra requirements:                                                            About the course: This innovative course provides students with                      Major studies: Community Health, Community Studies, Health,
   NONY12                                                                         knowledge, skills and capabilities to be leaders in community                        Health Education, Health Planning, Health Promotion, Public
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                  development. Focusing on working in cities, regional towns and                       Health, Sociology.
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                rural communities, this course can provide the basis for a career
                                                                                                                                                                       Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   the selection process. This may include information such as work               in Australia or overseas. This course is designed to meet the
                                                                                                                                                                       English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                    growing demand from government, public and private sectors,
                                                                                  health and service providers who are seeking skilled people to                       Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                                                                                                         a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   application (see page 21).                                                     play key management roles, apply research, communicate with
                                                                                  communities, critically assess options and develop and implement                     GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                                                                                                      requirements for specifics.
                                                                                  projects in this expanding field. A feature of the degree includes
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                                                                                                      Middle-band: Re-ranking is based on English (any), humanities
                                                                                  the opportunity for participation in community and fieldwork
   36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit                                                                                                   (any), LOTE (any), drama, theatre studies, legal studies, psychology
                                                                                  projects, involving community planning and development
   the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).                                                                                                         and business management. Consideration is also given to La Trobe

                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
236 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
  University Rural and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS)              Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions            Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
  as well as Special Entry Access Scheme (SEAS) criteria. A regional       Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page            Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
  bonus may also apply.                                                    36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit         36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit
  Extra requirements:                                                      the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).               the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).
  NONY12
  Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form          n Computer Science (Honours)/Electronic                                   n Computer Science in Games Technology
  (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered           Engineering
  during the selection process. This may include information such as                                                                                 La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
  work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants         La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                   21451 (CSP), 21453 (IFP)
  may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
  application (see page 21).                                               21231 (CSP), 21233 (IFP)                                                  » Bachelor of Computer Science in Games Technology:
                                                                           » Bachelor of Computer Science (Honours)/Bachelor of                        FT3, PTA
  Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
  Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page             Electronic Engineering: FT5, PTA                                         21451            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers    Total offers

  36).                                                                      21231            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                                                                                                      Jan 2011          74.40       50.00           6              10
                                                                            Jan 2011          86.90       50.00          2              2             Feb 2011          71.75       70.00           7              17
n Computer Science
                                                                            Feb 2011          86.90       50.00          2              2            About the course: This course provides theoretical and practical
  La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                  About the course: Provides a sound base in both hardware and              training in the design and development of computer games,
                                                                           software aspects of computer systems combined with advanced               and equips graduates for a career as a computing professional
   21941 (CSP), 21943 (IFP)                                                                                                                          in the vibrant and rapidly transforming computer games
                                                                           training in one of optical, biomedical, communications or
  » Bachelor of Computer Science: FT3, PTA                                 electronic systems engineering. In the first three years, students        industry. Graduates possess exceptionally highly-developed
   21941           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers      undertake core units in computer science, mathematics, electronics        programming skills; a sound theoretical basis in game design;
                                                                           and physics. Honours work in computer science is undertaken               specialist knowledge and skills in areas such as graphics, artificial
   Jan 2011         62.80        9.09         11             12                                                                                      intelligence, software development, multimedia programming,
                                                                           over the final two years. Students complete a computer science
   Feb 2011         64.25       18.18         11             17            project in fourth year and an engineering project in fifth year.          and operating systems; and a solid grounding in the physics
                                                                           Progression to the honours year in Computer Science is dependent          and mathematics necessary for producing increasingly realistic
  About the course: This course produces highly-skilled graduates          on satisfactory performance in the first three years. Practical           computer games. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only.
  who are able to design, implement, and maintain complex                  experience: twelve weeks approved work experience is an                   Applicants with an ATAR of 70 or more will be offered a
  software systems; develop effective solutions to problems in             integral part of the program.Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants         Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below
  areas such as data storage, computer networks, and computer              only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be offered a             70 will be considered through normal selection processes. For
  security; and readily adapt to new technologies and new ideas. In        Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below              Bachelor of Computer Sciences in Games Technology scholarships,
  the first year students complete core units in computer science,         80 will be considered through normal selection processes.                 awards and options for Special Entry please see the GT website –
  mathematics and programming in Java and C++. In second                                                                                             http://homepage.cs.latrobe.edu.au/gtlab
  and third year, they study core and elective computer science            Major studies: Algorithms and data structures, Computer
                                                                           and network security, Computer hardware, Computer science,                Major studies: Algorithms and data structures, Computer
  units with the opportunity to specialise in streams in the areas                                                                                   animation, Computer graphics, Digital animation (games), Games
  of artificial intelligence, data engineering, computer networks,         Databases (advanced programming), Digital and analogue
                                                                           electronics, Digital and microprocessor systems, Electronics,             development, Games programming, Games technology, Object-
  and software engineering. In third year students also undertake                                                                                    oriented programming, Operating systems, Professional practice,
  a software engineering project. The course also provides the             Engineering, Engineering (biomedical), Engineering
                                                                           (communication), Engineering (electronics), Engineering                   Systems and software engineering.
  opportunity for an industry based learning (IBL program) involving
                                                                           (optical), Java and C++ software development, Microprocessor              Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any) and either
  supervised work experience. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants
                                                                           control systems, Mobile communications, Network applications,             mathematical methods (CAS) or specialist mathematics.
  only. Applicants with an ATAR of 70 or more will be offered a
  Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below             Networks and data communications, Telecommunications, Wireless            Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a
  70 will be considered through normal selection processes.                technologies.                                                             middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form, GPA
                                                                           Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in              (see institutional page), test, STAT (see page 36). See Extra
  Major studies: Algorithms and data structures, Artificial
                                                                           English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and either a study score of      requirements for specifics.
  intelligence, Computer architecture, Computer programming,
  Database programming, Databases, Industrial collaboration and            at least 25 in mathematical methods (CAS) or a study score of at          Middle-band: Completing specialist mathematics = 1.5
  experience, Multimedia systems, Network security, Networks,              least 20 in specialist mathematics.                                       aggregate points higher. Performance in prerequisite studies will
  Operating systems, Software engineering, Wireless technologies.          Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                     be considered.
  Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any) and either                    a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                   Extra requirements:
  mathematical methods (CAS) or specialist mathematics.                    GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra              NONY12
                                                                           requirements for specifics.
  Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                                                                              Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
  a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                  Middle-band: Completing physics or specialist mathematics =               page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
  GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra             1.5 aggregate points higher per study to a maximum of 3 points.           the selection process. This may include information such as work
  requirements for specifics.                                              Extra requirements:                                                       or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
  Middle-band: Completing specialist mathematics = 1.5                     NONY12                                                                    may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
  aggregate points higher. Performance in prerequisite studies will        Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see             application (see page 21).
  be considered.                                                           page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during           Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
  Extra requirements:                                                      the selection process. This may include information such as work          Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                           or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants               36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit
  NONY12
                                                                           may wish to provide other documentation in support of their               the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).
  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see            application (see page 21).
  page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
  the selection process. This may include information such as work
  or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
  may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
  application (see page 21).



                                                                                                                                                                   La Trobe University | 237
n Higher Education qualification                            n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                                n Other Graduates

n Computer Science/Accounting                                                 n Computer Systems Engineering                                                       n Corporate Finance

   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                          La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   21411 (CSP), 21413 (IFP)                                                          21251 (CSP), 21253 (IFP)                                                            22501 (CSP)
   » Bachelor of Computer Science/Bachelor of Accounting:                           » Bachelor of Computer Systems Engineering: FT4, PTA                                 » Bachelor of Finance (Corporate Finance): FT3, PTA
     FT4, PTA                                                                                                                                                            About the course: This course is designed to meet academic
                                                                                      21251            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                                                                                                         and vocational requirements for a career in corporate finance. It
    21411            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                      Jan 2011          64.00           -            5               8                   provides a comprehensive understanding of all areas of finance
    Jan 2011           n/a           -            0               0                                                                                                      and develops a thorough grasp of issues faced when working in a
                                                                                      Feb 2011          63.30        14.29           8              14
    Feb 2011           n/a           -            0               2                                                                                                      finance function within a business organisation—such as a bank,
                                                                                    About the course: This course trains specialist who can provide                      consultancy, accounting firm, a manufacturing, a service or a
   About the course: Provides training in computer science and                      a totally integrated solution for the design, installation and                       resources company.
   accountancy, leading to professional qualifications in both areas.               operation of complex computer systems. The course equips                             Students study financial investments, financial planning, corporate
   The curriculum fulfils the requirements for membership in CPA                    students with strong technical skills, but also places an emphasis                   finance, and portfolio management and four subjects in corporate
   Australia and the Institute of Chartered Accountants. Core units                 on practical and transferable skills, such as presentation                           finance. In the third year students take a compulsory work-
   in computer science, accounting, mathematics, economics and                      and communications skills, management techniques and                                 integrated-learning subject, which offers students the opportunity
   legal studies are undertaken in the first three years. In fourth year,           entrepreneurship. Core subjects in computer science, electronics,                    to apply the knowledge and skills developed through the degree to
   students combine a software engineering project with business                    mathematics, physics and engineering management are set for                          solving a practical work-relevant problem.
   electives. The workload is equivalent to twelve-and-a-half percent               the first two years followed by a choice of specialisation in systems
                                                                                                                                                                         Major studies: Accounting, Banking, Corporate Finance, Finance.
   per year more than that required in either single degree. Electives              engineering. An industry relevant project must be completed in
   constitute approximately thirty percent of the final two years.                  third year and a research project in fourth year. The course includes                Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR               twelve weeks of approved work experience, and also provides the                      English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and a study score of at least
   of 80 or more will be offered a Commonwealth Supported Place.                    opportunity for further work experience under the industry based                     20 in mathematics (any).
   Applicants whose ATAR is below 80 will be considered through                     learning (IBL) program. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants                         Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   normal selection processes.                                                      only. Applicants with an ATAR of 70 or more will be offered a                        a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   Major studies: Accounting, Algorithms and data structures,                       Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below                         GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   Artificial intelligence, Communication systems, Computer                         70 will be considered through normal selection processes.                            requirements for specifics.
   architecture, Computer networks, Computer programming,                           Major studies: Algorithms and data structures, Computer and                          Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =
   Computer science, Data communications, Electronic commerce,                      network security, Computer engineering, Databases (advanced                          an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to
   Finance, Games technology, Information systems, Internet                         programming), Engineering, Engineering (computer systems),                           performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS applicants.
   technology, Java and C++ software development, Management                        Engineering (software systems), Industrial collaboration and                         Extra requirements:
   information systems, Multimedia systems, Network engineering,                    experience, Java and C++ software development, Mobile                                NONY12
   Object-oriented programming, Software engineering, Taxation                      communications, Mobile computing, Network engineering,
   and auditing.                                                                    Network security, Networks and data communications, Project                          Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                    management, Software engineering, Software systems, Systems                          page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in                                                                                                          the selection process. This may include information such as work
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and either a study score of             design and development, Usability and project management,
                                                                                    Wireless technologies.                                                               experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   at least 25 in mathematical methods (CAS) or a study score of at                                                                                                      other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   least 20 in specialist mathematics.                                              Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any) and either
                                                                                    mathematical methods (CAS) or specialist mathematics.                                Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                                                                                                               Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form, GPA                        Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                36).
   (see institutional page), test (see page 36). See Extra requirements             a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   for specifics.                                                                   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra
   Middle-band: Completing both mathematical methods (CAS)                          requirements for specifics.                                                    n Creative Arts
   and specialist mathematics = 1.5 aggregate points higher to a                    Middle-band: Completing physics or specialist mathematics =
   maximum of 3 points.                                                             1.5 aggregate points higher per study to a maximum of 3 points.                      La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   Extra requirements:                                                              Re-ranking is also based on performance in prerequisite studies.                     21951 (CSP), 21953 (IFP)
                                                                                    Performance in prerequisite studies will be considered.
   NONY12                                                                                                                                                                » Bachelor of Creative Arts: FT3, PTA
                                                                                    Extra requirements:
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                                                                                                          21951             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                  NONY12
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                         Jan 2011           78.55        23.81          21              29
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                      page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                       Feb 2011           97.80        70.00          31              60
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                      the selection process. This may include information such as work
   application (see page 21).                                                       or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                          About the course: Focuses on three fields: writing (including
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                          creative writing, screenwriting and writing for the media),
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                   application (see page 21).                                                           textual analysis and criticism and performance and production.
   36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit                Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                       It enables students to specialise in areas such as writing for the
   the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).                      Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                       screen, writing for radio, theatre production and textual analysis.
                                                                                    36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit                    The course mainly consists of subjects from the disciplines of
                                                                                    the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).                          cinema studies, English, media studies and theatre and drama
                                                                                                                                                                         studies, including one third year compulsory subject, the
                                                                                                                                                                         Creative Industries Project. The remaining electives may be taken
                                                                                                                                                                         either from the foregoing disciplines or from other disciplines
                                                                                                                                                                         offered at the University. Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants
                                                                                                                                                                         only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be offered a
                                                                                                                                                                         Commonwealth supported place. Applicants whose ATAR is below
                                                                                                                                                                         80 will be considered through normal selection processes


                                                                             CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
238 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                  KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Major studies: Cinema studies, Creative arts, Creative writing,          Extra requirements:                                                      n Education
   Drama, Journalism, Screenwriting, Theatre studies, Writing               NONY12
   (media).
                                                                            Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see              La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in             page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.
                                                                                                                                                        24321 (CSP), 24323 (IFP)
                                                                            the selection process. This may include information such as work
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                    or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                » Bachelor of Education: FT4
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                  may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                 24321           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra              application (see page 21).
   requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                          Jan 2011         66.35       47.96         98            137
                                                                            Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), humanities               Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page              Feb 2011         66.35       48.98         99            248
   (any), LOTE (any), drama, theatre studies, legal studies and             36).
   psychology. Consideration given to SEAS applicants.                      SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                      La Trobe Uni, Mildura
   Extra requirements:                                                      WWC Check: Students must complete a Working With Children                   25321 (CSP)
   NONY12                                                                   Check form prior to commencing the course. Students must hold
                                                                                                                                                       » Bachelor of Education: FT4
   Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form             a valid Working With Children Check card prior to undertaking
   (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered            teaching placements.                                                        25321           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers

   during the selection process. This may include information such as                                                                                   Jan 2011         63.00       42.31         27             37
   work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants       n Economics                                                                   Feb 2011         63.00       42.31         28             52
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   application (see page 21).
                                                                            La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                    About the course: Prepares students for employment in primary
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                                                                                      and secondary schools in Australia or overseas. The course consists
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                             21511 (CSP), 21513 (IFP)
                                                                                                                                                       of core professional studies in education and the key curriculum
   36).                                                                     » Bachelor of Economics: FT3, PTA                                          areas along with elective and discipline studies. At Bendigo
                                                                             21511            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers    Total offers     campus students may undertake specialist studies that will enable
n Early Childhood Education                                                                                                                            them to teach in Primary, in Primary and Secondary, or in Primary
                                                                             Jan 2011           n/a           -            8              11           and Special Education settings. At Mildura campus students
                                                                             Feb 2011           n/a           -            8              15           specialise in Primary teaching. Practical experience: Students gain
   La Trobe Uni, Bendigo                                                                                                                               a minimum of 80 days teaching experience across the four years.
   24001 (CSP)                                                              About the course: This course provides students with a
                                                                                                                                                       Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR
   » Bachelor of Early Childhood Education: FT4                             thorough grounding in economic theory while developing skills
                                                                                                                                                       of 70 or more are guaranteed a Commonwealth Supported Place.
                                                                            in quantitative analysis and logical thought. Subjects emphasize
                                                                                                                                                       Applicants whose ATAR is below 70 will be considered through
    24001            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers     the tools needed to analyse and solve business problems.
                                                                                                                                                       normal selection processes.
    Jan 2011          60.70       26.67         16             32           Content covers microeconomics (the study of households,
                                                                            firms and markets), macroeconomics (the study of growth,                   Major studies: Bendigo: Curriculum studies, Education, Inclusive
    Feb 2011          60.70       26.67         16             56           unemployment and inflation) and economic history, as well as               education, LOTE, Physical education, Special education, Teaching
                                                                            the application of economics to policy issues. Specialisations are         (primary), Teaching (secondary). Mildura: Curriculum studies,
   About the course: Prepares students for employment as                                                                                               Education, Teaching (primary).
                                                                            available in: business economics, international trade and finance,
   pre-school teachers and childcare professionals. Students may                                                                                       Prerequisites: Units 1 and 2–two units (any study combination)
                                                                            macroeconomic analysis and policy, microeconomics analysis and
   undertake specialist studies that will enable them to teach to                                                                                      from general mathematics or mathematical methods (CAS) or
                                                                            policy, and rresource and environmental economics.
   year 6 in primary schools or they may undertake specialist studies                                                                                  Units 3 and 4 mathematics (any). Units 3 and 4–a study score of at
   in Special Education and Early Intervention focusing on children         Major studies: Business, Econometrics, Economics, Industrial
                                                                            relations, Macroeconomics, Microeconomics, Statistics.                     least 30 in English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.
   0-8 years. The course consists of core professional studies in Early
   Childhood Education and key curriculum areas including 100 days          Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in               Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   practical experience in pre-school settings, childcare centres,          English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and a study score of at least     a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   primary schools and special education settings (according to area        20 in mathematics (any).                                                   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   of specialisation). Students gain teaching experience in each of the                                                                                requirements for specifics.
                                                                            Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   four years. Applicants with a Diploma of Children’s Services gain        a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                    Middle-band: A study score of at least 20 in a LOTE (any) = an
   accelerated entry to a reduced program.                                  GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                aggregate 3 points higher, to a maximum of 3 points higher.
   Major studies: Childhood development, Curriculum studies, Early          requirements for specifics.                                                Consideration is given to relevant paid or unpaid work experience,
   childhood education, Early childhood studies, Education, Inclusive                                                                                  and criteria associated with the La Trobe University Rural and
                                                                            Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =
   education, Special education, Teaching (early childhood), Teaching                                                                                  Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS). Re-ranking also based
                                                                            an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to
   (primary).                                                                                                                                          on performance in English (any).
                                                                            performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS applicants.
   Prerequisites: Units 1 and 2–two units (any study combination)                                                                                      Extra requirements:
                                                                            Extra requirements:
   from general mathematics or mathematical methods (CAS) or                                                                                           NONY12
                                                                            NONY12
   Units 3 and 4 mathematics (any). Units 3 and 4–a study score of at                                                                                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   least 30 in English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.                    Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                                                                                       page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                            page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                                                                               the selection process. This may include information such as work
                                                                            the selection process. This may include information such as work
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                                                                                             or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
                                                                            experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                                                                                         may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
                                                                            other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   requirements for specifics                                                                                                                          application (see page 21).
                                                                            Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Middle-band: Consideration is given to relevant paid or unpaid                                                                                      Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                            Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   work experience, Certificate 2 or 3 in Childcare, and to criteria                                                                                   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                            36).
   associated with the La Trobe University Rural and Regional Student                                                                                  36).
   Access Scheme (RRSAS). Re-ranking also based on performance in
   English (any).




                                                                                                                                                                    La Trobe University | 239
n Higher Education qualification                           n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               n Other Graduates

   SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                    n Electronic Engineering/Biomedical                                                        About the course: Concurrent degree program in electronics
   WWC Check: Students must complete a Working With Children                                                                                                           with Masters level studies in microelectronics. In addition to
                                                                              Engineering                                                                              completing the electronic engineering degree program, including
   Check form prior to commencing the course. Students must hold
   a valid Working With Children Check card prior to undertaking                                                                                                       project and practical experience requirements, students undertake
   teaching placements.                                                           La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              a microelectronics specialisation in years three to five. Students
                                                                                   21141 (CSP), 21143 (IFP)                                                            are required to write a minor thesis in their final year. Progress to
                                                                                                                                                                       the Masters degree is subject to performance at a level deemed
n Electronic Engineering                                                          » Bachelor of Electronic Engineering/Master of Biomedical
                                                                                                                                                                       satisfactory by the Head of School.Guaranteed entry: Year 12
                                                                                    Engineering: FT5, PTA
                                                                                                                                                                       applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                          21141            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers             offered a Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR
   21761 (CSP), 21763 (IFP)                                                         Jan 2011            n/a           -            0               0                   is below 80 will be considered through normal selection processes.
   » Bachelor of Electronic Engineering: FT4, PTA                                                                                                                      Major studies: Digital and analogue electronics, Digital and
                                                                                    Feb 2011            n/a           -            0               1                   microprocessor systems, Digital electronics, Digital signal
    21761            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                                  About the course: Concurrent degree program in electronic                            processing, Digital systems, Electronic systems, Electronics,
    Jan 2011          61.60       17.65         17             22                 engineering with Masters level studies in biomedical engineering.                    Engineering, Engineering (electronics), Microcomputers,
                                                                                  In addition to completing the electronic engineering degree                          Microelectronics, Microprocessor control systems, Microprocessors.
    Feb 2011          61.60       23.53         17             31
                                                                                  program, including project and practical experience requirements,                    Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   About the course: Provides accredited engineering training in                  students undertake a biomedical specialisation in years three to                     English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and either a study score of
   the specialist fields of biomedical, communication, electronic                 five. Students are required to write a minor thesis in their final                   at least 25 in mathematical methods (CAS) or a study score of at
   systems and optical engineering. The first two years comprise core             year. Progress to the Masters degree is subject to performance at a                  least 20 in specialist mathematics.
   studies in electronics, mathematics, physics, programming and                  level deemed satisfactory by the Head of School.Guaranteed entry:                    Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   engineering management. Students specialise in their engineering               Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will                  a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   stream in the final two years of the course, and complete a major              be offered a Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose                          GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra
   engineering project in the fourth year. Practical experience: twelve           ATAR is below 80 will be considered through normal selection                         requirements for specifics.
   weeks of approved work experience is an integral part of the                   processes.                                                                           Middle-band: Completing physics or specialist mathematics =
   program.Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants                  Major studies: Digital and analogue electronics, Digital                             1.5 aggregate points higher per study to a maximum of 3 points.
   with an ATAR of 70 or more will be offered a Commonwealth                      signal processing, Electronic systems, Electronics, Engineering,                     Extra requirements:
   Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR is below 70 will be                     Engineering (biomedical), Engineering (electronics).
   considered through normal selection processes.                                                                                                                      NONY12
                                                                                  Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   Major studies: Digital and analogue electronics, Digital and                   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and either a study score of                 Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   microprocessor systems, Digital electronics, Digital signal                    at least 25 in mathematical methods (CAS) or a study score of at                     page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   processing, Digital systems, Electronic systems, Electronics,                  least 20 in specialist mathematics.                                                  the selection process. This may include information such as work
   Engineering, Engineering (biomedical), Engineering                                                                                                                  or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
                                                                                  Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   (communication), Engineering (electronics), Engineering (optical),             a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   Industrial collaboration and experience, Microcomputers,                                                                                                            application (see page 21).
                                                                                  GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra
   Microprocessor control systems, Microprocessors, Mobile                        requirements for specifics                                                           Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   communications, Signal processing, Telecommunications, Wireless                                                                                                     Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                                  Middle-band: Completing physics or specialist mathematics =                          36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit
   technologies.
                                                                                  1.5 aggregate points higher per study to a maximum of 3 points.                      the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any) and either
                                                                                  Extra requirements:
   mathematical methods (CAS) or specialist mathematics.
                                                                                  NONY12                                                                         n Electronic Engineering/Telecommunication
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                        Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                  page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                                                                                                                   Engineering
   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra
   requirements for specifics                                                     the selection process. This may include information such as work
                                                                                  or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                          La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   Middle-band: Completing physics or specialist mathematics =
   1.5 aggregate points higher per study to a maximum of 3 points.
                                                                                  may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                          21681 (CSP), 21683 (IFP)
                                                                                  application (see page 21).                                                           » Bachelor of Electronic Engineering/Master of
   Performance in prerequisite studies will be considered.
                                                                                  Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                         Telecommunication Engineering: FT5, PTA
   Extra requirements:
                                                                                  Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   NONY12                                                                         36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit                     21681             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers

   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                  the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).                           Jan 2011           80.40          -             1               2
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                                                                                                     Feb 2011           80.40          -             1               2
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
                                                                            n Electronic Engineering/Microelectronic
                                                                                                                                                                       About the course: Concurrent degree program in electronics
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                Engineering                                                                              with Masters level studies in telecommunications. In addition to
   application (see page 21).                                                                                                                                          completing the electronic engineering degree program, including
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                 La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              project and practical experience requirements, students undertake
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                  21661 (CSP), 21663 (IFP)                                                            a telecommunication specialisation in years three to five. Students
   36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit                                                                                                   are required to write a minor thesis in their final year. Progress to
   the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).
                                                                                  » Bachelor of Electronic Engineering/Master of
                                                                                                                                                                       the Masters degree is subject to performance at a level deemed
                                                                                    Microelectronic Engineering: FT5, PTA
                                                                                                                                                                       satisfactory by the Head of School.Guaranteed entry: Year 12
                                                                                    21661            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers             applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be
                                                                                    Jan 2011            n/a           -            1               1                   offered a Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR
                                                                                                                                                                       is below 80 will be considered through normal selection processes.
                                                                                    Feb 2011            n/a           -            1               2




                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
240 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Major studies: Digital and analogue electronics, Digital                   Extra requirements:                                                       Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   signal processing, Digital systems, Electronic systems,                    NONY12                                                                    Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Electronics, Engineering, Engineering (electronics),                                                                                                 36).
                                                                              Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   Engineering (telecommunications), Mobile communications,
                                                                              page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Telecommunications, Wireless technologies.                                                                                                        n European Studies
                                                                              the selection process. This may include information such as work
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in               or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and either a study score of
   at least 25 in mathematical methods (CAS) or a study score of at
                                                                              may wish to provide other documentation in support of their               La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
                                                                              application (see page 21).
   least 20 in specialist mathematics.                                                                                                                  21861 (CSP), 21863 (IFP)
                                                                              Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                      Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page            » Bachelor of European Studies: FT3, PTA - CANCELLED
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                    36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit          21861            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra               the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).
   requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                           Jan 2011           n/a           -           4             10
   Middle-band: Completing physics or specialist mathematics =             n Environmental Management and Ecology                                        Feb 2011           n/a           -           8             23
   1.5 aggregate points higher per study to a maximum of 3 points.
                                                                                                                                                        About the course: This course introduces students to
   Extra requirements:
                                                                              La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga                                              contemporary Europe. Students study its culture, history, politics,
   NONY12                                                                                                                                               trade and tourism and at least one of its languages. They are also
                                                                              20381 (CSP), 20383 (IFP)
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                                                                                        encouraged to take advantage of La Trobe‘s European exchange
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during            » Bachelor of Science in Environmental Management and                     programs. In subsequent years students are required to complete
   the selection process. This may include information such as work             Ecology: FT3, PTA                                                       additional core subjects and subjects from a selected list which
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                 20381            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers      complement the study of Contemporary Europe. Guaranteed entry:
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                                                                                          Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 75 or more will
   application (see page 21).                                                  Jan 2011          53.80       35.71         15             18            be offered a Commonwealth supported place. Applicants whose
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions              Feb 2011          53.80       35.71         15             22            ATAR is below 75 will be considered through normal selection
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                                                                                       processes.
                                                                              About the course: Provides training in environmental
   36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit                                                                                    Major studies: European studies, French, Greek studies, History,
                                                                              management and ecology against the background of the Murray-
   the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).                                                                                          Italian studies, Latin, Mediterranean, Spanish.
                                                                              Darling River Basin. Environmental and ecological issues covered
                                                                              include wastewater treatment and disposal, air quality control,           Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in
n Electronic Technology                                                       population ecology, community ecology, forest and agricultural            English (ESL) or 25 in any other English.
                                                                              resources, water resource management, wildlife and fisheries              Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                    management and soil science. 360 credit points. Students must             a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
                                                                              enrol in units with a value of 120 points at each year level.             GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   21241 (CSP), 21243 (IFP)                                                   Guaranteed entry: Year 12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR        requirements for specifics.
   » Bachelor of Electronic Technology: FT3, PTA                              of 65 or more will be offered a Commonwealth Supported Place.             Middle-band: Re-ranking based on English (any), humanities
    21241            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers   Total offers      Applicants whose ATAR is below 65 will be considered through              (any), LOTE (any), drama, theatre studies, legal studies and
                                                                              normal selection processes.                                               psychology. Consideration given to SEAS applicants.
    Jan 2011          54.95          -            3              4            Major studies: Aquatic resource management, Aquatic science,              Extra requirements:
    Feb 2011          54.95          -            3              5            Biology, Catchment management, Conservation biology/ecology,
                                                                                                                                                        NONY12
                                                                              Ecological studies, Ecosystem management, Environmental
   About the course: Introduces students to electronic engineering            biology, Environmental impact assessments, Environmental                  Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
   technology, and develops an understanding of the pure and                  management, Environmental science, Environmental studies,                 (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered
   engineering sciences, computing, mathematics and management                Freshwater resources and environmental management, Natural                during the selection process. This may include information such as
   practices required in the electronic technology profession.                resource management, Resource/environmental management,                   work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
   Core units are undertaken across all year levels in electronics,           Science, Waste management and pollution control, Water quality            may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   mathematics, engineering physics and engineering management.               management.                                                               application (see page 21).
   Practical experience: eight weeks of approved work experience                                                                                        Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                              Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any).
   is an integral part of the program.Guaranteed entry: Year 12                                                                                         Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 65 or more will be             Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
                                                                                                                                                        36).
   offered a Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR              a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   is below 65 will be considered through normal selection processes.         GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                              requirements for specifics.                                            n Event Management
   Major studies: Digital and analogue electronics, Digital and
   microprocessor systems, Digital electronics, Digital signal                Middle-band: Completing any of biology, chemistry,
   processing, Digital systems, Electronic systems, Electronic                mathematical methods (CAS), physics or specialist mathematics             La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   technology and instrumentation, Electronics, Engineering.                  = 2 aggregate points higher per study, to a maximum 4 points.             22221 (CSP), 22223 (IFP)
                                                                              Re-ranking is also based on criteria associated with the La Trobe
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any) and either
                                                                              University Rural and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS).
                                                                                                                                                        » Bachelor of Business (Event Management): FT3, PTA
   mathematical methods (CAS) or specialist mathematics.
                                                                              Extra requirements:                                                        22221            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                    NONY12                                                                     Jan 2011          65.25       18.75         33             45
   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra               Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see              Feb 2011          64.95       40.00         47             72
   requirements for specifics.                                                page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   Middle-band: Completing physics or specialist mathematics =                the selection process. This may include information such as work          About the course: This course provides theoretical and practical
   1.5 aggregate points higher per study to a maximum of 3 points.            or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants               training for professionals in the special events sector. It covers
   Performance in prerequisite studies will be considered.                    may wish to provide other documentation in support of their               a broad spectrum of issues related to events management with
                                                                              application (see page 21).                                                an emphasis on the application of theoretical knowledge and
                                                                                                                                                        practical skills needed for the effective management of events.
                                                                                                                                                        It provides students with a broad array of possible career options


                                                                                                                                                                     La Trobe University | 241
 Higher Education qualification                            Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                                Other Graduates

   by combining a solid business degree-encompassing areas                        Extra requirements:                                                                  About the course: This course is designed to meet academic
   such as accounting, marketing, business law, entrepreneurship                  NONY12                                                                               and vocational requirements for a career in the finance and
   and economics - with specialized professional studies related                                                                                                       banking industry. The course is accredited by ASIC as being
                                                                                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   to the management and delivery of special events such as                                                                                                            RG146 compliant. It provides a broad understanding of financial
                                                                                  page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
   project management, arts and community festivals, meetings,                                                                                                         investments, financial planning, corporate finance and portfolio
                                                                                  the selection process. This may include information such as work
   conferences and trade shows as well as the opportunity to plan,                                                                                                     management. Students may also elect to study a number of
                                                                                  experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   deliver, and evaluate events. Industry/community participation is                                                                                                   finance subjects offering more depth in corporate finance, wealth
                                                                                  other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   encouraged.                                                                                                                                                         management, financial risk management, security valuation,
                                                                                  Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                       banking or international finance.
   Major studies: Event and tournament management,
                                                                                  Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Event management, Event management (festivals), Event                                                                                                               Students take seven compulsory subjects and one elective in first
                                                                                  36).
   sustainability, Events administration, Project management, Sports                                                                                                   year, five compulsory subjects and three electives in second year.
   (management), Tourism.                                                                                                                                              In the third year students take three compulsory subjects and
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4– a study score of at least 25 in             Event Management/Tourism Management                                                      five electives, including a compulsory work-integrated learning
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.                                                                                                                           capstone subject which offers students the opportunity to apply
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                          La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              the knowledge and skills developed through the degree to solving
                                                                                                                                                                       a practical work-relevant problem.
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                         22291 (CSP), 22293 (IFP)
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                                                                                                         Major studies: Banking and finance, Business, Corporate
                                                                                  » Bachelor of Business (Event Management/Tourism                                     finance, Economics, Finance, Financial planning, Financial risk
   requirements for specifics.                                                      Management): FT3, PTA                                                              management, International finance, Investments and portfolio
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing business
                                                                                    22291            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers             management.
   management = an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration
   will be given to performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS                 Jan 2011          63.20        28.57           14             17                   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   applicants.                                                                                                                                                         English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and a study score of at least
                                                                                    Feb 2011          63.20        40.00           15             21                   20 in mathematics (any).
   Extra requirements:
                                                                                  About the course: The Bachelor of Business (Event Management/                        Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   NONY12
                                                                                  Tourism Management) is grounded in business studies, but                             a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                                                                                                       GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                                  specifically designed for future leaders in careers where events and
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                                                                                                     requirements for specifics.
                                                                                  tourism management intersect. The distinguishing feature of this
   the selection process. This may include information such as work
                                                                                  course is the blend of theory and practical work where students                      Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
                                                                                  are offered the opportunity to plan, stage and evaluate an event                     an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
                                                                                  within a tourism context. Also, a triple-bottom line approach is                     performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS applicants.
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                 adopted where economic, social and environmental impacts of                          Extra requirements:
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                 events and tourism are examined.
   36).                                                                                                                                                                NONY12
                                                                                  Major studies: Business, Event management, Marketing, Tourism.
   Additional information: Not applicable.                                                                                                                             Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                  Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4– a study score of at least 25 in                        page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                                  English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.                                            the selection process. This may include information such as work
 Event Management/Marketing                                                      Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
                                                                                  a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                              other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                        GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                          Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   22281 (CSP), 22283 (IFP)                                                       requirements for specifics.                                                          Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   » Bachelor of Business (Event Management/Marketing):                           Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing business                                 36).
     FT3, PTA                                                                     management = an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration
                                                                                  will be given to performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS
    22281            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers           applicants.
                                                                                                                                                                  Finance/Science
    Jan 2011          62.10        3.23         31             44                 Extra requirements:
                                                                                                                                                                       La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
    Feb 2011          61.65       20.59         38             59                 NONY12
                                                                                                                                                                       21191 (CSP), 21193 (IFP) - CANCELLED
                                                                                  Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   About the course: This course combines marketing fundamentals                  page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                      » Bachelor of Finance/Bachelor of Science: FT4, PTA
   with studies in event management. Students study business                      the selection process. This may include information such as work                      21191             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
   essentials such as accounting, marketing, business law, tourism                experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   and project management, entrepreneurship and economics.                        other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).                    Jan 2011            n/a           -             0               0
   The specialized areas of the course allows students to develop                                                                                                       Feb 2011            n/a           -             0               2
                                                                                  Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   competencies and skills in marketing, advertising, brand and
                                                                                  Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   product management coupled with practical skills necessary for                                                                                                      About the course: Provides opportunity for students to combine
                                                                                  36).
   effective management of events.                                                                                                                                     their interests in finance with germane areas of science, in
   Major studies: Business, Event management, Marketing.                                                                                                               particular mathematics and statistics. The course comprises both
                                                                             Finance                                                                                  compulsory and elective units allowing for full majors in finance
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
                                                                                                                                                                       and at least one chosen area of science.Guaranteed entry: Year
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a
                                                                                  La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              12 applicants only. Applicants with an ATAR of 80 or more will be
                                                                                   21061 (CSP), 21063 (IFP)                                                            offered a Commonwealth Supported Place. Applicants whose ATAR
   middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12:VTAC Pi Form, STAT                                                                                                         is below 80 will be considered through normal selection processes.
   Multiple Choice (see page 36). See Extra requirements for specifics.           » Bachelor of Finance: FT3, PTA                                                      Major studies: Biochemistry, Botany, Business, Chemistry,
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing business                             21061            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers             Computer science, Economics, Electronics, Environmental science,
   management = an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration                                                                                                          Finance, Genetics, International finance, Management (financial),
   will be given to performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS                 Jan 2011            n/a           -            8              18
                                                                                                                                                                       Mathematics, Microbiology, Physics, Psychology, Space science,
   applicants.                                                                      Feb 2011            n/a           -            9              23                   Statistical science, Viticultural science, Zoology.



                                                                           CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
242 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–one of mathematical methods                 n Financial Services                                                        design, typography, photography, drawing and illustration,
   (CAS) or specialist mathematics and a study score of at least 25 in                                                                                  technical applications (print, pre-press and digital), multimedia,
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.                                                                                                            professional practice (research, marketing and application), along
                                                                               La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                  with various selected studies which relate to the designer’s task
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
                                                                               22531 (CSP)                                                              of communicating ideas, messages or broader information from
   GPA (see institutional page), tests (see page 36). See Extra                » Bachelor of Business (Financial Services): FT3, PTA                    client to customer. Mildura applicants should note that Graphic
   requirements for specifics.                                                 About the course: The course consists of a general business core         Design subjects will be offered based on sufficient student
                                                                               and subjects across a broad range of financial services discipline       enrolments. Students may need to transfer to Bendigo to complete
   Middle-band: Completing physics or specialist mathematics =
                                                                               areas. Students will choose subjects from each of four finance           the degree.
   1.5 aggregate points higher. Performance in prerequisite studies
   will be considered.                                                         specialisations. Students study financial investments, financial         Major studies: Graphic design, Illustration, Photography, Visual
                                                                               planning, corporate finance, and portfolio management. Students          communication.
   Extra requirements:
                                                                               take seven compulsory subjects and one elective subject in first         Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   NONY12                                                                      year and five compulsory subjects and three elective subjects in         English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see               second year, up to the end of which students may transfer to any of
                                                                                                                                                        Selection mode: Interview (40%) and folio (60%) (see
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during             a range of Bachelor of Finance courses, specialising in investments,
                                                                                                                                                        institutional page) and La Trobe University Rural and Regional
   the selection process. This may include information such as work            wealth management, financial risk management, banking and
                                                                                                                                                        Student Access Scheme (RRSAS). See Extra requirements for
   or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants                 international banking and finance, and corporate finance. In the
                                                                                                                                                        specifics.
   may wish to provide other documentation in support of their                 third year students take two compulsory subjects and six electives.
   application (see page 21).                                                                                                                           Extra requirements:
                                                                               Major studies: Finance, Financial Planning, Investments.
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                                                                                       See La Trobe University information pages for details. Applicants
                                                                               Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                                                                                       with multimedia components in their folios must submit the
                                                                               English (ESL) or 20 in any other English.
   36). Applicants described in the Admissions Test section must sit                                                                                    multimedia components to the relevant program/s by 30 October.
                                                                               Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
   the Science, Technology and Engineering test (see page 36).                                                                                          BENDIGO
                                                                               a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
                                                                               GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra              Interview and folio review: Applicants must contact the Course
n Financial Risk Management                                                    requirements for specifics.                                              Administrator, La Trobe Visual Arts and Design either in writing
                                                                                                                                                        or by emailing visualarts@latrobe.edu.au by 21 November and
                                                                               Middle-band: Completion of business management, accounting
                                                                                                                                                        include course name, applicant postal address and preferred date
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                     and/or economics = an aggregate of 1 point higher per study to a
                                                                                                                                                        for interview. Applicants must attend between 28 November - 3
   22511 (CSP)                                                                 maximum of 2 points. Consideration will be given to performance
                                                                                                                                                        December. (Late applicants must telephone (03) 5444 7969 or (03)
                                                                               in prerequisite studies, business studies (any) and to SEAS
   » Bachelor of Finance (Financial Risk Management): FT3,                     applicants.
                                                                                                                                                        5444 7217).
     PTA                                                                                                                                                MILDURA
                                                                               Extra requirements:
   About the course: This course is designed to meet academic and                                                                                       Interview and folio review: Applicants must contact the Course
   vocational requirements for a career in financial risk management.          NONY12
                                                                                                                                                        Coordinator, La Trobe Visual Arts and Design either in writing or
   It provides a comprehensive understanding of all areas of finance           Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see            by emailing k.haggblom@latrobe.edu.au by 21 November and
   and develops a thorough grasp of issues faced when working as               page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during          include course name, applicant postal address and preferred date
   a financial risk manager in a bank, stockbroking firm, investment           the selection process. This may include information such as work         for interview. Applicants must attend between 28 November - 3
   bank, fund manager, asset management consultant, insurance                  experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide        December. (Late applicants must telephone (03) 5051 4030).
   company or in a manufacturing, a service or a resources company.            other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
                                                                                                                                                        Additional information: To assist in the development of their
   Students study financial investments, financial planning, corporate         Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions           portfolio, applicants are advised to undertake studio arts and/
   finance, and portfolio management and four subjects in financial            Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page           or arts. Consideration will also be given as part of the La Trobe
   risk management. In the third year students take a compulsory               36).                                                                     University Rural and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS).
   work-integrated-learning subject, which offers the opportunity to                                                                                    Material fees are required for this course.
   apply the knowledge and skills developed through the degree to
                                                                            n Graphic Design
   solving a practical work-relevant problem.
                                                                                                                                                      n Health Information Management
   Major studies: Finance, Financial Planning, Wealth Management.
                                                                               La Trobe Uni, Bendigo                                                    (Masters)
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 25 in
   English (ESL) or 20 in any other English and a study score of at least
                                                                               24151 (CSP), 24153 (IFP)
   20 in mathematics (any).                                                    » Bachelor of Graphic Design: FT3, PTA                                   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                        24151            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers      21981 (CSP), 21982 (DFP)
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                                                                                              » Master of Health Information Management: FT2, PTA
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                  Jan 2011           n/a           -          22             28
   requirements for specifics.                                                  Feb 2011           n/a           -          23             29            21981            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers

   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on completing economics =                                                                                               Jan 2011           n/a           -           0              8
   an aggregate of 1 point higher. Consideration will be given to              La Trobe Uni, Mildura                                                     Feb 2011           n/a           -           0             18
   performance in prerequisite studies and to SEAS applicants.
                                                                               25151 (CSP)                                                              About the course: This specialist course enables students with a
   Extra requirements:
                                                                               » Bachelor of Graphic Design: FT3, PTA                                   first degree other than health information management to obtain
   NONY12
                                                                                                                                                        a professional Health Information Management qualification
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                25151            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                                                                                                        at postgraduate level. Graduates are prepared for the many
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during              Jan 2011           n/a           -           7              7           available career positions within the healthcare system. The
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                                                                                     course provides a comprehensive program of specialist knowledge
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide            Feb 2011           n/a           -           8              8
                                                                                                                                                        and skills in management of health information systems, health
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).          About the course: Provides the creative skills and technical             informatics, clinical coding and casemix, and health data analysis.
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions              expertise necessary for employment as a graphic designer in a            Students undertake placements in hospitals, government health
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page              variety of professional situations and includes participation in a       departments, disease screening and research centres, cancer and
   36).                                                                        broad range of design activities. Core subjects are compulsory with      special registries, health software/systems, development firms,
                                                                               a choice of studio and/or general electives. Studies include applied     and other health settings. They graduate with the expertise to


                                                                                                                                                                     La Trobe University | 243
n Higher Education qualification                           n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                                n Other Graduates

   take leading roles in activity-based health care systems and other              Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                         www.healthworkforce.com.au/main_rrma.asp to determine the
   critical functions. The course is suitable for graduates of health              English (ESL) or 25 in any other English and a study score of at                     RRMA classification for your locality). Consideration is also based
   disciplines and of non-health disciplines. A two year deferral is not           least 20 in one of biology, chemistry, mathematics (any), physical                   on criteria associated with VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes.
   available for this course.                                                      education or physics.                                                                Extra requirements:
   Major studies: Clinical coding, Health administration, Health data              Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                              NONY12
   analysis and management, Health informatics, Health information                 middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,
                                                                                                                                                                        Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
   management.                                                                     form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                                                                                                                        (see page 21) and provide evidence of residence in a regional
   Prerequisites: Any approved Bachelor’s degree, or subsequent                    requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                                        or rural area if applicable and if they wish other information to
   postgraduate study. Applicants must have obtained a grade point                 Middle-band: Re-ranking based on relevant work experience,                           be considered during the selection process. This may include
   average of at least H2A (70% or above) in their most recently                   criteria associated with La Trobe University Rural and Regional                      information such as work or community experience or reasons for
   completed university undergraduate degree. Applicants will be                   Student Access Scheme (RRSAS) and VTAC’s Special Entry Access                        applying. Applicants may wish to provide other documentation in
   selected on academic merit. Professional experience in related                  Schemes.                                                                             support of their application (see page 21).
   fields will be considered. English language requirements apply.                 Extra requirements:                                                                  Test: Applicants must have completed the UMAT (see page 36).
   Selection mode: NONY12: Form and GPA (see institutional page).                  CY12 (some applicants only): Applicants with work experience                         Interview (some applicants only): Details will be provided by
   See Extra requirements for specifics.                                           must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see page 21).                               telephone or mail to applicants who are required to attend. These
   Extra requirements:                                                             NONY12                                                                               applicants must attend in November/December.
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                        SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                 page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                      Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                the selection process. This may include information such as work                     Placements policy (see institutional page).
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide               experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide                    All applicants: Applicants are advised to review the Faculty Policy
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).              other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).                   outlining conditions related to the health status for dental and oral
   Additional information: Commonwealth supported places (CSP)                     Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                       health students via the following weblink: http://www.latrobe.
   are limited. All applicants are advised to apply for both CSP and               Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                       edu.au/health
   domestic fee paying (DFP) places. Successful applicants may be                  36).                                                                                 Additional information: NONY12 Applicants currently residing
   required to undertake bridging studies (short ‘Summer’ or ‘Winter’
                                                                                   SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                                in Rural Remote and Metropolitan Classification 3-7 must provide
   course), depending on the content of their previous degree. See
                                                                                   Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional                      evidence of their residence as part of the VTAC application and will
   our website for current information (www.latrobe.edu.au/health)
                                                                                   Placements policy (see institutional page).                                          have this taken into consideration. For further information about
                                                                                                                                                                        this program go to www.healthworkforce.com.au/main_rrma.asp
n Health Sciences
                                                                             n Health Sciences in Dentistry/Dentistry
                                                                                                                                                                  n Health Sciences/Business
   La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
                                                                                   La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
   24161 (CSP), 24163 (IFP)                                                                                                                                             La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
                                                                                    24191 (CSP)
   » Bachelor of Health Sciences: FT3, PTA                                                                                                                              22051 (CSP), 22053 (IFP)
                                                                                   » Bachelor of Health Sciences in Dentistry/Master of
    24161            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                     Dentistry: FT5                                                                     » Bachelor of Health Sciences/Bachelor of Business: FT4,
                                                                                                                                                                          PTA
    Jan 2011          60.05       35.82          67             82                   24191            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers

    Feb 2011          60.05       35.82          67             87                                                                                                       22051             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                     Jan 2011          99.10        16.87           86             99
                                                                                                                                                                         Jan 2011           74.55          -             9              12
                                                                                     Feb 2011          99.10        16.87           88            103
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                                                                                                               Feb 2011           74.55        12.50           9              16
                                                                                   About the course: This course, which is undergoing accreditation
   21741 (CSP), 21743 (IFP)                                                                                                                                             About the course: This double degree provides a comprehensive
                                                                                   by the Australian Dental Council, enables graduates to register
   » Bachelor of Health Sciences: FT3, PTA                                         as a dentist. Dentists practice the prevention, diagnosis and                        foundation in business studies with a health specialisation and
                                                                                   treatment of diseases, injuries and malformations of the teeth,                      provides graduates with a close understanding of the technologies,
    21741            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                                                                                                        institutions, professions and funding systems associated with
                                                                                   jaws and associated structures. The majority of practising dentists
    Jan 2011          61.50        9.20         254            304                 in Australia work in the private sector, predominantly as general                    health care.
    Feb 2011          61.50       12.80         254            389                 practitioners. There is demand for dentists across Australia and                     Students are required to complete 270 credit points from both
                                                                                   job opportunities in both metropolitan and rural Victoria are                        the business and the health sciences disciplines. To fulfil the
   About the course: This flexible course provides students with                   available. Travel to and residence in metro, regional & rural areas                  requirements for the Business, students must complete core
   the opportunity to develop a broad understanding of the field of                for clinical placement is required. Clinical placements will occur                   subjects and one business major. The Bachelor of Health Sciences
   health sciences while pursuing areas of interest within the human               in both semester time and vacation periods in years 3, 4 and                         requires students to complete core first year subjects and then
   biosciences, occupational health or public health domains.                      5. The Bachelor of Health Sciences in Dentistry is a three year                      complete studies relevant to their chosen major. Subject to
   In first year, students will undertake an interdisciplinary common              preregistration degree that prepares students for entry into the                     timetable restrictions and subject prerequisites, students can
   year in which students enrol in subjects with their peers who are               Master of Dentistry. The Masters component is a two year clinical                    choose their own balance of health sciences and business subjects
   enrolled in the full range of health sciences courses. The focus is             education program.                                                                   in any given year of their course. Fieldwork placement may be
   on basic human biosciences and factors influencing health and on                Major studies: Dentistry.                                                            available in specified third year public health subjects.
   developing an understanding of the roles of health professionals in             Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 35 in                         Major studies: Business (economics), Business (information
   the health and welfare sectors. In the second year, students select             English (any) and a study score of at least 25 in biology and                        systems), Environmental health, Ergonomics, safety and health,
   one major from the availalbe campus major studies (see Major                    chemistry.                                                                           Financial management, Financial planning, Human physiology
   studies below). In third year, students continue to study subjects                                                                                                   and anatomy, Human resource management, Macroeconomics,
   from their chosen major . The course also allows for some elective              Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
                                                                                                                                                                        Management, Marketing, Public health, Rehabilitation counselling.
   choice from elsewhere in the University at both second and third                a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,
                                                                                   interview, UMAT (see page 36). See Extra requirements for                            Prerequisites: Units 1 and 2 –two units (any study combination)
   year.                                                                                                                                                                from general mathematics or mathematical methods (CAS). Units
                                                                                   specifics.
   Major studies: Environmental health, Ergonomics, safety                                                                                                              3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in English (ESL) or 25 in any
   and health, Human physiology and anatomy, Public health,                        Middle-band: A regional bonus will be applied to this course for
                                                                                                                                                                        other English and a study score of at least 20 in one of biology,
   Rehabilitation counselling.                                                     applicants whose home postcode is from regional Australia as per
                                                                                                                                                                        chemistry, mathematics (any), physical education or physics.
                                                                                   the Rural Remote and Metropolitan Area Classification 3-7 (see

                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
244 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                 KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                  n Health Sciences/Clinical Prosthetics and                                   n Health Sciences/Dietetic Practice
   middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,
   form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                              Orthotics
   requirements for specifics.
                                                                                                                                                            La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   Middle-band: Relevant work experience and criteria associated               La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                      22211 (CSP), 22213 (IFP)
   with VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes considered.                        21401 (CSP), 21403 (IFP)                                                     » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Dietetic
   Extra requirements:                                                         » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Clinical                           Practice: FT4
   As for Health Sciences                                                        Prosthetics and Orthotics: FT4                                              22211            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers    Total offers

                                                                                21401            Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                                                                                                             Jan 2011          90.35        8.33          12             29
n Health Sciences/Clinical Audiology                                            Jan 2011          81.10        3.45           29             40              Feb 2011          88.75       33.33          18             40
                                                                                Feb 2011          81.10        3.45           29             55
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                                                                                                  About the course: This course is designed to provide the
                                                                               About the course: Prosthetics and orthotics (P&O) is the clinical            specialist skills and training required for those seeking a
   22331 (CSP), 22333 (IFP)
                                                                               discipline related to the provision of prostheses (artificial limbs)         professional career as a dietitian. It incorporates biosciences,
   » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Clinical                                                                                                     nutrition science, public health, professional practice and
                                                                               to people with amputations and orthoses (supportive devices) to
     Audiology: FT4                                                                                                                                         interdisciplinary studies in health sciences. Graduates work in all
                                                                               people with musculoskeletal weakness or neurological disorders.
   About the course: This course prepares students to become                   In the first year of the program, students enrol in subjects with            areas of dietetics, including hospitals, private practice, community
   competent Audiologists with strong interdisciplinary and practice           peers across health sciences to focus on basic human biosciences,            health and food industry. The first year is an interdisciplinary
   experience, well prepared for the required Audiology intern                 factors influencing health and understanding the roles of health             year focusing on human biosciences, determinants of health
   year. The course includes theoretical, pre-clinical and clinical            professionals. In the second year, students begin to develop skills          and the roles of health professionals; as well as chemistry and
   subjects covering clinical practice and community health, with              specific to P&O and extend their previous learning. Students                 food chemistry. In second year students study physiology and
   equal emphasis on adult and pediatric populations, from both a              expand their theoretical knowledge in third year, alongside                  biochemistry and develop skills in human nutrition and food
   diagnostic and rehabilitative viewpoint. The course will strongly           research methodology, clinical assessment, and the application               science. In third and fourth years, students apply their knowledge
   focus on interdisciplinary activities with peers across the Faculty of      of P&O techniques. By fourth year, students will apply their                 of food and nutrition and learn practical skills of dietetic
   Health Sciences, as well as on clinical rural practice. On completion       knowledge and skills to the management of disorders using case               management. Clinical placement (20 weeks) occur during third
   of this course, graduates are eligible to progress to the internship        based learning techniques. Clinical activities including working             and fourth year and include individual dietetic case management,
   year necessary for attainment of the Clinical Certificate of Practice       with volunteer patients in years 3 and 4 and placements at P&O               community nutrition and food service management.
   issued by the Audiological Society of Australia (ASA).                      facilities in year 4 are a key feature of the course.                        Major studies: Biochemistry, Dietetics, Food science, Nutritional
   Major studies: Clinical audiology.                                          Major studies: Orthotics, Prosthetics.                                       sciences, Physiology, Public health nutrition.
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                 Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4– a study score of at least 30 in
   English (ESL) or 25 in any other English and at least 25 in two             English (ESL) or 25 in any other English, and a study score of at            English (ESL) or 25 in any other English, and a study score of at
   of biology, chemistry, mathematics (any), physical education or             least 25 in two of biology, chemistry, a mathematics (any), physical         least 25 in two of biology, chemistry, mathematics (any), physical
   physics.                                                                    education or physics.                                                        education or physics.
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                     Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                      Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a
   middle-band of approximately 20%, form.                                     middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,                     middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,
   NONY12: ATAR, form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page            form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra            form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   36). See Extra requirements for specifics                                   requirements for specifics.                                                  requirements for specifics.
   Middle-band: Re-ranking associated with VTAC’s Special Entry                Middle-band: Relevant work experience of at least 12 months at               Middle-band: Relevant work experience and criteria associated
   Access Scheme.                                                              a prosthetic and orthotic facility, and criteria associated with VTAC’s      with VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes considered.
   Extra requirements:                                                         Special Entry Access Schemes considered.                                     Extra requirements:
   NONY12                                                                      Extra requirements:                                                          CY12 Form: (some applicants only): Applicants with work
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see               CY12 Form (some applicants only): Applicants who have relevant               experience must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see page
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during             work experience with a Prosthetic and Orthotic facility must                 21).
   the selection process. This may include information such as work            complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see page 21).                            NONY12
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide           NONY12                                                                       Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).          Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions              page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during              during the selection process. This may include information such as
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page              the selection process. This may include information such as work             work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
   36).                                                                        experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide            may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                       other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).           application (see page 21) . Test (some applicants): Applicants
                                                                                                                                                            described in the Admissions Tests section must complete the STAT
   Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional                     Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                                                                                                            Multiple Choice (see page 36).
   Placements policy (see institutional page).                                 Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                               36).                                                                         SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
                                                                               SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                        Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
                                                                                                                                                            Placements policy (see institutional page).
                                                                               Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
                                                                               Placements policy (see institutional page).




                                                                                                                                                                         La Trobe University | 245
n Higher Education qualification                            n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               n Other Graduates

n Health Sciences/Exercise Physiology                                              The second year includes specialist professional subjects. By the                    course to fulfill remaining credit point requirements. Fieldwork
                                                                                   third and fourth years, students can apply their skills to health                    placement may be available in specified third year public health
                                                                                   information management in all types of health settings. They                         subjects.
   La Trobe Uni, Bendigo                                                           undertake professional practice placements in: hospitals, disease                    Major studies: Anthropology, Chinese, Environmental health,
   24551 (CSP), 24553 (IFP)                                                        screening research and pharmaceutical centres, health software                       Ergonomics, safety and health, French, History, Human physiology
   » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Exercise                            development firms, government health departments and cancer/                         and anatomy, Indonesian, International development, Politics,
     Physiology: FT4                                                               other disease registries. Graduates have the specialist expertise                    Public health, Rehabilitation counselling, Sociology, Spanish.
   About the course: This course prepares graduates as entry                       to meet the massive Australia-wide, Health Information Manager
                                                                                                                                                                        Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in
   level Exercise Physiologists with strong theoretical, practical and             shortage.
                                                                                                                                                                        English (ESL) or 25 in any other English and a study score of at
   interdisciplinary experience who are well prepared to enter the                 Major studies: Clinical coding and casemix systems, Health data                      least 20 in one of biology, chemistry, mathematics (any), physical
   workforce. In first year, students undertake a combination of                   analysis and management, Health informatics, Health information                      education or physics.
   interdisciplinary and discipline specific subjects. In second year,             management.
                                                                                                                                                                        Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a
   students continue to develop skills specific to the discipline. Third           Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                         middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,
   and fourth years of the course include pre-clinical and clinical                English (ESL) or 25 in any other English and a study score of at                     form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   subjects covering theoretical and practical exercise assessment of              least 20 in one of biology, chemistry, mathematics (any), physical                   requirements for specifics.
   populations, with and without chronic disease. The course has a                 education or physics.
   strong focus on interdisciplinary activities with peers across the                                                                                                   Middle-band: Relevant work experience and criteria associated
                                                                                   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                with VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes considered.
   Faculty of Health Sciences, as well as clinical practice in the rural
                                                                                   a middle-band of approximately 20%, form. NONY12: ATAR,
   healthcare setting.                                                                                                                                                  Extra requirements:
                                                                                   form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
   Major studies: Exercise Physiology.                                             requirements for specifics.                                                          CY12 (some applicants only): Applicants with work experience
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                                                                                                         must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see page 21).
                                                                                   Middle-band: Relevant work experience and criteria associated
   English (ESL) or 25 in any other English, and a study score of at               with VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes considered.                                 NONY12
   least 20 in one of biology, chemistry, mathematics (any), physical                                                                                                   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                                   Extra requirements:
   education or physics.                                                                                                                                                page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                                   CY12 Form (some applicants only): Applicants with work
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with                                                                                                                the selection process. This may include information such as work
                                                                                   experience must submit a VTAC Pi form (see page 21).
   a middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form,                                                                                                              experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
   GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra                     NONY12                                                                               other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   requirements for specifics.                                                     Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                        Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on criteria associated with La                    page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                      Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Trobe University Rural and Regional Study Access Scheme (RRSAS)                 the selection process. This may include information such as work                     36).
   and VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes.                                        experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
                                                                                                                                                                        SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
                                                                                   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
   Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                                  Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
                                                                                   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   NONY12                                                                                                                                                               Placements policy (see institutional page).
                                                                                   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see                   36).
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                                   SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                          n Health Sciences/Occupational Therapy
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                                                                                                 Practice
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide               Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).              Placements policy (see institutional page).
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                                                                                                                        La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page            n Health Sciences/International                                                            20111 (CSP)
   36).                                                                        Development                                                                              » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Occupational
   SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                                                                                                                  Therapy Practice: FT4
   Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional                         La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                               20111             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
   Placements policy (see institutional page).                                      22121 (CSP), 22123 (IFP)                                                             Jan 2011            n/a           -             4               6
                                                                                   » Bachelor of Health Sciences/Bachelor of International                               Feb 2011            n/a           -             4               6
n Health Sciences/Health Information                                                 Development: FT4, PTA
  Management                                                                         22121            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                                                                                                        La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
   La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                           Jan 2011          75.35        18.75           16             18                   24081 (CSP), 24083 (IFP)
   21791 (CSP), 21793 (IFP)                                                          Feb 2011          75.35        18.75           16             23                   » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Occupational
   » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Health                                                                                                                     Therapy Practice: FT4
                                                                                   About the course: This course provides an integrated study and
     Information Management: FT4, PTA                                              approach in both health sciences and international development.                       24081             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                   Students acquire the knowledge and skills relevant to planning
    21791            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers   Total offers                                                                                                 Jan 2011           80.85        63.16          19              24
                                                                                   and delivery of health services in developing nations.
    Jan 2011          66.90       18.52          27             33                 Students are required to complete 270 credit points from both the                     Feb 2011           80.85        63.16          19              27
    Feb 2011          66.90       18.52          27             47                 international development and the health sciences disciplines. The
                                                                                   requirements for International Development consist of 120 credit
   About the course: This course equips students with high-                        points of core subjects plus 150 credit points of discipline-specific
   level skills and knowledge for managing and analysing health                    elective subjects. Health Sciences requires students to complete
   information. It combines management, health informatics,                        core first year subjects with the remaining studies focused on their
   disease classification, epidemiological research and classroom                  chosen major. Subject to prerequisites and timetable restrictions,
   and hands-on study. In the interdisciplinary common first year,                 students can choose their own balance of health sciences and
   students study alongside peers across the Faculty, focusing on                  international development subjects in any given year of their
   basic human biosciences, factors influencing health, and roles
   of health professionals, including Health Information Managers.

                                                                            CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
246 | VTAC Guide 2012                                                 KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                   NONY12                                                                    Extra requirements:
21331 (CSP), 21333 (IFP)                                                  Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form              CY12 Form: (some applicants only): Applicants with work
                                                                          (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered             experience must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see page
» Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Occupational                  during the selection process. This may include information such as        21).
  Therapy Practice: FT4                                                   work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants          NONY12
 21331            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers      may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
                                                                                                                                                    Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
                                                                          application (see page 21). Applicants must include a statement
 Jan 2011          81.00       10.11         89            110                                                                                      page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                          (in their own words) demonstrating their knowledge of the
                                                                                                                                                    the selection process. This may include information such as work
 Feb 2011          81.00       10.11         89            125            occupational therapy profession. Applicants with work experience
                                                                                                                                                    experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
                                                                          must include details of how their work experience is relevant to
                                                                                                                                                    other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
                                                                          occupational therapy and length of experience.
La Trobe Uni, Mildura                                                                                                                               Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
                                                                          Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
25181 (CSP)                                                               Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                                                                                                    Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
» Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Occupational                                                                                            36).
                                                                          36).
  Therapy Practice: FT4                                                                                                                             SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
                                                                          SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
                                                                                                                                                    Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
 25181            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers      Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
                                                                                                                                                    Placements policy (see institutional page).
 Jan 2011           n/a           -           3              4            Placements policy (see institutional page) and the Inherent
                                                                          Requirements for the Completion of Entry Level Occupational
 Feb 2011           n/a           -           3              5            Therapy courses at La Trobe University via www.latrobe.edu.au/         n Health Sciences/Paramedic Practice
                                                                          health
La Trobe Uni, Shepparton                                                  Additional information: For further information regarding                 La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga
25071 (CSP)                                                               inherent course and industry requirements visit www.latrobe.edu.          20061 (CSP)
                                                                          au/health
» Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Occupational                                                                                            » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Paramedic
  Therapy Practice: FT4                                                                                                                               Practice: FT4
                                                                       n Health Sciences/Orthoptics
 25071            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers                                                                                 20061             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers


 Jan 2011           n/a           -           4              5            La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                    Jan 2011           71.45        41.67          12              15
 Feb 2011           n/a           -           4              6            21891 (CSP), 21893 (IFP)                                                   Feb 2011           71.45        50.00          12              16

About the course: This course provides students with the skills
                                                                          » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Orthoptics:
and knowledge to assess and treat people who are limited in
                                                                            FT4                                                                     La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
their ability to undertake activities of everyday life. The first          21891            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers      24061 (CSP)
year of this program is an interdisciplinary common year in                                                                                         » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Paramedic
                                                                           Jan 2011          78.60        3.57         28             38
which students enrol in subjects with peers across the Faculty                                                                                        Practice: FT4
of Health Sciences. In second year, students build knowledge               Feb 2011          78.60        3.57         28             55
and skills in anatomy, using evidence in practice, understanding                                                                                     24061             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers

health related sociology concepts and psychology. In years three          About the course: This course prepares graduates to provide
                                                                          specialist clinical investigations for the detection, diagnosis and        Jan 2011           80.10        59.09          22              25
and four, students will study occupational therapy specifically
through a curriculum centered on a hybrid model of problem-               treatment of vision and eye disorders. The first year of the program       Feb 2011           80.10        59.09          22              31
based learning, an instructional strategy in which students learn         is an interdisciplinary common year with a focus on human
                                                                          biosciences, factors influencing health and on the roles of health
through contextualized problems manifest in health care settings.
                                                                          professionals in the health sector. In second year students develop       La Trobe Uni, Mildura
Please note that the 1st year of Albury-Wodonga, Mildura and
                                                                          an understanding of orthoptic theory and skills and explore the           25041 (CSP)
Shepparton courses will be conducted at the Albury-Wodonga,
Mildura and Shepparton campuses respectively, whilst the 2nd,             underpinning areas of anatomy and physiology of the eye and the           » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Paramedic
3rd and 4th years will be conducted at the Bendigo campus.                effect of ocular pathology or eye movement disorders on structure           Practice: FT4
                                                                          and function. The third and fourth years will integrate knowledge
Major studies: Occupational therapy.                                      of eye disorders with orthoptic practice with increased emphasis           25041             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers

Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in              on clinical application. Clinical education leading to entry level         Jan 2011            n/a           -             2               3
English (ESL) or 25 in any other English, and a study score of at         competency will be the focus of the last 18 months. Students will
least 25 in one of biology, chemistry, a mathematics (any), physical      attend and experience clinical placement within the Eye and Ear            Feb 2011            n/a           -             2               4
education or physics.                                                     Hospital clinical school network with the opportunity for rural,
Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                   interstate or international placements.                                   La Trobe Uni, Shepparton
middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,                  Major studies: Ophthalmology, Orthoptics, Vision sciences.                25051 (CSP)
form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra         Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in
requirements for specifics.                                                                                                                         » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Paramedic
                                                                          English (ESL) or 25 in any other English, and a study score of at           Practice: FT4
Middle-band: Re-ranking based on relevant employment or work              least 25 in two of biology, chemistry, a mathematics (any), physical
experience, criteria associated with La Trobe University Rural and        education or physics.                                                      25051             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS) and criteria associated            Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                    Jan 2011            n/a           -             7               7
with VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes.                                 middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,
Extra requirements:                                                                                                                                  Feb 2011            n/a           -             7               8
                                                                          form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
CY12                                                                      requirements for specifics.                                               About the course: The course focuses on Emergency Primary Care
Form (some applicants only): Applicants with relevant work                Middle-band: At least 3 months relevant work experience and               with community practice components, and develops professional
experience (eg health professional aide) must submit a VTAC Pi            criteria associated with VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes              skills in assessment, interpretation, clinical skills, critical thinking,
form (see page 21). These applicants must include details of how          considered.                                                               risk management and QA, OH&S, and infection control. First year
their work experience is relevant to occupational therapy.                                                                                          is an interdisciplinary year, whilst second year includes primary
                                                                                                                                                    emergency care, counseling skills, community health promotion
                                                                                                                                                    and law and management in the health sector. The final two

                                                                                                                                                                  La Trobe University | 247
n Higher Education qualification                          n Vocational Education and Training (VET) qualification                                               n Other Graduates

   years further develop professional skills specific to Paramedicine.           La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                              Form: All applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form
   Students take integrated professional placements in years 2 to                                                                                                     (see page 21) if they wish other information to be considered
                                                                                  21341 (CSP), 21343 (IFP)
   4, ranging from community-based health services to work based                                                                                                      during the selection process. This may include information such as
   learning opportunities in hospitals, community settings and with              » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Physiotherapy                            work or community experience or reasons for applying. Applicants
   Ambulance Victoria. The course also has a number of mandatory                   Practice: FT4                                                                      may wish to provide other documentation in support of their
   requirements for health and safety reasons. Please note that                    21341            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers             application (see page 21).
   the 1st year of the course is conducted at all La Trobe regional                                                                                                   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
   campuses with subsequent years conducted at Bendigo campus                      Jan 2011          96.40        11.94           67             96
                                                                                                                                                                      Tests section must sit the STAT Multiple Choice (see page 36).
   only.                                                                           Feb 2011          96.40        11.94           67            104                   Interview (applicants are eligible for interview if STAT results are in
   Major studies: Paramedics.                                                                                                                                         the high 90s): Details will be provided by telephone or mail/email
   Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                  La Trobe Uni, Mildura                                                                to the applicants required to attend interviews in January.
   English (ESL) or 25 in any other English, and a study score of                                                                                                     SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
   at least 20 in one of biology, chemistry, health and human
                                                                                  20121 (CSP)
                                                                                 » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Physiotherapy                            Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
   development, mathematics (any), physical education, physics or
                                                                                   Practice: FT4                                                                      Placements policy (see institutional page).
   psychology.
                                                                                                                                                                      Additional information: Please note, after 2012 work
   Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                         20121            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                                                                                                      experience will no longer be considered as part of the selection
   middle-band of approximately 20% NONY12: ATAR, form, GPA (see
                                                                                   Jan 2011            n/a           -            7               7                   criteria. All applicants must refer to the FAQ flyer located via the
   institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra requirements
                                                                                                                                                                      following link: www.latrobe.edu.au/health
   for specifics.                                                                  Feb 2011            n/a           -            7               9
                                                                                                                                                                      Successful applicants will be required to hold a current student
   Middle-band: Re-ranking based on criteria associated with La
                                                                                                                                                                      registration with the Physiotherapy Board of Australia in order to
   Trobe University Rural and Regional Study Access Scheme (RRSAS)               La Trobe Uni, Shepparton                                                             be eligible to undertake clinical placements.
   and VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes.
                                                                                  25081 (CSP)
   Extra requirements:
                                                                                 » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Physiotherapy                      n Health Sciences/Podiatric Practice
   NONY12
                                                                                   Practice: FT4
   Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
   page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                 25081            Clearly-in    % below     CY12 offers    Total offers             La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga
   the selection process. This may include information such as work                                                                                                   20151 (CSP)
                                                                                   Jan 2011            n/a           -            7               7
   experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide                                                                                                  » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Podiatric
   other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).              Feb 2011            n/a           -            7               7                     Practice: FT4
   Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                About the course: First year, students undertake an                                   20151             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
   Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page                interdisciplinary year with peers across the Faculty. Second year,
   36).                                                                          students begin to develop physiotherapy skills and explore human                      Jan 2011            n/a           -             2               3
   SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                         biosciences. In the final 2 years, students apply knowledge and                       Feb 2011            n/a           -             2               4
   Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional               practical skills to physiotherapy management of disorders across
   Placements policy (see institutional page).                                   the life span. In pre-clinical semesters, students develop practical
                                                                                 skills of physiotherapy by practicing on each other. In the final                    La Trobe Uni, Bendigo
   Medical and Physical Capacity checks are a compulsory industry                18 months, students will be assigned to a clinical school. Clinical                  24211 (CSP)
   requirement for students undertaking Clinical Placements with                 placements may occur outside normal university semester periods,
   Ambulance Victoria. For further information please refer to the                                                                                                    » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Podiatric
                                                                                 and in a variety of healthcare settings including cardiorespiratory,                   Practice: FT4
   following website: www.latrobe.edu.au/health                                  musculoskeletal and neurological physiotherapy practice.
                                                                                 Bendigo/Melbourne students undertake all years at the campus                          24211             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers

n Health Sciences/Physiotherapy Practice                                         they are enrolled at. Albury-Wodonga, Mildura and Shepparton                          Jan 2011           73.30        40.00          10              14
                                                                                 students undertake first year only at their respective campuses,
                                                                                 and the remainder of their course at the Bendigo campus. This                         Feb 2011           73.30        40.00          10              15
   La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga
                                                                                 combined degree course is offered on a full-time basis only.
   20081 (CSP)
                                                                                 Major studies: Physiotherapy.                                                        La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
   » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Physiotherapy
     Practice: FT4                                                               Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in                         21601 (CSP), 21603 (IFP)
                                                                                 English (ESL) or 25 in any other English, and a study score of at                    » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Podiatric
    20081           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers           least 25 in two of biology, chemistry, a mathematics (any), physical                   Practice: FT4
                                                                                 education or physics.
    Jan 2011         92.45       50.00         12             12
                                                                                 Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                               21601             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
    Feb 2011         92.45       50.00         12             12                 middle-band of approximately 20%. NONY12: ATAR, form, GPA                             Jan 2011           72.70        5.56           54              95
                                                                                 (see institutional page), interview, STAT (see page 36). See Extra
                                                                                                                                                                       Feb 2011           72.70        5.56           54             111
   La Trobe Uni, Bendigo                                                         requirements for specifics.
   24491 (CSP), 24493 (IFP)                                                      Middle-band: Re-ranking based on criteria associated with
                                                                                 La Trobe University Rural and Regional Student Access Scheme                         La Trobe Uni, Mildura
   » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Physiotherapy
     Practice: FT4
                                                                                 (RRSAS) and VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes.                                     25191 (CSP)
                                                                                 Extra requirements:                                                                  » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Podiatric
    24491           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                                 NONY12 Form (some applicants only): Applicants with 6 months                           Practice: FT4
    Jan 2011         96.40       69.23         13             13                 full-time or equivalent paid employment experience as a health
                                                                                                                                                                       25191             Clearly-in   % below      CY12 offers    Total offers
                                                                                 professional or health professional assistant must download and
    Feb 2011         96.40       69.23         13             14
                                                                                 complete an extra Supplementary Information Form and return it                        Jan 2011            n/a           -             1               1
                                                                                 to the Physiotherapy Selection Officer by 11 November 2011. The
                                                                                                                                                                       Feb 2011            n/a           -             1               1
                                                                                 Supplementary Information Form can be downloaded via: www.
                                                                                 latrobe.edu.au/health (see note in Additional information for
                                                                                 changes to 2013 requirements).

                                                                          CSP=Commonwealth supported place VGF=VET Government funded place DFP=Domestic fee-paying place IFP=International fee-paying place For information about fee-types and
248 | VTAC Guide 2012                                               KEY   CY12=Current Year 12 students NONY12=Non-Year 12 applicants FT=Full-time (e.g. FT4 = Full-time, four years) PTA=Part-time available course entries see page 17.
La Trobe Uni, Shepparton                                                 n Health Sciences/Speech Pathology                                          the Albury-Wodonga, Mildura and Shepparton courses will be
                                                                                                                                                     conducted at the respective campuses, whilst the 2nd, 3rd and 4th
25091 (CSP)
                                                                                                                                                     years will be conducted at the Bendigo Campus.
» Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Podiatric                       La Trobe Uni, Albury-Wodonga
                                                                                                                                                     Major studies: Speech pathology.
  Practice: FT4                                                             20161 (CSP)
                                                                                                                                                     Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 35 in
 25091            Clearly-in   % below     CY12 offers   Total offers       » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Speech                       English (ESL) or 30 in any other English, and a study score of at
                                                                              Pathology: FT4                                                         least 25 in one of biology, chemistry, mathematics (any), physical
 Jan 2011           n/a           -            1              2
                                                                             20161            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers     education or physics.
 Feb 2011           n/a           -            1              2
                                                                             Jan 2011           n/a           -           7              9           Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with
About the course: This course provides the skills and knowledge                                                                                      a middle-band of approximately 20%, form. NONY12: ATAR,
for careers in the field of Podiatry. It is focused on the assessment,       Feb 2011           n/a           -           7              9           form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
management and prevention of disorders of the foot and ankle.                                                                                        requirements for specifics.
In 1st year, students undertake an interdisciplinary common                 La Trobe Uni, Bendigo                                                    Middle-band: Re-ranking based on relevant employment or work
year with peers across the Faculty. The focus is on basic human                                                                                      experience and criteria associated with La Trobe University Rural
                                                                            24311 (CSP)
biosciences and factors influencing health and an understanding                                                                                      and Regional Student Access Scheme (RRSAS) and VTAC‘s Special
of the roles of health professionals. In 2nd year students begin            » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Speech                       Entry Access Schemes.
to develop podiatric skills and further explore the underpinning              Pathology: FT4
                                                                                                                                                     Extra requirements:
human biosciences and public health aspects. In 3rd year, students           24311            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                                                                                                     NONY12
undertake more extensive clinical placements and by 4th year,
students will be able to apply their knowledge and practical                 Jan 2011          88.75       54.55         11             13           Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see
skills to the management of disorders using case based learning                                                                                      page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during
                                                                             Feb 2011          88.75       54.55         11             15
techniques. The 1st year of the Albury-Wodonga, Mildura, Bendigo                                                                                     the selection process. This may include information such as work
and Shepparton courses will be conducted at each campus                                                                                              experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide
respectively; whilst the 2nd, 3rd and 4th years of the rural cohort         La Trobe Uni, Melbourne                                                  other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).
will be conducted at the Bendigo Campus.                                    21621 (CSP), 21623 (IFP)                                                 Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions
Major studies: Podiatry.                                                    » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Speech                       Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
                                                                              Pathology: FT4                                                         36).
Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–a study score of at least 30 in
English (ESL) or 25 in any other English, and a study score of at                                                                                    SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS
                                                                             21621            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
least 25 in two of biology, chemistry, a mathematics (any), physical                                                                                 Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional
education or physics.                                                        Jan 2011          87.25        7.94         63             89           Placements policy (see institutional page).
Selection mode: CY12: ATAR and two-stage process with a                      Feb 2011          87.25        9.52         63             98
middle-band of approximately 20% and form. NONY12: ATAR,                                                                                           n Human Nutrition
form, GPA (see institutional page), STAT (see page 36). See Extra
requirements for specifics.                                                 La Trobe Uni, Mildura
                                                                            25201 (CSP)                                                              La Trobe Uni, Melbourne
Middle-band: Re-ranking based on relevant work experience
                                                                            » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Speech
                                                                                                                                                      21371 (CSP), 21373 (IFP)
with a Podiatrist or Podiatry department and criteria associated
with La Trobe University Rural and Regional Student Access                    Pathology: FT4                                                         » Bachelor of Human Nutrition: FT3
Scheme (RRSAS) and VTAC’s Special Entry Access Schemes.                                                                                               21371           Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
                                                                             25201            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers
Extra requirements:
                                                                             Jan 2011           n/a           -           4              4            Jan 2011         61.75       18.18         11             24
CY12 Form (some applicants only): Applicants with relevant
work experience with a Podiatrist or Podiatry Department must                Feb 2011           n/a           -           4              4            Feb 2011         60.45          -          15             52
complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see page 21).
                                                                                                                                                     About the course: The aim of this course is to prepare graduates
NONY12                                                                      La Trobe Uni, Shepparton                                                 for careers in nutrition and public health, health promotion,
Form: Applicants must complete and submit a VTAC Pi form (see               25141 (CSP)                                                              government policy areas, food industry and other areas of
page 21) if they wish other information to be considered during                                                                                      nutrition and biosciences. This course provides the foundations
the selection process. This may include information such as work            » Bachelor of Health Sciences and Master of Speech                       in nutritional biosciences and pre-requisites for entry into
experience or reason for applying. Applicants may wish to provide             Pathology: FT4                                                         graduate entry courses in dietetics and other allied health areas.
other documentation in support of their application (see page 21).           25141            Clearly-in   % below    CY12 offers   Total offers     This interdisciplinary program combines core subjects in human
Test (some applicants): Applicants described in the Admissions                                                                                       nutrition with basic science, biochemistry, physiology and
                                                                             Jan 2011           n/a           -           4              7           public health disciplines. In the first and second year, subjects
Tests section must complete the STAT Multiple Choice (see page
36).                                                                         Feb 2011           n/a           -           4              8           in biological sciences, chemistry, biochemistry, physiology and
                                                                                                                                                     nutritional science are studied. Third year subjects relate to food
SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS                                                       About the course: This course prepares Speech Pathologists               science, nutrition research methods, the role of food and nutrition
Policy: Students must comply with the Clinical and Professional             who diagnose, treat and manage people of all ages with                   in human health and disease and community and public health
Placements policy (see institutional page).                                 communication and/or swallowing disorders. Speech, literacy,             nutrition.
                                                                            language, voice, fluency, hearing science and swallowing are
                                                                                                                                                     Major studies: Biochemistry, Food science, Genetics,
                                                                            studied across the lifespan. First year is an interdisciplinary
                                                                                                                                                     Microbiology, Nutritional sciences, Physiology, Public health
                                                                            common year. Second year students begin to develop skills in the
                                                                                                                                                     nutrition.
                                                                            discipline and further explore the human biosciences and public
                                                                            health aspects, normal development, anatomy and function of              Prerequisites: Units 3 and 4–English (any) and chemistry.